Religious Values In War And Peace Research Paper Custom Essay Help

Table of Contents Introduction

The religious values in War and Peace


Works Cited

Introduction Religion has for many years thought to be one of the main causes of wars in the world today. There are various religions in the world, which normally drive people into war. Due to the diverse philosophic dimensions, many religions get into war based on differences in their religious backgrounds.

In the past, people killed each other because of spiritual differences among other arenas of differing. Actually, civilization has helped a lot in solving the problems that lead people into war. Although war is a natural thing, which occurs in the presence of humanity, the maintenance of ethical and moral values is of great significance. This is because they help in preventing the loss of life as well as maintaining peace in the universe. This paper will therefore explore the religious values that are evident in war and peace.

The religious values in War and Peace There are three religious views about war known to date. The first ideology is the pacifist view, which states that any form of violence, which might cause physical harm to a fellow human being, is unethical and inhuman. Secondly, there is the just war belief. The argument under just war states that the pursuance of wars occurs with the highest interest of justice.

In addition, this view also stresses on war fought according to just rules. Thirdly, there is also a belief in just war. The principle behind this view follows that the Supreme Being is responsible for commanding his people to fight the holy war. The problem with this view is that all those people who do not follow religion are enemies (Dicken 121).

There are many religions around the world, which hold diverse views on the issues of war. Islam being the largest religion on earth has many ideas concerning war. In the first place, Islam means having to submit an individual’s will to the Supreme Being (Allah). Islam’s views of war get support through the struggle and fight under the will of God.

In fact, Islam is the only religion, which comes up with the ideas about the Holy War. Therefore, the duty of the Muslims is to fight under the will of God. The Muslims believe that anybody breaking the will of God deserves severe punishment. They do also believe that anybody who dies in war shall enter the kingdom of God without any passage (Hertog 56).

Despite the fact that Muslims fight for the Holy war, according to the commandments of Allah their God, it is unethical to kill a fellow human being especially in the event that one is proclaiming to follow God’s word. Emphasis of moral values is thus essential in order to ensure that no killing occurs because of war.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More At the same time, non-violent behavior should be overemphasized to stop people from killing each other. Moral behavior entails the engagement of non-violence and preserving religious morals in the society. Religious laws deserve corrections in a manner that just war does not prevail under any form of seeking justice. Conflicts, which lead into war, deserve instant halting to ensure that there is no war, which has happened under any case.

The second largest religion, Christianity has three different positions in regard to war. They include war, which is just, view of pacifism and crusade war. To begin with, the Pacifism view holds that any form of crisis or a disagreement requires diplomatic solutions with the best peaceful manner possible.

This idea also supports the fact that human rights should always prevail and relative actions used to stop the occurrences of war. This is because pacifists do not condone any form of violence carried out. In fact, absolute pacifists believe that killing is morally wrong and at the final analysis both the parties would have to lose (Dicken 127).

There is also the second position of the Christians who believe that war is not governed by ethics but by laws. For example, there is also inclusion of a just war. This kind of war can only happen in the event of self-defense and external aggression. However, this is also limited to killing of innocent lives.

The Bible states that people should love their enemies meaning that even when they are defending themselves, they should also avoid hurting their enemies in any sense. The pacifists on the other hand do not support just war. They believe that any shedding of the blood in the name of seeking justice is immoral by itself and wars should be avoided under any cost (Horowitz 127).

Humanism is a pragmatic philosophy developed just in the recent times. In postmodern society, there are many beliefs, which support the act of humanism. In this sense, there is nothing recognized as killing of a person even in war. The humanists believe that people should not enter into war under any cost.

The fundamental rule of this view is that people should treat others according to the best moral and ethical way possible. That is why the basis of humanitarian principles is on the respect for others; trust in others, resource sharing, and cooperation with each other. This enhances humanity and peace in a society, which is prone to conflicts (Hertog 34).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Religious Values in War and Peace specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The basis of many of the religious values is on advocacy for non-violent behavior. Non-violence is a moral philosophy, which helps two conflicting parties to achieve peace after a resolution. Religious values call for respect and cooperation as a community, which shall live together, even after the end of the world.

In fact, many religions such as Christianity call for resistance, which is passive. This entails forgiving those who have forsaken them. Therefore, the avoidance of violence is deserved under any cost because it leads to physical harm. Honest dealings are the best way to predict that a society will be morally right and that no war shall be in existence. Under any cost, peaceful dealings enhance Christian values and humanity leading to good coexistence (Hertog 45).

Conclusion In conclusion, religious values ought to be enhanced in order to stop and eradicate instances of war. Conflicts in religions should also be avoided because they lead to crisis, which often involve use of violence and physical harm to other people. One of the religious views, which prevail when it comes to the philosophy of war, is pacifism.

Pacifists base their arguments on the fact that war is inhuman, and conflicts should be resolved in a peaceful manner. On the other hand, humanitarian principles are based on this view and they entail respect of others and cooperation as one society. Actually, many religious beliefs are based on use of non-violence when dealing with human conflicts. This is because the idea of war is not governed by ethical and moral standards in the society.

Works Cited Dicken, Thomas M. Dialogues on Values and Centers of Value: Old Friends, New Thoughts. Amsterdam: Rodopi, 2001. Print.

Hertog, Katrien. The Complex Reality of Religious Peace building: Conceptual Contributions and Critical Analysis. Lanham, Md: Lexington Books, 2010. Print.

Horowitz, Irving L. The Idea of War and Peace: The Experience of Western Civilization. New Brunswick: Transaction, 2007. Print.


Collective Invention during Industrial Revolution Synthesis Essay best essay help: best essay help

According to Alessandro Nuvolari (348), collective invention refers to a situation where a firm shares its technological know-how with its competitors. Firms share information on concept and functioning of new technologies freely with one another. It was first noted in iron industry of Cleveland in the United Kingdom. Iron producers had new innovations in the industry and they freely disclosed information on performance and construction of new blast furnaces they had installed (Alessandro 348).

In addition, the information was not protected to allow the competing firms to utilize it wholly. Alessandro (349) noted that sharing these insights resulted to increased blast temperature and height of the furnaces. As a result, production costs and consumption of fuel decreased.

The major similarity between collective invention and heroic individual invention is that both provided important source of innovations during the early stages of industrialization. Historians emphasize that early stages of industrialization were characterized by individual contributions, commonly referred to as “heroic age” (Alessandro 347).

The main feature of heroic age was individual contribution towards technological development. However, during the early stages of industrialization competing firms shared information freely, for example, the iron producers’ case. Therefore, both collective and heroic individual inventions contributed to technological advances in early phases of industrialization.

Use of patent system to protect individual inventors in heroic individual inventions differentiates it from collective inventions (Alessandro 349). For example, in Britain, inventive activities are rewarded, therefore a legal system has been set up to protect the rights of inventors.

Use of patent system is associated with economical gain, which has resulted to increased individual inventors. In addition, Alessandro (350) stated that patents protect information and it is sold to firms by individual inventors, for instance, the case of American glass industry (351).

On contrary, in collective invention, the information is freely shared and it is not protected by patents. An example of collective invention is the case study of Cornish mining district. After discovery of steam power, publications were made on features, operating processes and performance of each engine. As a result, competing companies adopted practice and created a competitive environment (Alessandro, 354).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to Alessandro, incremental invention is subjecting new technology to a process of improvements to acquire its full economic and technical potential (347). Collective and incremental inventions are related and interdependent processes. For example, mining activities at Cornish district were affected by flooding.

Steam power was utilized to mine drainage effectively. After numerous technical experiments, the steam pumping engine was developed to address the problem. In addition, the full potential of the steam power was realized (Alessandro 352). The above process is an illustration of the incremental improvements during industrial revolution.

The final results were freely shared to other competing companies: a characteristic of collective invention. Alessandro (359) notes that the practice of steam power was adopted by other competitors and the process of incremental improvement continued. Additional invention favors collective invention and supports technology sharing (Alessandro 360).

Alessandro argues that collective and incremental inventions contributed more in early stages of industrial revolution compared to own inventions (361). The incremental improvement originates from users and producers of a technological idea.

Works Cited Alessandro, Nuvolari. “Collective invention during the British Industrial Revolution: the case of the Cornish pumping engine.” Cambridge Journal of Economics 28.3 (2004): 347-363. Print.


Fiji Water Report Case Study best college essay help

Introduction Fiji water is a company that was introduced by David Gilmour, who was a Canadian hotel and gold mining tycoon. The company began its’ activities in the Fiji Island. Through a lease from the government, the company obtained a piece of land located in Fiji’s main island that has numerous artesian aquifer found in the Yaqara valley. The slogans used by the company were significant in attracting a competitive advantage.

For instance, the company used slogans like “untouched” and “unpolluted” to show the desire to conserve the environment. This created a competitive advantage, which made the company gain a new brand image, an indicator of good health, new trends, and a high-end.

Currently, the company has been encountering criticism on its’ business model, which it uses in shipping products and the carbon print. For carbon print criticism, it emerged from the areas where there was high quality water, which is readily available. The aim of this report is to analyze the future options of Fiji waters company growing up as a company that will be conscious to the environment and ensure its’ sustainability.

Situational Assessment Analysis of the competitive landscape

Generally, the company’s rate of competition globally ranges between moderate and high. This conclusion is derived from the use of the Porters Five Forces, which is an analytical tool. Fiji Water competition emerges from the suppliers, who distribute substitute products. These suppliers are also found in the global beverages market. They include suppliers of carbonated drinks sparkling water and alcoholic beverages. The main competitors are from the suppliers and producers of bottled water.

The US has several local bottled water brands. They include arrowhead, Zephyrhills, Deer park, Poland spring among others. Australia also has companies that compete with Fiji waters.

They include Spring Valley twist, which is under the management of Cadbury Schweppes, Cool Ridge, Mount Franklin (which is a leader in Australia and receives its sources from the selected springs in Australia and is owned by Coca cola), Island Chill (A Fiji company, which is appreciated in Melbourne and is increasingly expanding to different regions of Australia).

There are competitors like Island of Chill and Evian, who aim at making the market of water tap and other related bottled water superior. Island Chill tends to market silicone particles. The particles are perceived to be of high quality and luxurious, a strategy also used by Fiji water. This strategy is applied in the market of high premium image.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Fiji water and Island Chill apply differentiation generic strategy to pursue this high premium image market. There are competitors who use mid prices to sale their water. An example of such companies is the Coca-cola and Nestle companies. This generic strategy concentrates on cost leadership. Unlike Evian water, these companies have employed the use of filtered water rather than the use of the streams from far-off and well known reserves.

SWOT Analysis Strength

Fiji Company has a number of opportunities that make it strong in the market. First, the company’s water is healthy, luxurious and trendy. The strategies used for branding are successful. In addition, the consumers consider the product to be of high quality. The water contains minerals and healthy contents which are not in the products of competitors


The company has faced controversies regarding bottled water and the environment it operates in. For instance, the company has received pressure from activists who accuses the company of green washing. Last, the company lacks facts as to why it employs carbon negative campaigns.

Problem Statement

From the case, the primary problem of Fiji is with it model used in selling bottled water for free. This strategy or model will not and cannot be appreciated as being environmentally sustainable. In the marketing of bottled water, using this model is considered to be ‘green washing’ of the consumers.

In addition, environmental activists are never comfortable with the idea of businesses using resource intensive business models in marketing water. This is wrong especially when the model is used to achieve sustainability. However, Fiji is using this model, which is known as “every drop is green”.

This problem emerges from a variety of factors and activities. First, the key markets used by Fiji Company provide readily available water for free. Second, all the main markets, except Australia, exist over longer distances and they require the company to have large amounts of fuel to be able transport heavy bottled water all over the world.

Third, plastic bottles are known to damage the environment. Last, the profits or wealth benefited by the shareholders of Fiji is not equally distributed in the nation that it operates in. This is interesting because the company is known to contribute about $3 million weekly from exports to the economy. The companies’ production process in the factories is known to be highly mechanized, a characteristic that is linked with transfer of pricing.

We will write a custom Case Study on Fiji Water Report specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In addition, the company encounters a problem of not paying extraction tax to the Fiji government for a period of ten years. Statistics indicates that the Fiji government has lost millions of dollars from this company. This is an exhibit that the company has resisted or ignored the taxes put in place by the government from 2008.


The alternatives explained below are vital for Fiji waters to overcome the challenge of being environmental friendly and achieving sustainability.

Maintenance of the Business Model (Alternative one) Using this alternative, the company has to maintain its’ initial model and insist that it is not green washing and has to continue investing in corporate social responsibilities (CSR) strategies. In addition, the company is to reduce the carbon footprint. This alternative comes in as a result of the accusations of ‘green washing’ from the universal community.

This way, the company will function freely in the society as a whole and reduce the concentration on making profits for its stakeholders. Applying this method will help the company strengthen its image and reduce the negative impacts. Unfortunately, the company will not consider itself to be fully sustainable considering the inherent nature of transporting bottling water across the world.

Furthermore, the company has to work on reducing the environment impact by working with the carbon disclosure project supply chain leadership collaboration. The company goal will be to use renewable materials for packaging and understand whether they can integrate with agricultural sector in Fiji to help control the consumption of synthetic resources. The company should make clean water a top priority to enable it build a good image.

Alternative of changing the Business model (Alternative two) The company’s model is full of flaws as long as the company continues to have a negative carbon print. Alternatively, the company has to change its’ model and come up with a new product. It is suggested that the business has to create a water purifier that the water has to go through before it is distributed in the market.

The filters have to be replaced at selected times in a year to ensure that the company has a continuous business with the customers. Using a purifier will enable the company enter other markets, avoiding shipping bottled water to areas in which water is readily available. This will help the company reduce the release of the carbon emissions and also reduce the amount used to ship their products around the world.

Integration of the new products and a sustainable behavior (Alternative three) This is a third option that Fiji can employ. This is where the company can integrates the first option and the second one. For instance, the company can increase its’ investment in the Corporate Social responsibility by working together with the community by providing donations to different programs in the community. In addition, combining the two options will help the company be associated with the products that are environmental friendly. The integration will also ensure that if one option fails, the company will take advantage of the other option and increase its operation in Australia. For instance, the combination of the two options will help the company to compete effectively by the Refresh Group Company Limited, which uses these options in Australia. This will be a better strategy to use in competition, as Fiji diversifies.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Fiji Water Report by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Analysis of the alternatives This section is an analysis of the suggested alternatives for Fiji water

Alternative one

This alternative when compared with the other two will require a smaller initial investment. Its’ payback period will also be shorter because the alternative requires the reworking of the initial business model or integrating new products in the company’s market. Competitively, the company will maintain its’ distribution chain, which is currently efficient. Unfortunately, using this alternative, the company will lose its position with the consumers.

This is the case especially when the company does not respond to the concerns of the consumers. In addition, using this option, the company is required to maintain and improve government relations, make social donations, and aim at reducing environmental effects. When this is ignored, the business brand image is weakened.

Alternative two

In the alternatives, the second alternative has the greatest risks. The alternative requires high initial investment. Comparing it to alternative one, its’ payback is long because it depends on the period the company will have to make profits again, which is uncertain. Using this alternative it becomes hard to understand how the company’s strength will be achieved and how the competition advantage will be maintained.

Despite these challenges, the alternative offers the greatest impact on reducing the environmental damages. However, this has to be accompanied with research to understand the alternative’s feasibility. This is because the alternative will keep the company’s production, but it may not be feasible. Fortunately, when the company creates a good image by satisfying the society and preserving the environment, it will become a business of praise, indicating sustainability in a bottled water company.

Alternative three

This is an option that integrates both option one and two. Combining these options indicates that the company has diversified the risk because both the options have their flaws. However, the business will have increased the potential to improve the brand and increase its’ profits internationally. By this alternative, the company has the ability to invest in the society as outlined by the first option. In addition, a less harmful business model will be put in place and hence reduce environmental effects.

Recommendations To this end, it is recommended that Fiji water has to aim at achieving sustainable growth by increasing the investments in corporate social responsibility initiatives. The company has to work with the Carbon Disclosure Project Supply Chain Leadership and Carbon Disclosure Project.

This will help the company to reduce the effects of carbon release. The company should also conduct investigation and researches on the suitable business model. I recommend the use of high quality filters by the company. The filters should be in line with the natural processes. This recommendation is made because it agrees with the current FIJI Water strategy of brand image for high quality water.

The company’s image will improve because as a high quality water provider, the company would have employed a new way for sustainability. This way provides the company with an opportunity to win back hotels and restaurants that had dropped its water products as a result of the ‘green washing’ strategy, which encountered a lot of criticism.

Adopting the use of purifiers will relieve the company from the cost of shipping water to other countries. In addition, when the company begins to use environmentally friendly materials, it would have taken a step further by offering biodegradable water bottles.

By adopting this option, it is believed that the company will successfully build a good relationship with the society and hence have the ability to effectively attend to CSR initiatives.

Action Plan To effectively implement the option, this section covers a 5 year implementation plan

Year 1

At this time, the main activity will be improvement and increase benchmarking and material use. This will be accompanied by setting of realistic goals for emission and reduction of plastic materials.

Second, it would be necessary to communicate the goals of the project, which will indicate the phasing-out of bottled water. This will be done by the public relations and the marketing team.

Conducting the feasibility of the new business models to be adopted, such as the purification systems

Make donations to the society through the adopted CSR initiatives and has to enhance community involvement

Year 2

Development of a purification system (which had to be assessed during the first year).

Marketing of the purification systems in the European markets and the US, beginning with the restaurants. When it succeeds at this level, the marketing has to proceed to the inclusion of potential partners.

Adoption of biodegradable materials for packaging

Year 3

Try to break in new markets especially in the United Kingdom and Australia

Continue to support manufacture of purifiers, create new environment for CSR –initiatives.

Year 4

Continue with the production of purifiers and its marketing

Continue with the eradication of bottled water and support of CSR

Year 5

Completely eradicate bottled water, investing the new products, and continued support to CSR strategies.

Contingency Plan As the company ventures in the new market, it is likely to clash with powerful competitors. To overcome this scenario, the company should focus on moving its resources to the initial product of bottled water.

FIJI water’s should ensure that the new purifiers are fully accepted in the market before they start eradicating the bottled water.


Fiji Water: A comprehensive analysis Case Study cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Executive summary The main idea behind entrepreneurship is the production of goods and services that perform well in their respective markets, thus creating opportunities for optimum financial gains for the entrepreneurs. However, the development of such products and services requires the fulfilment of certain specific conditions to ensure that the goods or services gain acceptance in the market coupled with developing and remaining relevant even as trends in the market change.

As exciting as the launching of such products and services may be, the process of ensuring that they get to the intended consumers while elevating profit levels is not without its challenges. This paper looks at an example of these aspects through a case study regarding Fiji Water and its manufacturing company.

The paper is analytical in nature and it displays some of the aspects that make the product unique and relevant in the market, some of the challenges that the product’s company encounters, how the company has dealt with the challenges in the past, as well as challenges that it currently faces, and possible solutions to its presenting problems. It also provides a possible contingency plan in case such solutions do not prove fruitful.

Fiji Water: Situational assessment Fiji Water is a bottled water brand from Fiji that sells artesian water containing silica, which is a mineral renowned for its anti-aging and rejuvenation properties. Although the product’s launch market was Fiji, it has gained international acclamation through its distribution to other countries including the United States, Canada, and Australia. Due to such widespread recognition, the products market is vast and dynamic, thus enabling more sales and reaching consumers than the company had earlier anticipated.

Although this element has positive implications regarding financial gain, the vastness of the market also means that the product faces competition from numerous other companies selling similar products. Bottled water is an alternative product, as opposed to supplementary products such as most fast foods that accompany the consumption of soft drinks. As such, Fiji water faces competition from various local brands that sell similar products in different countries.

For instance, in the United States, the brand goes against local brands such as Ice Mountain, Deer Park, Arrowhead, and Poland Spring. In addition, the brand’s classification in the same category as soft drinks puts it in the same pool as renowned brands such as Coca Cola and PepsiCo, both of which have an established clientele worldwide.

These two companies are part of the few in the world that enjoy a form of monopoly in the soft drinks department. Such monopoly has created a challenge for Fiji Water to curve a niche in the market and become relevant.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Certain attributes of the product have enabled it to stand out thus giving it a competitive edge against others in its category. First, the quality of Fiji water has enabled it to gain and maintain approval from consumers and distributors alike. Unlike most other mineral water brands, Fiji water contains light mineralisation and its artesian quality gives it a clean crisp taste that enables consumers to feel the purity of the product.

In addition, unlike most other brands that are bottled at cold mountainous regions, Fiji Water comes from a tropical region, thus giving it a sense of exotic luxury, which is refreshing for the consumers. Good quality ensures that consumers repurchase a product in the future and market it to other potential customers through the word of mouth. Secondly, the uniqueness of its packaging ensures that consumers are in a position to distinguish the product from others on sight when shopping for bottled water.

When the company introduced its brand, especially in the American market, the majority of other brands of bottled water were bottled with paper labels bearing conservative colours. In order to ensure that people shopping for bottled water would immediately spot Fiji water, the packaging company, Fiji Water LLC, packaged the product in square bottles with brightly coloured labels bearing three-dimensional graphics that were stylishly attractive and easy on the eyes.

This bold move ensured that people noticed the product first as retailers lined it up with other brands on shelves in supermarkets and convenience stores and that they would easily recognise it when going for future purchases.

The marketing and strategy for the product also set it apart from the rest of the brands. For instance, in the United States, the product was distributed to wholesale as well as retail stores in strategic cities such as Los Angeles and Miami. In order to reach a wider market, the company supplied the product to big strategic outlets as well as small retail outlets such as drug stores and gas stations, thus ensuring a wide reach and more objective response.

In 2005, the brand had distribution in over 400 Cole’s supermarkets. The bottles also bore a series of unique phrases that created awareness about the product’s origin and quality, such as “bottled in Fiji” and “what ecosystem is your water”. The trend with regard to consumption of bottled water is that people perceive it as a “cool” or “trendy” drink. People have made it “fashionable” to drink bottled water, hence giving it a sense of prestige and luxury.

The marketing team for Fiji Water took advantage of this concept in the pricing by ensuring that the price range is suitable enough to fall into the same category with products from beverage giants such as Coca Cola and PepsiCo, yet low enough to provide an affordable alternative for such other high quality brands. Research shows that consumers would rather pay extra for a good quality product than buy a cheap bad quality product.

We will write a custom Case Study on Fiji Water: A comprehensive analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In the marketing and distribution of a product, it is important to consider the regulatory framework that governments apply in various countries in order to facilitate the estimation of profitability. For instance, it is important to research on taxation policies and ensure that they favour the company before embarking on a business in a given country.

Some countries impose high importation duties in order to facilitate local production of certain products while others keep the taxes affordable to encourage importation and facilitate reduction in prices on specific products in a country. In instances where the import duty is high, the determinant factor would be the demand for the product, thus laying the basis on whether the sale of the product in such a country offsets the costs incurred during importation.

For instance, during the early years of production of Fiji Water in Fiji, the government of Fiji, upon realisation of the impact the company had on the economy, decided to raise its taxes on exportation of bottled water in order to gain from the venture.

However, due to the influence that the company had and the high employment rates it had created in the country, the company managed to counter the policy by threatening to lay off most of its labour force, which was essentially comprised of local inhabitants from areas surrounding the bottling plant. This move would cause mass unemployment and create the possibility of protests as people ranked the company as one of the most well paying institutions in the country.

It is also important to assess the norms in a country in order to evaluate the acceptance of the product and its consequent profitability. For instance, after a successful entry into the Australian market, Fiji Water tried to make entry into the United Kingdom. However, the company faced opposition from environmentalists and conservationists because of the distance that the water would travel to reach the people and the damage this element would have on the environment.

Britain is one of the countries with the highest quality tap water in the world and thus environmentalists and conservationists thought it illogical to transport drinking water from Fiji to Britain when people could simply drink tap water. They also thought it unnecessary to go through such trouble when there was already a product from France, which was much nearer and thus provided a “cleaner “option that served the same purpose as Fiji Water.

The aspect of provision of alternatives and variety, which had provided for acceptance of the product into the market in other countries, did not seem to apply to the conservative British society as conservation of the environment through the production of least possible amounts of carbon emissions took centre stage as part of the society’s norms.

The introduction of Fiji Water into the British market sparked controversy and created scrutiny of the product and the company’s operations worldwide. It also sparked protests against bottled water, terming it as an unnecessary evil. The main concern was the amount of carbon emissions released into the atmosphere during transportation and production of the products throughout the world and the general effects that such emissions have on the environment, such as the escalation of global warming.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Fiji Water: A comprehensive analysis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More SWOT Analysis In determining the viability of a product for future success, it is crucial to perform an analysis of the product’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT).


One of Fiji Water’s strengths is the uniqueness of the product when compared to similar products in the market. Most bottled water products come from mountainous regions and undergo high levels of mineralisation, a factor that has a great impact on the taste of the water. Fiji Water undergoes natural filtration by volcanic rocks for 450 years and it contains silica (a mineral with rejuvenating and anti-aging properties), thus requiring very light mineralisation.

Therefore, the water has a crisp clean taste that is appealing to consumers and contributing to the establishment of a more permanent market. Secondly, the pricing of the product ensures affordability by most people in the countries that the company distributes the product. This aspect ensures that Fiji Water is a household product with all the qualities of a luxury brand. The wide distribution of the product is also another notable strength as it ensures for a bigger market and more profitability.


The product has a few weaknesses, and one such weakness is the location of the bottling company. This aspect is important as it determines accessibility of the product and the expenditure spent on transportation. Although profit margins make up for transportation inconvenience, development of infrastructure in the area would make it cheaper to transport the product by road. Another weakness is the involvement of various other companies in the production and distribution process that makes it vulnerable to lags in decision-making.


The Company is expanding into other countries hence new opportunities, including the possibility of expansion into untapped markets such as Asia and Africa. As global trends keep evolving, they create opportunities for access into other markets. Advancements in technology also provide opportunities for the water company to tap into markets worldwide through Internet marketing.


The operation of the company and the product face two main threats, viz. the uproar that environmentalists and conservationists create regarding carbon emissions from the bottling and transportation processes and the sustainability of the water source. The most crucial concern of the two is the sustainability of the source considering the area of the source and the amount of water harvested for distribution.

Problem statement The primary problem exhibited in the case study is the effect that the protests by environmentalists and conservationists have on the productivity and profitability of the company. A rise in boycotts for bottled water products would mean a decrease in consumption and unnecessary expenditures leading to massive losses.


The company can employ several alternatives in the mediation of the primary problem.

Expansion into rising untapped markets in Asia and Africa

The sale of bottled water to companies in different countries so that the buying companies can offset transportation costs

Strategic expansion and concentration on specialised markets

The use of the Internet in marketing


The criterion for measurement of success for the alternative methods depends largely on reduction in expenditure and increase in profitability. The company should use as little money as possible in expenses while gaining as much as possible from the sale of the product.

Analysis of alternatives The main advantage of expanding into upcoming markets is that the cost of marketing is reasonable and people are more open to trying out new products.

The most crucial disadvantage for this alternative is the unpredictability of the market. It is difficult to establish the trends in consumption in such markets. The advantage of selling the product to companies straight from the source is that it saves money in expenditure previously applicable to transportation. It also cuts out some of the blame that was the focus of upraise against the product in Britain.

Strategic expansion means that the company should focus on just a few markets that have the greatest potential for growth and profitability. Although this option curtails wide distribution, it promotes smart distribution creating a few reliable markets for the product. Internet sales would reduce advertisement costs greatly while making up for the loss created by the strategic expansion formula.

Recommendations The most recommendable option among the alternatives would be strategic expansion, as it ensures that the company remains profitable while eliminating unnecessary costs in advertisement and efforts for wide distribution. It also creates a more reliable market for the product, thus reducing the negative variables in evolving market trends.

Action plan

The company should concentrate on selling the product more in countries that are most receptive and indicate higher sales as this ensures profitability and sustainability for the company. The use of research would be vital in the establishment of such markets before the initiation of the implementation process.

Contingency plan

In case the recommended plan does not prove viable, the company would benefit from the exploration of the other alternatives in the analysis as they all aim at the same objectives, viz. reducing expenditure and increasing profitability.


Various Perspectives of Human Disagreements Term Paper scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Views on Disagreement


Justification Account



Introduction In human society, it is normal for people to express varying views regarding a certain concept, idea, or even opinion. It is not obvious that all societal members would take a similar perspective regarding some of the popular ethical issues, such as drug abuse, abortion, prostitution, and even euthanasia.

Disagreements exist because of individual orientation to the world meaning that people are given different instructions on how to handle certain issues. In many cases, an individual’s opinion would be based on culture, rules and regulations, and societal norms. Each individual would tend to give evidence to support his or her view, which makes it difficult for an individual to believe one side of the story.

In many cases, those in high positions because of their educational levels and exposure levels would think that they are well versed with issues affecting society hence they might be in a better position to give accurate views. This means that an individual would think others are inferior because of their cultural backgrounds, which is not actually true. An individual would find a reason to claim that his or her opponent is biased.

Lackey (2007) noted that those who engage in fierce debates are always epistemic peers. Scholars are fronted with one major question regarding the significance of disagreement among epistemic peers. This article looks at various perspectives regarding disagreements. The paper evaluates the views of various theorists regarding the value of differences in opinion.

Views on Disagreement Philosophers have designed two major perspectives to explain some of the reasons that make epistemic peers engage in debates over controversial topics. One of the perspectives is non-conformism, which holds that a disagreement among peers is reasonable. One of the scholars named Gideon Rosen (2001) observed that peers are allowed to engage in disagreements, irrespective of whether there is enough evidence.

In this regard, disagreeing with another individual over an issue does not mean being unreasonable since differences in opinions are productive to the society. According to Rosen, the jury could perhaps express varying opinions regarding the direction of a certain case, but this does not show inability to reason among the judges. In the same way, respected paleontologists have always disagreed over the real causes of death in dinosaurs, but they still agree over some facts.

The above scholar seems to suggest that, even though evidence could be evaluated carefully, it should not be the reason for agreement since some individuals could still be having divergent views based on other factors.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On his part, Kelly Thomas justified his varying views by suggesting that equality in terms of intelligence, thoughtfulness, and acquaintance with his peers does not prove any inferiority on his side. In other words, he was trying to show that accessing similar educational system and going through similar set of standards does not mean that people should reason in the same way. Suggesting a different perspective or opinion is a sign of democracy and openness.

Peter van Inwagen was of the view that a good philosopher ought to be skeptic meaning that he or she should accept some sort of criticism from his or her peers (Lackey, 2007). In any defense of a philosophic thesis, some are opposed to the contents of the thesis while are others are always in support of it. Those who reject it should not be viewed with contempt since they would simply be expressing their views based on what they know.

Knowledge is always cumulative implying that an individual will accumulate it over a long period. This does not mean that each person would accumulate it in the same way. The level of interpretation is always different meaning that people will always have differences. Opponents of a certain opinion or view should not be subjected to unnecessary criticism since they might be having something to prove.

In this regard, dissenting views in philosophy should not be revised, but instead they should be analyzed to understand their meaning. Scholars aligned to nonconformist perspective justify their stand with two explanations. The first explanation is given through egocentric view meaning that an individual will always give weight to what he believes to be true.

Based on this, Ralph Wedgewood (2005) observed that an individual would always tend to trust what he or she knows meaning that intuitions are given greater weight in any discussion. People rarely trust what other people say since they believe that they might be harmful. In any discussion, an individual would be biased towards his or her view. However, an individual would as well rely on the views of others in case they are rational.

Wedgewood made a statement that, “the fundamental asymmetry between one’s own intuitions and those of other people is just that it is rational to trust one’s own intuitions even if one has no antecedent or independent reason to regard them as reliable. Moreover, it is only rational for an individual to trust his or her own intuitions if he or she has some such antecedent reason to regard intuitions as reliable (11)”. An individual is easily convinced to apply his form of knowledge because he or she trusts it.

Nonconformists give corrective reasoning as the other way of justifying their position. This is because an individual gives an opinion because knowing that it is a product of correct reasoning. In other words, an individual will never be wrong since the knowledge he or she possess is believed to be accurate. Kelly (2005) supported this view by observing that the views of two peers would depend on the perspective employed in evaluating the available evidence.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Various Perspectives of Human Disagreements specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Regarding the accuracy of the statements, Kelly suggested that the one with adequate evidence is always selected as the best philosopher. This does not mean that the views of the opponent are rubbished away since they could be used to supplement or even compliment the views of the peer believed to be accurate. A peer with adequate evidence to support his or her claims would be considered reasonable.

Conformists Conformists believe that there cannot be a reasonable argument among peers because of the established values and norms in every society. Richard Feldman claimed that disagreements should be based on situations where there is no evidence. Once there is full evidence or disclosure of certain information, there should be no variations in views since the evidence act as the basis of agreement. There cannot be mutual disagreements once full details of a concept or idea is given.

In fact, those opposed to generally agreed knowledge should be termed unreasonable since they would be competing with authority. On his part, Christensen (2007) underscored the fact that peers should be willing to concede in order to accommodate each other’s views. This means that an individual should adjust his reasoning towards the views suggested by his or her peer.

Elga reinforced these views by observing an individual should consider the views of his or her peer valuable meaning that all ideas of peers should be given equal weight, but an individual should not be biased towards his or her view Lackey, 2007). An individual is never assured that whatever he or she suggests is accurate since he might have made a mistake in judging or interpreting the scenario or situation.

To prevent any disagreement among peers, new knowledge should be revised to reflect the standardized set of knowledge in any society. However, conformists are in disagreement over the best revision method to be applied when re-evaluating the dissenting views. Based on this, Feldman suggested that revision should be extensive meaning that any variation should be replaced in the text.

This view demands that the original provisions of a concept are withheld without any change meaning that status quo should always be maintained. Christensen and Elga on their part had a different view regarding revision of the dissenting views since they advised that the degree of belief should be used a yardstick in advocating for revision of the differing views (Lackey, 2007).

This means that the views of a dissenting scholar should not be eliminated, but those revising them should strive at reaching a consensus. In other words, both the dissenting scholar and the revising peers should be willing to concede to a certain degree, based on facts.

If revising peers provide adequate evidence, they would definitely be declared winners while the views of a dissenting scholar would be accepted if the facts given outweigh those of the revisionists. All conformists are of the view that knowledge should be revised to reach a common ground to avoid unnecessary controversies.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Various Perspectives of Human Disagreements by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Justification Account Conformists and nonconformists tend to share a common feature, which is related to uniformity. This view suggests that differences among peers are similar, irrespective of the perspective discussed in the above sections. It does not matter whether an individual agrees or disagrees with his or her peer over a political suggestion, or a religious view. The views of an individual would be subjected to critical review or they would be accepted based on evidential equality and cognitive equality.

Evidential equality means that those disagreeing with a view should be prepared to offer adequate information suggesting that what they claim to be true is indeed support by evidence. In other words, their data should be verifiable through established instruments of authentication.

Cognitive equality suggests that two individuals would be allowed to engage in a debate in case they have similar levels of education. This means that they must both be competent, intelligent and fair-minded to offer their suggestions. This would allow such individuals to evaluate the quality of evidence before suggesting any new idea. Feldman contributed to this by arguing that peers under disagreement should disclose their evidence to allow other peers to establish who might be on the right side (Lackey, 2007).

Individuals involved in a debate are believed to be peers because they can perhaps provide evidence and are both intelligent. This implies that cognitive equality and evidential equality should exist before individuals could be terms as epistemic peers. In this regard, disagreements among peers could be referred to as idealized disagreement since the two opponents have genuine claims that must be subjected to thorough verification to ascertain their accuracy.

This type of disagreement is very different from ordinary disagreement because it is based on facts and evidence. In ordinary debates, individuals are not required to give justifications of their claims through adequate provision of evidence, analyzing an event or situation through cognitive processes, and disclosing the nature of evidence.

In an idealized disagreement scenario, there must be evidence that the two opposing peers are equal in terms of cognitive processes and evidence, but this is not the case in ordinary disagreement since individuals would simply assume that they are equals. This assumption might be misplaced meaning that the peers might not even reach a consensus since they are not equals.

Conclusion Nonconformists tend to appreciate the fact that knowledge is cumulative meaning that today’s knowledge is not tomorrow’s knowledge. Since scholars are constantly involved in research, there is a very high possibility that new knowledge would be obtained. It would be irrational to dismiss a body of knowledge derived through research. Peers should be allowed to generate various forms of knowledge, provided they give adequate evidence to support their claims.

Nonconformists encourage new discoveries while conformists are against invention and discovery since they do not accept new information. In the scholarly world, democracy should be allowed since every person would wish to test his or her level of understanding by examining a phenomenon so closely. In case peers are strict on the procedures and processes of conducting research, many individuals would be unwilling to share critical information.

References Christensen, D. (2007). Epistemology of Disagreement: the Good News. The Philosophical Review, 116(2), 187-217.

Kelly, T. (2005). Oxford Studies in Epistemology. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Lackey, J. (2007). A Justificationist View of Disagreement’s Epistemic Significance. Northwestern: Northwestern University

Rosen, G. (2001). Nominalism, Naturalism, Epistemic Relativism. Philosophical Perspectives, 15(1), 69-91.

Wedgewood, R. (2007). The Nature of Normativity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.


Kandinsky’s Improvisation 28: What Lurks Beyond the Abstract Critical Essay essay help free

Abstract art has definitely shaken the world, reinventing people’s perception of what reality is (Walther, 2000); and, talking about abstract art, Kandinsky and his daring experiments should be mentioned first. By far the most famous, the most frequently researched and the most often misinterpreted, his Improvisation 28 deserves a close attention.

Despite the fact that the chaos depicted in the artwork is typically attributed to the horrors of the World War I, it can be assumed that the artist’s goal was to display not the pointless bloodbath that the WWI was, but the atmosphere of complete denial and total loss of hope that swung in the air since the World War I broke out.

Even being a specimen of an abstract art, Kandinsky’s work still has all the properties of a traditional artwork. However, some of these properties have been stretched to their furthest extremes, therefore, making the painting look almost grotesque and yet managing to convey the despair that the Improvisation 28 is shot through with. For example, the line is very smooth in the composition; neither or the elements has any sharp edges or simply looks clumsy – every single line is drawn in a nonchalant yet smooth manner.

Another formal element worth a discussion is the color cast. On the one hand, the work looks unusually colorful for expressing the despair and sorrow that gripped the world after the WWI. Indeed, taking a quick look at the painting is enough to see that Kandinsky’s choice of colors is very versatile.

With yellow, green and blue being the focus of the picture, and a touch of the red color to mark the edges and add the impression of flickers of fire, or, perhaps, a dawning day, the picture might seem rather optimistic. However, the gloomy, almost grayish shades that Kandinsky uses in his painting suck all the liveliness out of the picture, therefore, making one think of the hopes that used to be so daring and yet were killed so mercilessly.

Hence the use of another formal element, i.e., light, stems. With a number of spots left empty on the white canvas, Kandinsky managed to keep the light out of the picture as hard as possible therefore, hinting at the probable post-apocalyptic results of the WWI for the entire humankind (Aronov, 2006).

As a result, Kandinsky made a very wise use of space, cluttering the elements that are supposed to symbolize the outcomes of the WWI and leaving considerable white space at the bottom of the picture. Thus, the emptiness, which the bloodbath of the WWI resulted in, was shown to the audience.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The structure of the artwork is rather peculiar. On the one hand, there is no clear symmetry in the painting; every single element has its own unique shape and role in the artwork. However, together, these elements see, weirdly harmonic. For example, the two picture planes that the right prolonged elements split the artwork in, make the painting look especially organic.

The line drawn from the upper right side of the picture into the horizon also contributes to understanding the structure of the picture better. The texture of the picture is rather standard. By using oil on canvas, Kandinsky managed to create a truly outstanding work of art.

Finally, one must say a couple of words about the composition of the painting. As it has been stressed, the work is split into three parts, i.e., the cluttered left side, a more spacious right side and the horizon, which has been painted in blazing red. It seems that the aforementioned elements represent the chaos (the left side), the devastation and emptiness that the WWI has left the humankind to (the right side), and the unclear future (the upper right corner).

As it has been stressed above, the key historical context of the Impression 28 is the concept of the World War I as one of the most, if not the most devastating and horrendous events that have ever taken place in the world history. One of the key reasons why the given artwork differs so much from the rest of the portrayals of the WWI, especially the use of smooth lines, can be explained by Kandinsky’s life experience.

As Gardner and Kleiner explain, “Born in Russia, Vassily Kandinsky (1866– 1944) moved to Munich in 1896 and soon developed a spontaneous and aggressively avant-garde expressive style” (Gardner


2-D artwork appreciation: Analysis of painting “The kindred spirits” by Asher Brown Durand Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Step 1: Identification

Step 2: analysis

Step 3 interpretation

Step 4 judgment

Works Cited

Step 1: Identification The painting “Kindred Spirits” is one of Asher Brown Durand’s most attractive pieces of art. The 1849 painting was made with “oil on canvas”. It belongs to the era of modernity (Frank 21). It depicts Thomas Cole and William Cullen Bryant (renowned poets). It is an appreciation of the two American poets, the American nature and the Cole’s discovery of the valley some twenty years prior to his death in 1848 (Ferber and Durand 62).

Step 2: analysis Durand’s use of color provides the painting with the actual sense of nature. For example, green color has been used to depict plants and white color indicates the clean water flowing on the stream. Grey and dark colors have been used to display the rocks and the ground. In addition, motion is depicted by the flowing stream, which seems to be moving at a moderate speed. The two men are motionless, but seemingly talking softly to each other. Dark and grey are used to show the softness of the rocks.

Color and texture have also been used to describe variety, balance and contrast. For instance, the dark green color of plants and the brown color of rocks are contrasting. In this way, they allow the viewer to recognize the two individuals on the rocks. In addition, the size of the two men seems to be small compared to the rocks and trees, which make the painting realistic and proportional.

Step 3 interpretation The area around the two individuals is immensely attractive, with large trees growing below the rocks. Tree branches rise above the rocks, providing a harmonious environment (Ferber and Durand 27).

. Right below the cliff, a small but strikingly stream flows towards the lowlands at the background. Durand’s main theme was to symbolize the appreciable nature of New York. It also pays tribute to the two friends.

Step 4 judgment Durand seems to be a highly creative person due to his ability to present the figure in a manner than looks real. In addition, it shows his appreciation for nature, his friends, and important people in American society and the freedom to use colors, lines and other aspects of painting in presenting natural scenarios.

Works Cited Ferber, Linda, S and Asher Durand. Kindred spirits: Asher B. Durand and the American landscape. New York, NY: Brooklyn Museum, 2007. Print.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More


Culture before the Influence by Technology Creative Essay argumentative essay help

Various ethnic groups around the world had their unique cultural practices that they identified with. This particular community had unique cultural practices that defined every activity they undertook. Historically this community’s environment was symbolized by natural forests with several indigenous trees that grew naturally on the land.

The community highly respected nature so much that felling trees was a rare activity. For this reason, the environmental resources were used sustainably for the benefit of the present and future generations. This practice kept the land fertile, as there were no incidences of soil erosion or negative farming practices to interfere with food production. Therefore, there was variety of foods available for the populace.

Politically, this community had a council of elders who were the rulers. The Council of elders acted as the Supreme Court. It was the duty of the community members to respect the council of elders as any disrespect was a sign of failure to respect God and one would face serious consequences. The community believed that these leaders were chosen and sent by God to guard their community. They acted as agents of God in this particular community.

One of the main economic activity of this community was fishing and this was done according to the instructions of the council of elders. The council of elders did this to ensure that fishing was regulated for continuous production and to avoid the extinction. No member of the community would go fishing without the authority from the council of elders.

Fish harvesting was communal. After harvest, fish would be divided among the community members and those that lived near to one another would even cook and eat together. This way, there was plenty of food even for the orphans and the disabled. Farming was also done in this community. The most common crops that were grown by this community were sorghum and cassava.

There were no forms of discrimination in this community, as most of the things were communally owned. Any member of the community caught showing some form of discrimination or selfishness would receive a very severe punishment from the council of elders. This wrong doer would be put in a sack of half-full of wet sisal products and beaten thoroughly.

This punishment was tough and scared anyone with an intent of portraying discriminations or selfishness in this community. The community members therefore, viewed one another as members of one family. The community had also a uniform code of dressing that was strictly adhered to by all members of the community.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Their dressings were mainly made out of the animals’ skin. After killing of an animal like a cow, the skin would be carefully removed and dried with salt and when dry it would ready for use as a cloth. Men would use the skin to cover only there lower parts. For women, it was optional.

A woman would choose to either cover the whole body or do as men, leaving their upper parts uncovered. Women would carry their errands with naked breasts and no man would dare harass them. Virginity was highly valued and cases of irresponsible behavior were harshly handled.

A man found with an unmarried woman or another man’s wife would be forced to walk naked for a long distance along with a group of both men and women. The men would give him several strips and women would follow behind singing mocking songs to the culprit.

This punishment was humiliating and to avoid such incidences, members of the community strictly adhered to the set norms and regulations. In this community, there were specific roles for men, women, and children.

The woman was expected to take give birth to as many children as the husband wanted, take good care of the husband and children and perform other household chores. On the other hand, it was the duty of a man to provide for the family. Young girls would help their mother in household chores while young boys would be charged with the responsibility of grazing the animals after school.

This particular community believed in the existence of a supreme power. Their God was commonly regarded as Nyasaye. They believed that God was always watching over them and they could not hide anything from Him. They also believed that God speaks and whatever instructions issued by the council of elders were perceived to be from God. They extensively believed that whatever they did was meant to please their God.

This belief helped them honor their cultural beliefs and respect nature so much. The community had some special places of worship and for offering sacrifices to God. These sacrificial places were strictly used by the religious leaders who were supposed to be members of the council of elders. These religious leaders were authorized to officiate any sacred or offering to God. Some traditional songs were preserved as appropriate for specific functions and activities in this community.

We will write a custom Essay on Culture before the Influence by Technology specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In a situation where the community disobeyed God, there were songs that were specifically meant to appease Him to pardon them for sins. This community observed several rituals. Some of the rituals included circumcision for both boys and girls at the age of fifteen years.

This was done to mark the rite of passage from childhood to adulthood. There were specialists for circumcision ceremonies. Circumcision was a community affair and none was allowed to miss out. To grace the occasion, there were good songs majorly sang by young women in the community.

Culture after Influence by Technology The culture of this community has faced serious changes by the coming of a new technology. On one hand, the technology may be viewed to have a positive impact on the culture while on the other hand it has influenced the culture negatively in this particular community. The hope and future of this community’s culture has completely been affected. With internet services offered by the new technology, members of the community are now very informed as they can access all the necessary information online.

Politically, this change has greatly affected the organization of this community. In this community, the coming of this new change has altered the organization of the council of elders where it has provoked many to move away from the cultural barriers to see the outside world.

Many officials in the political structure have also been forced to go for further studies in order to cope with the changes taking place in this community. The council of elders has now lost meaning in this community and although present, it does not have much of importance in the society. Technology has made many people informed, leading to the rise of politicians in the race of fighting for power.

The community leadership has taken a new course. Political leaders are now in control of this community. Community leaders unlike before are not respected. Members can now air their views and opinions regarding issues in this community. In case of introduction of rules that do not please them, the community members have an option to oppose the implementation of the rule.

Fishing activity is no longer communal with the emergency of capitalism in this community. There are no restrictions to fishing as now one can fish anywhere and at any time. After fishing, the harvest is carried home for either consumption or commercial purposes strictly for the benefit of the fishermen and their own families.

The roles for men and women have completely changed. Both men and women can now go fishing with no restrictions. A woman can now provide for the family, a duty that was a preserve for men. The women in this community can now discuss issues over such things as the number of children to give birth to comfortably with their husbands. Young boys and girls can now perform any duty assigned to them. However, children spend much of their time in school or playing computer games.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Culture before the Influence by Technology by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Dressing code has extremely changed in this community. People are now more informed and no longer dress in animal skins. Animal skins are considered outdated and cannot be used as clothes any more. There are attires for men and for women as well. Men may opt to wear suits to cover their whole bodies or any other complete clothing. Women have to cover their nakedness fully to avoid rape cases that have now become rampant in this particular community.

Virginity is no longer valued. Instead, a virgin boy or girl is perceived as very naïve and not exposed. Immorality has become the order of the day in this community. Immorality is very high with several incidences of even married men and women cheating on one another. Cases of older men raping and impregnating young girls are very common in this community. Little or no punishment is taken on these culprits.

The environment of this community has really changed. Economic activities have been diversified with people encroaching into the forests for agricultural purposes. People in this community have lost the respect for nature. Indigenous trees have been extensively harvested for commercial purposes and natural forests have disappeared. Lumbering and charcoal burning have taken the best part of this community.

The important tree species have become extinct in this community. The sacred places have also been turned into fertile grounds for all immoral activities and for commercial purposes. Very few individuals if any in this community have the fear of God. All the sacred offering that was done to God no longer exists. All the ritual activities have lost meaning.

The community has stopped circumcising their young girls and for the boys, the activity is not a community affair like before. Boys who are ready for circumcision are taken to hospital for the process. Education has also affected various cultural practices in this community. Learners in this community go to school with the hope of getting white-collar jobs. Generally, the new technology has adversely affected peoples’ way of life in this particular community.


Watching the World Fall Apart: A Post-WWI Vision of the World in the Works of Otto Dix, Max Beckmann and George Grosz Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

War is one of the most hideous concepts that the humankind has ever come up with. While it is quite understandable that at the current stage of the development of humankind, some conflicts still have to be resolved with the use of coercive methods, war as a massive homicide still remains a truly revolting idea; and nowhere is this confrontation of common sense and humanism as evident as in the artworks of the artists of the WWI period, the time when the entire world seemed to be crashing into little pieces.

The artist whose name seems to be the most recognizable all over the world, Otto Dix and his works seem to be a perfect start for an analysis of the art of the WWI era.

The frightening images in the given picture capture the horror that seized the world as the WWI erupted. It is quite symbolic that the audience cannot see the faces of the people in the picture; however, it is not as much symbolic as the fact that the faces in the picture, with gas masks on them, remind much of skulls, with empty eye sockets looking like hollow tunnels leading to nowhere.

Dix, O. (1924). Stormtroops advancing under gas.

Definitely one of Dix’s strongest works, the given piece of art crosses with an artwork of another famous artist of the WWI era, Max Beckmann. Comparing the aforementioned picture by Dix with Beckmann’s Hell Series seems a touch far-fetched, seeing how the rest of Beckmann’s works are far from being as on-the-nose as any of Dix’s paintings.

However, the Hell Series was created as a response to the WWI events, which makes the given comparison rather legitimate. Unlike Dix, though, Beckmann does not seem to have his signature work, like Dix’s Stormtroops. On the contrary, every single piece of the Hell Series seems a piece of a single entity. Anyway, the Hell represents the author’s vision of the WWII and its insanity.

Beckmann, M. (1919). Hell.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is quite remarkable that in the given series, Beckmann avoided using his traditional color palette in several paintings, while in other ones belonging to the series, the color cast was quite aggressive, with a remarkable prevalence of orange and blue color.

Beckmann, M. (1938). Hell of the birds.

The given feature of Beckmann’s works draws the line between his vision of the WWI and the one of Dix; the latter considering war a blood-hungry beats that turns people into machines designed solely for killing, Beckman clearly sees the pain and torture that the nations were going through, as well as the humanist dilemma between the need to protect oneself and one’s family and the ethical unacceptability of a murder, even the murder of an enemy.

Beckmann and Grosz: Selected works (n. d.).

The last, but definitely not the least among the artists who made a difference by showing the world the true face of war, George Grosz also had a very distinct way of expressing his attitude towards the WWI. What is remarkable is Grosz’s being a German; therefore, by viewing his works, the audience finally gets to see the response from the other side of barricade.

Weirdly enough, Grosz clearly focused on the bureaucratic implications behind the WWI process. For instance, the ink drawing Made in Germany, as well as Das neue Gesich der herrschenden Klasse, does not display either horror or magnificence; on the contrary, it shows the measly details of the post-war life in Germany, therefore, offering a grotesque vision of the WWI processes.

Grosz, G. (1921). Das neue Gesich der herrschenden Klasse.

We will write a custom Essay on Watching the World Fall Apart: A Post-WWI Vision of the World in the Works of Otto Dix, Max Beckmann and George Grosz specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Despite the common theme, there are a number of differences between the artworks of the three painters, each of them reflecting his own experience and, therefore, personal vision of the war. To start with, the choice of the medium that the artists used to convey their ideas to the audience differs greatly.

While Beckmann definitely preferred oil on canvas, Grosz and Dix clearly trusted in the powerful effect of lines drawn with the help of ink. However, the differences between the three artists are not restricted to the formal elements of the paintings. It is clear that each of the artists incorporated his unique experience to create the paintings, which sets the artworks in question miles apart.

As it has been mentioned above, Grosz was the only one of the three who consciously mocked the meanness of the German bureaucracy of the time (Lazzari


Vodafone: Developing a Total Communications Strategy in the UK Market Case Study best essay help: best essay help

Comparison of the Four Industries in terms of Industry Attractiveness Using Porter’s Five Forces, a comparison of the four industries (fixed-line, mobile, television and broadband) can be undertaken to demonstrate their attractiveness. UK customers have more discretion to choose which company to use in the provision of fixed-line, mobile and television services, hence these industries are continually registering fewer profits due to customers’ power.

However, the broadband industry is increasingly growing as there are fewer companies offering the services due to huge capital costs involved, hence customers have less power in this industry.

The suppliers’ power, reflected by the services and infrastructure offered by British Telecom (BT) to various companies within the sector, is minimal in all the four industries owing to the many regulatory frameworks that have been developed and implemented by Ofcom (Office of Communications). Owing to low suppliers’ power, companies such as Vodafone can leverage on the profit potential by using BT’s networks and infrastructure to expand services.

From the case, it is clear that the high rivalry between competitors has negatively affected the profit and customer subscription margins in the fixed-line, mobile and television industries. However, the broadband industry is still attractive to investors due to minimal rivalry among competitors.

However, as the fixed-line industry faces a minimal threat of new entrants owing to the fact that customers are increasingly using newer technologies, the other three industries – mobile, television and broadband – face real threats of new entrants not only because of their potential for continued growth and profitability but also due to the ongoing acquisitions and partnerships affecting these industries.

Lastly, in analyzing threat of substitute products, it can be argued that both the mobile and television industries face this threat as mobile providers bring into the market new mobile devices with enhanced capacity to roll out all the services in one single gadget, and as TV service providers look for innovative products that may enhance customers’ experiences.

These opportunities provide adequate space for the proliferation of substitute products within the communications sector. However, the broadband industry may not attract such a threat due to the high capital costs involved in rolling out its services. Similarly, the fixed-line industry may not attract substitutes due to the nature of infrastructure and networks used.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Key Drivers of Change in the Communication Industry From the case scenario, the key drivers of change in the communication industry include technological advancements, acquisitions, products and services diversification, willingness to collaborate, speed, flexibility and competition.

In technological changes, it is clear that the digital revolution has forced most companies in the UK’s communication industry to reassess not only how to effectively and efficiently provide traditional voice services to their existing customers, but emerging high-band data, television and video services as well.

Additionally, a number of significant players in the industry are increasingly acquiring smaller firms to expand their customer base, reach and profitability. Surprisingly, a few major players are willing to partner or even merge to sustain leadership and competitiveness, while benefiting immensely form the economies of scale as well as shared infrastructure.

Products and services diversification, in my view, is acting as a critical driver to change for allowing the expansion of customer base with tailor-made products and services that satisfy specific needs and expectations of the customers.

Moving on, it is clear that most companies operating in the industry are currently expending huge financial resources to develop fast and flexible networks, or to acquire other firms with such networks, with the view to enhancing customer value propositions and satisfaction. Vodafone, for example, has initiated a project to upgrade its Internet network from 3G to 4G to achieve faster speeds and flexibility.

Lastly, there is intense competition within the industry for customers and market share, implying that companies must continually shift their strategies to remain competitive. The impact of these drivers will reflect in terms of a more streamlined sector, with companies attempting to buddle their services together and market them to customers in one package.

Change in the UK’s Communication Industry From the case scenario, it is clear that the UK’s communication industry is increasingly changing from the provision of traditional voice services using the fixed-line industry to the adoption and expansion of digitised functions with capacity to provide data and video to customers. Consequently, as customer figures and profit margins for voice services drop over the years, it is expected that technology will play a major role in developing a framework that will enable industry players to expand into the mobile, television and broadband industries.

We will write a custom Case Study on Vodafone: Developing a Total Communications Strategy in the UK Market specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More More importantly, it is envisaged that more operators will make huge investments in the broadband industry due to its attractiveness (see Porter’s analysis), and also due to the fact that it has the capacity for continued growth. Consequently, by 2015, more companies operating in the UK’s communication industry will have developed capacities to roll out broadband Internet services in large scale as all evidence points to the fact that the broadband industry can also be used to provide mobile and digital television services.

It is expected that services such as cable television and radio may become obsolete by 2015 as technological advancements, stiff competition from new service providers, proliferation of IP-based networks and mounting penetration of broadband Internet services drive companies operating in the UK’s communication industry to converge their services. However, it is highly unlikely that the fixed-line industry will become obsolete by 2015, though profit margins in this industry are likely to continue plummeting into the future.

Overall, the industry is expected to be more attractive as services are converged not only due to opening up of many new opportunities for existing service providers and entrepreneurs (e.g., a mobile phone operator will have the capacity to sell digital music and movies using broadband Internet), but also due to improvements in customer satisfaction and retention (e.g., customers will be more satisfied for purchasing various services in a low-cost package).

Vodafone’s Strategy Going into the future, Vodafone should change its strategies to reflect the realities on the ground, especially with regard to convergence of services in the UK’s communication’s sector.

To achieve its objective of being a ‘communications leader in an increasingly connected world’, the company must not only invest heavily in new and emerging communication technologies but must be ready to partner with other like-minded companies in the pursuit of more customers and opportunities for continued growth, competitiveness and sustainability.

The concept of partnering with other companies or even acquiring small firms within the industry, in my view, is a ripe one for Vodafone if it expects to rise into the leadership position. Additionally, partnering and acquisitions will ensure the company expands its networks and customer base without having to make substantial capital investments in network infrastructure.

Additionally, Vodafone stands at a better position to become the communications leader if its drives its operational performance through customer value enhancement to satisfy and retain existing customers while looking out for new ones, pursue growth and expansion opportunities in total communications (mobile, television and broadband) focussed on service delivery to customers instead, pursue emerging markets particularly in developing countries to increase customer base and revenue streams, and strengthen its capital discipline to ensure that more money is freed up for meaningful investments.


Hotel des Bergues Analysis Case Study college essay help

Unique and Core Competences Resources Competences Threshold Capabilities Threshold Resources: The hotel has a favourable physical position. The hotel has the necessary resources to retain all the necessary facilities and hire high-profile staff. Threshold Competences The hotel provides high quality services to its clients. The company also has a variety of managerial strategies. Capabilities for Competitive Advantage Unique The hotel has a well-established corporate culture of change and innovation. The company pays special attention to human resources development. Core The hotel has a specific approach and personalises services provided to the customers. It is possible to state that each customer obtains specific treatment which is appreciated. The Business-Level Strategy Hotel Des Bergues can be regarded as a company characterised by focused differentiation. This is a premier class hotel characterised by rather high prices. Though, it is also necessary to add that the prices are not higher than those of the hotel’s competitors. Clearly, the hotel provides its clients with high quality services. The accommodation or other major services provided are not significantly different from those provided by the hotel’s competitors.

Facilities available are almost the same in all the hotels of this class. Remarkably, there are rather high standards of qualities provided. What makes the hotel different and what encompasses the hotel’s advantage is that the services are often personalised. This personalisation has proved to be of high value to the hotel’s clients.

Thus, the case when one of the employees of the hotel took his car to take a client to the airport or the case with an employee who placed a photo of client’s children to her room can suggest that personalised attitude is what clients value most. There are a few hotels which provide such kind of personalised services.

Admittedly, the clients of the hotel are ready to pay extra for the premier class and for the personalised attention mentioned above. The specific attitude of the staff is a characteristic feature of the hotel which justifies the high prices.

Ways Used by Four Seasons Hotel Des Bergues to Sustain Its Competitive Advantage First of all, the hotel’s customers value the high standards of the services provided. As has been mentioned above, they also appreciate the unique attitude to their needs. Facilities provided are also of great value to the customers. It is necessary to note that there are some premier class hotels in Geneva as well as in other cities of the world. However, it is quite rare that a hotel’s employees pay so much attention to customer’s needs.

It is necessary to note that the hotel is always changing. The hotel’s management focuses on constant innovation. Being a traditional hotel, it still has a number of suites which are contemporary and innovative. Thus, there is a mix of traditions and innovations, the past and the future. It is necessary to note that the hotel tries to meet the customer’s needs and desires.

These two features, i.e. personalised service and innovation, are rare and inimitable as the hotel often introduces novel services which are later adopted by other hotels. It is also necessary to note that even though facilities can be substituted, high-quality personalised services are impossible to substitute by something more valuable. As has been mentioned above, the hotel is constantly changing, which is the major dynamic element, which, in its turn, is one of the major advantages of the hotel.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is important to add that specific corporate culture is what makes the hotel different from others. In the first place, it creates certain value to the customers as employees are ready to provide personalised services. The corporate culture that focuses on innovation and creativity makes the employees encouraged to pay attention to the customers’ needs.

The hotel’s corporate culture is also rare as quite a few employers invest so much time (and effort and, perhaps, funds) to human resources development. It is also difficult to imitate such a culture as it has been evolving for several decades. Admittedly, it is impossible to substitute the value created by the corporate culture as it has been integrated in the organisation’s performance. This culture encompasses dynamic element, which makes it up-to-date in the contemporary rapidly changing world.

Elements Contributing to Dynamic Capabilities It is possible to note that there are three major elements that contribute to dynamic capability of the hotel. These elements are culture of innovation and change, creativity and leadership. Thus, one of the greatest advantages of the hotel is that it is constantly changing.

The hotel’s management understands the importance of being innovative as change and innovation can be regarded as the core elements of competitiveness. The management understands that a variety of trends appear in the society and people’s preferences or expectations and desires also change. It is crucial to meet those expectations. Innovation and change help the hotel’s employees meet the customers’ expectations.

Effective leadership is what makes the culture of innovation work. Thus, the hotel’s general manager has monthly meetings with the representatives of each department. Admittedly, employees are closer to the customers and are the first to feel and witness the changing expectations. Employees often come up with various ideas aimed at introducing innovative services that make the hotel different from others. Importantly, the employees feel the care and understand that their opinion also matters.

It is also necessary to add that employees’ empowerment is one of the characteristic features of the leadership. Hence, employees have the liberty to make decisions. There are certain standards of the qualities offered. However, it is the employee who decides how to personalise the standardised service. Employees feel empowered and they are not afraid to reveal their creativity which is often praised. Remarkably, employees’ creativity contributes to the culture of innovation and change.

Therefore, the hotel is constantly changing and is always up-to-date. The hotel’s employees are ready to be a part of the culture of change as they feel their opinion matters. They are ready to provide personalised services, which is one of the major advantages of the hotel.

We will write a custom Case Study on Hotel des Bergues Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More


Tourism and Sustainability: Whale-Watching Industries Report (Assessment) custom essay help: custom essay help

Characteristics for Development of Whale-Watching Industries On the social front, it is evident that although the community in the Vava’u area comprises of only 16,000 people, it has been on the forefront in whale conservation efforts and demonstrates a friendly nature to tourists. Additionally, the community has been effective in using promotional material involving the humpback whales to put Tonga on the world map.

On the economic front, it is clear that tourism is the economic mainstay of the Vava’u area due to the fragile nature of other economic activities mainly in the manufacturing, agricultural, forestry and service sectors, hence making the area a fertile breeding ground for the development of modern whale-watching industries.

Concerning the natural environment, the Vava’u Island group in the Kingdom of Tonga is not only located in a tropical climate with warm, sheltered waters but also prides itself for hosting one of the whale species most popular for tourism. The high-quality marine environments in the area ensure the availability of humpback whales, which often visit the area for mating, birthing, and raising young calves.

Non-Economic Impacts of Whales and Whale-Watching As demonstrated by the author of the article, tourism activities occasion both economic and non-economic impacts in the destination area or country. In the context of the Island of Tonga, whales and whale-watching activities are likely to occasion difficulties in hosting large numbers of tourists, environmental pollution and degradation, conflict between operators, resentment in the local community fuelled by increasingly large numbers of tourists, and internalization of vices such as prostitution and gambling among the local people.

Other non-economic impacts of whales and whale-watching activities likely to affect the Island of Tonga include inflationary pressure in the local economy, loss of local control on how local resources are managed and distributed, as well as environmental degradation due to the establishment of numerous whale-watching businesses in the area.

However, a positive non-economic impact for the Island concerns the change of attitudes and value systems among the local community, especially in terms of valuing and conserving the humpback whales as a critical resource for social and economic development of the Kingdom.

Factors influencing Potential Future Growth of Whale Watching Some of the factors that will guarantee the future growth of whale-watching industry in Vava’u Island group, as demonstrated by the author, include (1) developing adequate transportation, accommodation, and other elements of the tourism infrastructure, (2) attaining long-term political stability not only in the Island of Tonga but also in South Pacific region, (3) establishing convenient and reliable airline connections to boost tourists’ arrivals, (4) dealing with unsustainable whale hunting practices, (4) establishing proper management practices for whale-watching activities, (5) dealing with negative social, economic and environmental impacts associated with tourism, (6) maintaining a stringent code of practice for whale-watching operators to minimise negative impacts associated with competition, and (7) establishing adequate conservation initiatives for the humpback whales to maintain their health and value.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is important to note that several factors discussed in the article, including degradation of the natural environment, non-involvement of the local community and proliferation of unsustainable hunting practices may actually hamper the growth of the whale-watching industry in the future if immediate corrective measures are not taken. Overall, it can be suggested that the sustainability efforts undertaken to guarantee the expansion of the whale-watching industry in the Island of Tonga are bearing fruits.


The Relationships Between Science and Religion Research Paper custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Science replaces religion

Religion replaces science

Science and religion are independent

Religion and science in dialogue



Introduction According to Campbell and Looy (2009), there exist numerous opinions and understanding of the concepts of religion and science. Moreover, different scholars perceive the relationship between religion and science in dissimilar ways. Nevertheless, it is apparent that there exists a link between the two realms as it has been addressed by several theorists (McGrath, 2011).

It is imperative to note that the concept of religion and science differs to a larger extent and are independent from each other. However, research has revealed that to some extent, they often overlap and conflict each other (Ruse, 1975). From a careful review of literature, it is evident that there have been proliferations on the relationship between science and religion (McGrath, 2011). It is against this backdrop that this paper intends to explore an in-depth relationship between science and religion.

In a more subtle way, numerous scholars and philosophers have tried to define the term science in various ways for several decades. Due to recent philosophical development, the concept has remained as a challenge and puzzle to the minds of many people (McGrath, 2011). A controversy has emerged on how to distinguish science from non-science facts. Therefore, there is no specific demarcation to define science.

Nevertheless, in-depth research has enabled scholars to come up with a definite definition of the term (McGrath, 2011). Therefore, science can be defined as a discipline that deals with the study of nature. To elaborate further, science focuses on the study of natural forces, processes and development. As a discipline, it assumes, formulates and works on a hypothesis in order to identify how events occur in a natural setting.

It is arguable that science is based on analysis of observable facts in order to get evidence of nature. Therefore, the primary goal of science it to organize information derived from nature and convert it into knowledge. Science seeks to understand natural phenomena, their cause, effects and relationships (Brooke


Marine Corps Logistics Proposal college essay help

Introduction Technology is advancing and many organizations have realized that it is important to adopt emerging technologies as a way of remaining relevant in various fields. The Marine Corps has been faced with a lot of challenges, especially in managing logistics when the officers are in operation. According to Dombrowski and Gholz (2006), the warfare in the modern world has been rapidly changing. The approach that was used during the nineteenth century cannot be relevant today.

Firms must find new ways of managing their logistics in a manner that would not only be efficient, but also effective and consistent. Marine Corps is operating in an environment where efficiency in logistics is vital in its successful operations.

GCSS-MC offers organization opportunity to have an integrated approach when managing information during the logistical process. This approach allows this organization to have a system that would provide it with real-time information about all logistical activities. This allows the firm to plan its activities effectively.

Project Vision The Marine Corp Logistics plays an important role in ensuring that the military has all the equipment it needs to carry out various activities. In order to achieve its objectives, this department should have an effective communication system that would enable it to monitor and coordinate all logistical activities, especially when delivering war equipment to military officers who are in the field.

The vision of this project is to provide an integrated information system that would ensure that activities of this department are closely coordinated. The Marine Corps Logistics Modernization strategy will help ensure that all logistics information required by the Marine Air Ground Task Force is readily available as a way of enhancing the speed with which these products are transported from one location to the other.

Objectives When defining the objectives of this new project, it would be important to understand the current status of this organization. Currently, the Marine Corps is using a logistics system that is not supported by an integrated communication system.

It means that one department may not be aware of the activities taking place in the other department. This is very dangerous in the current society where information itself is considered to be a powerful tool, especially when it involves military operations. The following are some of the objectives that this project seeks to achieve.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To introduce an integrated information system that will merge Global Combat Support System (GSCC) and Defense Property Accountability System (DPAS).

To ensure that the military units in various regions can track cargo while it is in transit from one location to the other.

To improve decision making process of the military officers by offering them real-time information about various issues on the ground. This will help maintain a force that is lethal and agile while on the battlefield.

To improve financial planning and management by making it easy for the accounts department to access all the relevant accounting records.

Scope of the project According to Haugan (2002), project scope should be clearly defined before the project kicks off. This makes it easy to understand specific areas where the project intends to create transformation within the firm.

In this project, the focus is on developing an integrated information system in the logistics department that would improve logistical operations within the organization. This new system will make it possible for the department to coordinate logistical information to the departments that need them. It will also improve the security of the equipment while they are in transit.

Target Group Meredith and Mantel (2012) say that it is important to define the target group when coming up with a new project in an organization. In this organization, the targeted group that will benefit when the project is completed can be categorized into different groups. The policy makers will need this new system to guide their decisions when planning to go to war.

The accounts department will benefit from this new system by enabling it access all the relevant information it needs when compiling accounting books. The logistics department will benefit from this new system because it will enable it trace the movement of equipment. This department will be able to estimate the time within which a given consignment will reach the intended destination. The military officers on the ground will also need this information when they are in the field to know when the war equipment will reach them.

Key Stakeholders for this Project There are key stakeholders who are directly responsible in undertaking this new project. The top leadership in the Department of Defense is the first stakeholder. The top commanders, through the Logistics Department, and the senior officers are the owners of this project. They are represented by senior officers in the Logistics department.

The military officers in the field who expect to benefit from this project form another stakeholder group. This new service is meant to improve their service delivery. The last category of the stakeholders is the project management team, headed by the project manager, who will be directly involved in developing this project.

Role and Responsibilities of Each Project Team Resource According to the research by Meredith and Mantel (2012), it is important to define roles and responsibilities of different stakeholders within the project in order to achieve success. The stakeholders who are directly involved in the project have been identified in the project organization structure.

We will write a custom Proposal on Marine Corps Logistics specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The top military officers, through the Logistics Department, are the financiers of this project. Besides offering financial help, they are also expected to inspect the progress of the project and evaluate the value that the new system offers when it is finally completed.

The contractor that will be awarded this task of installing the new system will act as a supervisor over the employees who will be responsible for various activities. The project members will undertake various roles in this project in its implementation stage. When this new system is fully installed, the logistics department will be responsible for its normal operations and maintenance services.

Scheduling Duration In the process of implementing this project, it is important to have a clear schedule of the specific activities that will be undertaken in order to ensure that the project is completed successfully. The following table shows a planned schedule of activities that will be carried out in this project and the time they are allocated.

As shown in the above table, it is expected that the project will run from March to December 2014. Based on the advanced technology that the contractor is expected to use, it is estimated that ten months will be enough to carry out all the activities in the project.

Project Organizational Structure The project organizational structure helps in defining various levels of management within a given project. It specifies position of various stakeholders in the process of undertaking various activities in the project. According to Haugan (2002), this is necessary to make every member understand specific function that must be undertaken to accomplish various tasks. Every member will be able to understand what is expected of them.

Figure 1: Project Organizational Structure

This structure helps in defining responsibilities of the stakeholders. Meredith and Mantel (2012) say that some projects fail to meet their objectives because some of the stakeholders avoid their roles. For instance, it is clear that the Board of Directors, through the Logistics Department, has the responsibility of financing all the activities of this firm. If this board fails to provide this needed finance, then it may not be possible to proceed with the activities that are specified in the section below.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Marine Corps Logistics by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Work Breakdown Structure When the financiers have done their role of providing the necessary finances needed for this project, it will be the responsibility of the project team members to undertake their duties in ensuring that the new system is successfully installed and is operational. The structure below identifies some of the specific tasks that must be accomplished by various stakeholders.

The above diagram shows a complete work breakdown structure from the proposal stage to its completion. At the proposal stage, the contractor will have the responsibility of making all the stakeholders in the Logistics department to learn about the new changes that this new system will bring.

It would state all the requirements that will be needed to make the project be successful. Some of the specific activities at this stage include product investigation, product survey, and assessing product suitability (Haugan, 2002). The second phase is the design. The project team members will need to define concept design and settle on one final design that would be used in this system. The third stage, which is the construction stage, is very important in defining the success of the project.

At this stage, the project team members will need to purchase the needed materials from the agreed suppliers. The team will then undertake the construction of this new system. Building of the system may take long, and the team members must ensure that they follow the specifications stipulated in the design.

Finally, the system will be subjected to the stage of testing. The new system will be tested for functionality and efficiency. When the system passes this stage, it will be finally handed over to the Logistics Department to commission its usage in this system.

Cost Estimates The proponent deserves to know the exact cost of the project in order to be able to determine the level of investment needed to accomplish the project. The table below is an estimate of the various costs that will be met when undertaking the project.

Material Estimated Cost ($) Labor 19200 Transportation 9800 Materials 39800 Legal Fees 380 Total 69180 The above table has a cluster of activities that will be undertaken in the project. Although it may be important to define specific areas where finance will be needed, the table above has clustered these costs into four major categories.

They include cost of labor, transportation costs, the cost of the materials, and the legal fees that would be needed by government agencies or other relevant bodies. The costs have been based on the market rates for each of the categories. The above stated amount would be able to implement the first phase of this project.

Determine major project milestones and the required delivery dates The work breakdown structure given above has identified project milestones that should be accomplished within a specific period. The first milestone is the specification of the project requirements. This stage is important because it not only enables the project sponsor to know what is expected out of the project, but also enhances specific areas in the organization that this project seeks to improve. This should take one month.

The second milestone would be to develop the design that would be appropriate for this firm. The project members, especially the designers, would need to come up with a design that would meet the needs of this firm in the most appropriate way possible. This should also take one month.

The third milestone is expected to take the longest period, and it is the most important stage in project development. It is at this stage that the project team members will be implementing what was designed at the initial stages. The process must be conscious of the specific needs of the firm. This is expected to take a period of five months. The last milestone will be testing of the system for its workability. This would take one month or less.

Main Dependencies, Risks, Issues, and Assumptions of the Project According to Meredith and Mantel (2012), projects face a number of risks that must always be mitigated in order to achieve the set goals. In this project, inflation may have an adverse effect, especially if it increases costs of materials or labor. This risk should be mitigated at the requirements stage. The sponsor should be informed that inflation may affect the overall cost of the project so that they can be ready to increase funds when necessary.

Another risk would be a failed compatibility of the old systems and the new system. This risk should be arrested at the design stage where designers are expected to make an effective change from the old system to the new one. Finally, the employees may be subject to physical harm. This can be addressed at the requirement stage where the project manager is expected to take a comprehensive insurance cover for all the people working on this project.

Summary of the project budget approved by the project sponsor This project is expected to change the current approach that is used by the logistics department to carry out various activities. The integrated communication system will help the Logistics Department to ensure that its activities are closely coordinated in order to achieve better results.

This department will be able to track movements of military equipment in real-time. The military officers in the field will also be aware of the movement of weapons and other equipments that are being transported to them. This close coordination and improved communication system will improve the ability of this department to achieve good results on the battlefield.

References Dombrowski, P. J.,


Christian Moral Teaching and Money Reflective Essay essay help free: essay help free

Money is actually the most complex phenomenon ever understood by man because of its “miraculous nature”. Some folks also argue that money is the root cause of all evil but I will also argue that lack of money is also root of all evil from a moral point of view. Money is life since money can give almost everything.

Who said that money is not life? Money is life since the time you get money which is enough you feel more alive than when you have nothing. Am not amoral but realistic. Luxuries, happiness, and good food just to name a few are all about me. Actually I subscribe to the school of thought which argues that money “talks” (Hartman,


Corporate Governance Role of Non Executive Directors Coursework essay help online free

Table of Contents Recipe for a Good Board

Diversity of Boards

Corporate Risk Disclosure

Works Cited

Non executive directors are very useful members of the company boards. There is a big role played by the non executive directors that include reducing the level of conflict of interest between the company management and shareholders in the company.

These directors also play a big part in monitoring company’s strategy implementation and their performances. In illustrating the useful role of the non executive directors, this academic research majored on monitoring role and the general corporate governance role of the non executive directors.

For instance, the academic research states that the survey conducted positioned the presence of the non executive directors as the most crucial mechanism of corporate governance that people recommended (Bainbridge 165). This shows the preference that people have for these non executive directors. If the inside executive directors are on their own in the governance board, it will be more likely for them to manipulate the company’s records in their favor.

They may engage in acts like checking their own remuneration packages to suit them best and securing their jobs in unauthorized ways. One role of non executive directors in company boards is to take part in the audit of the company (Bainbridge 113).

This is a duty that these directors play whether there is an audit committee or not. Any doubted information or details are questioned by the non executive directors on behalf of the shareholders. In this light, it would not be easy for the inside executive directors to manipulate financial and other records of the company for their own gains.

Another role that the non executive directors play is monitoring the company’s strategies. The implementation and performance of these strategies are the main things monitored. The academic research has also clarified this by emphasizing the need of an average number of inside and outside directors.

This is where Mace (1986) states that too great proportion of either inside or outside directors can shift the balance in a bad direction. It is argued that too many inside executives can cause the board to make close-minded decisions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The non executive directors usually come up with independent decisions that turn out to be more effective. To enhance this, the Cadbury Report stated that the company boards could have a minimum of three non executive directors because they bring an independent judgment towards the strategy, performance and resources of the company (Romana 23).

Recipe for a Good Board The recipe given for a good board in the literature is a good one. As per the literature, a good board is one which the members meet frequently. These board members should also be ethical and with high levels of literacy to enhance good and effective decision making. In a board, the major considerations are the usual balances of members, communications, selfless and unbiased (Romana 68).

Some of these are not included in the recipe given in the literature. I would prefer a brief list of ingredients where all the important ingredients are inclusive. Therefore, the preferable can include balance, frequent meeting, communication, unbiased, and selfless.

In the literature, the recipe given for a good board has touched on maintaining a good balance of power. This balance also entails the gender and age balance. A good board should have a balanced number of men and women, and also age of members. The most important ingredients in this balance are communication and selfless.

First communication is considered important because it is through it that board members get to know what they should discuss and find a way of reacting to the issue (Romana 132). Whenever there is a problem that is not mentioned by any of the members in a board meeting of the company, then the board would not be able to work on the problem.

This makes the board of governance ineffective. Consequently, a good board communication is an important ingredient for the corporation. Selfless is another crucial consideration for a good board. Once the board members are selfless, then the entire board will be one with no self interest The board being selfless is important because meeting the objectives of the company demands that no one should put his or her self-interests ahead.

Diversity of Boards Studies have been done to investigate the effectiveness of diversity of the boards in companies. Most of them come up with the conclusion that such diversity is indeed important as the study by McKinsey and company. One major importance of diversity in the boards is that it enhances the financial performance. Studies show that companies with a large number of women at board perform better than those with few women. This diversity is not just fixed to gender diversity, but it extends to ethnicity and the minority.

We will write a custom Coursework on Corporate Governance Role of Non Executive Directors specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In the boards, diversity introduces new customer base which is very important for a company. Women and the minority contribute a bigger portion to the economy jointly. Introducing them into the boards will mean bringing their efforts and contribution in. This may lead to new customers who will be women and the minority (Bainbridge 96).

Increased investment towards the company is another importance that may come along with diversity of boards. Social responsible investors are usually keen in noting if the company is not biased or gender insensitive. These investors check the members of the boards where they retrieve the representation of the company.

Creation of a good corporate reputation is also another relevant aspect that comes along with diversity. Customers, shareholders, and society will have a good image of the company.

Corporate Risk Disclosure In the Turnbell Report, there are numbers of stages set to check on risks and their effects. In this framework, the last stage is where we have the disclosed materials by the shareholders being interpreted. This is so important to the shareholders since it enables their feedback to be heard. The stakeholders are also giving an opportunity to take control even from the external end.

This conceptual framework is also important to the shareholders since they are enabled to know the possible risks to be encountered and how they will be handled if they occur. Therefore, the strategies are preventive, protective and responsive to the issues in the field. As a result, shareholders can take decisions on how they will deal with the risks when they occur and determine whether to buy more shares with the company.

There are communication and decision links created between the shareholders and the company by the conceptual framework for risk disclosure. These created links are useful to the shareholders who usually want to be involved in running of the companies.

Works Cited Bainbridge, Stephen. The New Corporate Governance in Theory and Practice. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008. Print.

Romana, Roberta. Foundation of Corporate Laws. California: Foundation Press, 2010. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Corporate Governance Role of Non Executive Directors by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


Employee Wellbeing Interventions and Their Effectiveness Analytical Essay online essay help: online essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Reward Systems

Goal Setting

Conclusion and Recommendations


Introduction As components of organisational development, wellbeing interventions are intended to produce change to an organisation or part of it to ensure that there is an improvement in production. The wellness interventions for employees are aimed at improving their performance at the workplace to ensure that they contribute positively to the organisation.

According to Armstrong (2006), an intervention refers to a series of planned activities, events, or actions in an organisation. The activities are aimed at improving its performance. Intervention levels in an organisation can be categorised into strategic interventions, which focus on the organisation as a whole, techno-structural interventions that subdivide functions and roles in the organisation, and the human resource interventions (Ryness, Gerhart


Predicting Premature Termination from Counseling Using the Butcher Treatment Planning Inventory Synthesis Essay essay help online: essay help online

This article explores ways of predicting premature counseling termination using scales from BTPI (Butcher Treatment Planning Inventory). The article is jointly authored by two practicing counselors and a university professor. According to the article, managed mental-health care has brought about sweeping changes to mental health assessment modalities. Managed mental-health care (MMHC) mostly affects institutions such as universities and mental-health institutions.

The constraints of MMHC have led counselors to look for the most effective assessment protocols that are considerate of cost and accountability. The article notes that failure of clients to keep their scheduled appointments leads to wastage of resources. In addition, it is noted that premature termination of counseling services affects both clients and counselors negatively.

The prevalence of premature therapy is estimated to be fifty percent across all counseling platforms according to the authors. The article continues by investigating premature termination’s variables focusing on the clients, the counselors, and institutions’ administrators. Some of the addressed variables include clients’ economic status, the counselor’s gender, client motivation, and self-efficacy. The authors concentrate on BTPI as the main assessment method in their study.

According to the article, BTPI is an evaluation tool that focuses on clients’ personalities. According to the authors of this article, BTPI is yet to be verified as an apt tool for predicting premature termination from counseling. Therefore, the authors sought to build on the functionalities of BTPI as a means of predicting premature termination from counseling.

This study focuses on the counseling centers in universities. Some of the scales that were used as predictors of premature termination from counseling include REL (Problems in Relationship Formation), CLM (Close-Mindedness), EXP (Low Expectation Benefit), and NAR (Self-Oriented/Narcissism).

According to the article, the participants of this study were sourced from the counseling centre of a moderately sized university in the United States. The sample of the study excluded those clients who were meeting with their counselors for the purposes of medication. Overall, a sample of 95 clients was picked for the purposes of this study. All these clients were involved in individual counseling sessions.

Furthermore, the study involved a total of twenty counselors who all performed some form of counseling services. Out of these twenty counselors, twenty four percent were licensed while seventy six percent were non-licensed counselors. The study utilized 210 true/false questions as well as 14 BTPI scales. The BTPI scales were interpreted using the BTPI manual.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The study’s procedure started with obtaining written consents from all the study’s participants. The next step involved a completion of the BTPI by all the clients involved in the study.

The counseling staff was informed about the purpose and the goals of the study. However, the study’s specific hypotheses were not revealed to the counseling staff to avoid instances of result-manipulation. According to this article, “the results of the study revealed that only 2 out of the 95 study’s participants did not receive termination-ratings” (Hatchett, Han


Employee Motivation at Wal-Mart in China Evaluation Essay college application essay help

Relationship between Job Satisfaction, Job motivation and Job Performance is a set of energetic forces that develop both within and beyond someone, to influence work-related behaviour, and to determine its form, direction, intensity and time (Doyle, 2012). Job satisfaction is how an individual is contented with his or her job. Job performance is an individual output in terms of quality and quantity in a particular job (Doyle, 2012).

This discussion explores a problem of employee motivation at Wal-Mart retail chain in China. It also connects the issues with Herzberg’s Motivation Theory (Doyle, 2012). Basing on Herzberg theory of motivation, the paper explores the relationship between Job performance, Job Satisfaction, Job motivation and Job Performance using Wal-Mart practices as a case in point.

Motivation Theory According to Herzberg motivation theory the motivating factors comprise recognition, achievement, form of work done, accountability, growth and advancement (Doyle, 2012).

As Herzberg indicated, the sanitation aspects of his model include the rules and administrational aspects, life of the employees, favourable conditions at work, closeness or connection with the administration, payment matters, and work to work relationship (Doyle, 2012).

As emphasized by Herzberg, motivating factors are all company aspects that aim at helping employees meet their needs (Doyle, 2012). When both sanitation or hygiene and motivating factors are not handled well, employees are not likely to be motivated and as such their performance will not be to the maximum.

Employee motivation issue in Wal-Mart China At the turn of 21st century, Wal-Mart became one of the largest retail chains worldwide. However, in order to reduce operating expenses and maintain prices to a minimum, Wal-Mart pays very low salaries, offers minimal benefits to its workforce, and applies punitive policies that do not support employees at all (Chen, 2013).

For instance, in China, the corporation replicated its corporate practice of low-cost, high -bulk model to a high-cost Chinese market. This practice has led to a conflict, and as the result the company is facing many challenges relating to labour, salaries and wages (Chen, 2013). That is, the company’s mission is to meet the expectations of its clients and not employees.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The company pays its employees very low salaries and does not recognize the leadership of workers union (Chen, 2013). Based on this practice, there is inequality, tensions around labour and workplace rights (Chen, 2013).

The labour activist called Wang was sacked for agitating for the rights of his fellow workers, and lately he was leading demonstrations with the aim of forcing the Wal-Mart management not to cut pay of the employees. So far, the company has recorded many demonstrations by workers demanding for better pay, a good compensations scheme and good working conditions (Chen, 2013).

In Wal-Mart, workers are not encouraged or satisfied by the amount of money paid to them. The organization demands a lot from workers yet it pays minimum salaries. These low salaries and wages have direct impact on the ability of employees of Wal-Mart to satisfy their needs (Rosenfeld, 2012). The company majorly emphasizes just one outcome of business, while overlooking other performance aspects.

The organization remunerates employees poorly in order to record higher returns. Based on the fact that Wal-Mart has failed to meet the needs of its staff, and certainly has de-motivated them, the employees resort to such anti-work behaviours like prolonged strikes, late-coming, non-attendance and inability to meet company deadlines (Doyle, 2012). Further, they have been displaying open frustration aspects that negatively contribute to the credibility and performance of the organization.

Herzberg categorized motivational and hygiene aspects as the most significant motivational theory, particularly, when there is uncertainty and challenges can occur (Rosenfeld, 2012). In most cases, if workers are concerned that their work is insecure, they may be discouraged to produce to their maximum.

An employee cannot be motivated without protection. In other words, if the factors that motivate employees are fully provided, they are likely to become motivated and in the end the company is likely to record high work performance (Rosenfeld, 2012). The work setting in Wal-Mart is not conducive that is why employees working in Chinese retail shops are finding it hard to continue working. Even with this situation, Wal-Mart does not involve itself in things that do not help employees meet their needs.

The company cuts the health cover of its workers making it hard for them to access affordable healthcare. In most cases companies from western nations have policies that do favour people from the east. Because, they are after profits, yet eastern cultures emphasize service. Such organizations also think that employees are satisfied with a job they have been offered and other work-related issues.

We will write a custom Essay on Employee Motivation at Wal-Mart in China specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In fact, the interests of such organizations are not about creating space for people to enrich themselves but about getting the best out of them (Rosenfeld, 2012).

Because of lack of motivational factors for workers, a good number of employees started to dislike their jobs, giving an unimpressed emotional connection to their works, as well as being discontented with their responsibility in the place of work (Doyle, 2012). With all these unenthusiastic and unattractive factors of being an employee at Wal-Mart, it is unimaginable that Wal-Mart will at any given time provide incentives that motivate employees.

Conclusion Herzberg argues that in order to maximally encourage people a business organization is supposed to have all factors checked and positioned. That is, it needs to take into account such factors like hygiene aspects and motivational factors which will be employed to motivate employees.

However, in absence of these factors, it is hard to motivate employees. Wal-Mart, however, pays lower salaries to employees, thus, reducing their willpower. Under such circumstances, most of the workers start to dislike their jobs, as well as being discontented with the responsibility in the place of work. All this happens because the company is always after minimizing costs in order to take home exorbitant profits.

Employees are a big asset in the company. That is, the way they feel and act impacts the outcome of the company. If the workforce is encouraged to work through incentives and other things, they are likely to work hard in order to achieve the targets of their company on top of helping the company stay ahead of competition in the industry. In most cases, only two undertakings can build a very strong business.

A business that recognizes its employees is not likely to be susceptible to challenges as workers are fully committed to achieve the organizational goals. In other words, a business that is not stable can not perform and as such cannot meet its goals. When the productivity of an organization reduces, it is put in a position that cannot help it surmount internal and external challenges and above all, its future success and sustenance will be unclear.

Reference List Chen, M. (2013). Wal-Mart Empire Clashes with China. The Progressive Magazine, Web.

Doyle, G. (2012). Motivational Processes. In D. Baack, Organizational behavior (pp.99-124). New York, USA: Bridgepoint Education.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Employee Motivation at Wal-Mart in China by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Rosenfeld, M. (2012). What employees perceive and how they learn. In D. Baack, Organizational Behaviour (pp.65-98). New York, USA: Bridgepoint Education.


“Less than Conquerors: How Christians entered the 20th century” by Douglas Frank Essay (Critical Writing) college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Frank was brought up in a missionary family and is a graduate from Wheaton College. Today he has authored a number of books including Less than Conquerors: How Christians entered the 20th century. The book explores and criticizes the manner in which evangelicals in the United States sought to control their destinies and their circumstances for the better part of 19th and 20th centuries1.

The book has examined the spiritual importance of these events mainly by comparing them to a biblical comprehension of the word of God. This review explores the tactics devised by evangelicals to regain their lost status and power2. From the start, the author pointed out some personal postulations regarding the history of evangelism.

The author seems to hate the theology or gospel of prosperity3. In addition, he abhorred seeing Christianity as a strong cultural force, and seemed to detest the industrialization aspect. Other criticism are spread throughout the book: Frank is against prosperity, hates people who make big businesses and terms naïve people who are optimistic about the history of the world, and enjoys suffering images of prophets.

He understood faithfulness as a form of mysticism and not obedience. The author indicated that Calvinism was a theology of desolation: spirituality was wraithlike.

One of the weakest points of Frank is that evangelicals presided over a service by simply outlining their history instead of preaching the word of God. In other words, they engaged in self glorification4. This may be true because writers have a third eye, but may not be the case for all evangelicals. He further explored the cultural, financial, as well as psychological aspects for the faith particularly of people he does not identify with; instead, he considers his personal understanding of the word of God as real.

At the beginning, the author indicates that these evangelicals were inspired by events that happened during the civil war; however, his analysis in most cases is not historical5.

Frank held the view that the American Civil War as well as its aftermath created divisions in the belief of people, but then, he wrote most of his work before civil war transpired. The author described the unending anxieties over industrialization and change that drove evangelicals to emphasize devoutness, yet he provided no explanation about other theologies that were not pietistic in this fast changing modern world.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In a simple way, Frank argued that extensive civilization was the leading cause of psychological disorders, yet he did not mention or even disrepute what other researches said on the same or why they held a different view. According to the author, during the last part of 19th and first part of 20th century, rapid social change was evident to a point that most evangelicals could not manage the new America successfully.

During this time, evangelicals showed anxiety towards the future6. In addition, they believed that crises facing them were caused by someone who was a devoted faithful. With this, the author explored two religious ideas –Victorious Life theology and Dispensationalist theology as they functioned as coping mechanisms for evangelicals7.

In conclusion, Frank has approached or analyzed evangelicals in both fronts-positive or constructive and negative. On the positives, Franks explored the contribution of evangelicals in stimulating current Christian faith. On the negative side, his arguments against particular theological views were shallow. Frank contrasted certain historical ideas with the evangelism. This means that the word of God is not understood via historical reason.

Bibliography Frank, Douglas. Less Than Conquerors: How Evangelicals Entered the Twentieth Century. New York: Eerdmans Publishers, 1986.

Footnotes 1 Frank, Douglas, Less Than Conquerors: How Evangelicals Entered the Twentieth Century. (New York: Eerdmans Publishers, 1986), 4.

2 ibid, 2.

3 Ibid, 312.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on “Less than Conquerors: How Christians entered the 20th century” by Douglas Frank specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More 4 Ibid, 6-7.

5 Frank, Douglas, Less Than Conquerors: How Evangelicals Entered the Twentieth Century. (New York: Eerdmans Publishers, 1986), 10-14

6 Ibid, 4-5.

7 Ibid, 25-34.


Data Warehouse and Data Mining in Business Qualitative Research Essay college admissions essay help

Introduction Operation of organisations requires the possession of an immense wealth of information, which makes the application of data warehouses and data mining valuable in modern business operation environments. Fundamentally, enterprise data warehouse, alternatively termed as a data warehouse, refers to databases that are deployed in data analysis coupled with reporting (Inmon 5).

Data warehouses are meant to provide a storeroom for historical and recent data that is deployed for the making and dispensation of information that are utilised when preparing superior management plans such as the assemblage of periodical and yearly reports for comparison purposes.

Data contained in the warehouses is normally uploaded to various operational systems of an organisation including sales and marketing, among others. Opposed to data warehouse, data mining refers to “the computational process of discovering patterns in large data sets involving the methods of intersection of artificial intelligence, machine learning, statistics, and data systems” (Haughton et al. 290).

The main aim of putting in place a system for data mining in an organisation is to provide a means of retrieving reports from data stores with the overall objective of converting the retrieved reports into forms, which can be altered into an appropriate arrangement.

Considering that both data warehouse and data mining may avail an incredible data to an organisation, which can be deployed in making vital decision and or aid in taking corrective measures upon its analysis, it sounds imperative for all nations to have organisations placing central emphasis on data warehouse and data mining.

This paper aims at conducting a comparative analysis for the extent to which data warehouse and data mining have been deployed in the UAE and Europe. Before this section, a brief history of data mining and data warehouse is considered.

Research Project Questions Data warehouse and data mining are incredible in providing business support solutions. From this assertion, the two important research questions related to this research include:

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In which industry are data warehousing and data mining most beneficial? As revealed later, data mining and data warehousing have been applied in science and engineering, surveillance, medical fields, and in the business field in both the UAE and the international arena. However, it is most beneficial in the business field.

Is the application of data mining and data warehousing a reserve of some organisations, and to what extent are they utilised within the UAE and other parts of the world? In response, data mining and data warehousing are in all organisations, with the UAE organisations using it the most in all its organisations.

History of data warehouse and data mining Data warehouse

The concept of data warehousing was first introduced at a practical level in the 1980s. In this time, an IBM researcher Barry Delvin and his colleague Paul Murphy developed the concept with the intention of providing a model for enhancing the flow of various forms of organisational data from an operation system into an environmental decisions support system.

With regard to Inmon, “the concept attempted to address the various problems associated with this flow, mainly the high cost associated with it” (13).

The circumstances leading to the establishment and development of the concept of data warehousing was attributed to the fact that failure to have a data warehouse led to the need of putting in place large amounts of redundancy to help in supporting a myriad of decision support environments.

As information systems within large organisation become complex coupled with disintegration of a single organisation into several parts to enhance service delivery and specialisations, it becomes crucial for each department within an organisation to have its information database and buffer systems.

Consequently, “…in large corporations, it was typical for multiple decision support environments to operate independently” (Zhu and Davidson 67). For instance, in a business set up, an organisation can implement a data warehouse plan that monitors clients’ purchases, as shown below.

Source: (Browning and Mundy)

However, even though different departments held different information, each department’s operations depended on the information held by other departments. Data stored by various departments within an organisation is also similar in one way or another.

We will write a custom Essay on Data Warehouse and Data Mining in Business specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For this reason, Barry Delvin and his colleague Paul Murphy found it necessary to develop a “process of gathering, cleaning and integrating data from various sources, usually from long-term existing operational systems, which could be replicated for each environment” (Zhu and Davidson 71).

Although the 1980s marked the period in which the concept of data warehousing was developed into a form that could be utilised within an organisation, the initial formulations of the concept can be traced as early as1960s. The pyramid below shows the beneficiaries of data warehousing and the extent to which they use the technology.

Source: (Browning and Mundy)

In 1960, General Mills came up with the terms facts and dimensions as they are applied in data warehousing. A decade later, IRI together with ACNielsen speared headed the invention of data marts utilised in retail sales.

In the same decade, Bill Inmon attempted to define the term data house. In 1975, Sperry Univac introduced the concept of MAPPER. It refers to “data management and reporting systems that include the world’s first 4GL, which formed the first platform specifically designed for building information centres (a forerunner of contemporary enterprise data warehousing platform)” (O’Brien and Marakas 93).

The work acted as an insight into the work of Taradata in 1983 who designed and practically tested a database management system meant to enhance decision support. Development of data warehouse in the application of decision support systems acquired principal focus in the 1990s when Raph Kimball introduced the red brick warehouse.

This data management system was particularly designed for data warehousing. Bill Inmon developed further this work when he designed software for data warehouse development in 1991. Later, in the year 2000, Daniel Linstedt released Data Vault.

Data Mining

Data mining has established central roles in knowledge engineering and artificial intelligence discourses. It refers to “the process of discovering meaningful correlations, patterns, and trends by sifting through large amounts of data stored in databases” (Haughton et al. 290) following the procedure below.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Data Warehouse and Data Mining in Business by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Source: (O’Brien and Marakas)

Its roots are ingrained in statistics and machine learning though applied mainly in computer science. The subject of data mining has attracted an immense interest over the last two decade, although its study started four decades ago. Data mining started as a statistical analysis tool advocated for by two main companies: SPSS and SAS (O’Brien and Marakas 31).

Nevertheless, some of the applications of data mining in the past four decades remain relevant today. They include regression analysis and cluster analysis, among others. The modern statistics routines used in data mining have incredibly improved on the past application of data mining.

New approaches to data mining like heuristics, fuzzy logic, and neural networks began to gain substantive scholarly attention in the 1980s. With improved computational power of computers, more extensive analysis and analyses that are more powerful could be done through interactive classification.

Source: (O’Brien and Marakas)

Workshops on data mining, alternatively called knowledge discovery in databases, were first held in the 1990s. However, such conferences have been incredibly on the hike over the last decade. Precisely, data mining can be traced from three primary sources. These are statistics, artificial intelligence, and machine learning. Data mining can be accomplished through simple strategies such as graphing coupled with charting.

A good example of enhancing data mining through charting is the case of scatter graphs. In an organisation, data mining has broad applications including identification of customer patterns, finding various associations existing between various demographic traits of clients, and identification of the most royal customers, among other tasks. Arguably, multiple departments within an organisation need such information.

Comparison and evaluation of data warehousing and data mining in the UAE vs. International level

Different nations across the globe, including the UAE, have received and applied data warehousing and data mining in a variety of fields.

Data mining has been applied in science and engineering, surveillance, medical fields, and in the business field in both the UAE and the international arena. However, this section discusses the application of data mining and data warehousing in business only since other application are beyond the scope of the paper.

In commercial applications, data warehouse and data mining are incredibly helpful in analysing various chronological performances of a company often available in the company’s records in the form of inactive data. The purpose of the analysis of data is principally to unveil trends and patterns of hidden business performance.

This task is accomplished in data mining through the deployment of data mining software, which makes use of “advanced pattern recognition algorithms to sift through large amounts of data to assist in discovering previously unknown strategic business information” (O’Brien and Marakas 107). Data mining has been used throughout the world, including in the UAE to perform several business-related tasks.

The tasks include market analysis in the effort to identify potential new products, determine the causes of manufacturing problems, prevent withdrawal of some customers from consuming an organisation’s products, acquire new customers, generate customer profiles for purposes of evaluation, and determine the appropriate marketing strategies to sell across both existing and potential customers.

Valid examples of global organisation have invested heavily on data warehousing and data mining to enhance their performances in the dynamic business environment. For instance, “Wal-Mart processes over 20 million point-of-sale transactions every day” (O’Brien and Marakas 141) with the transactions’ information being contained in a centralised database.

Every department within Wal-Mart has to extract information that is necessary to perform its operations from the database. Although information extracted this way is crucial for the making of decisions that would help to better the performance of every department within the company, such raw data is not of any use without having some sort of software to analyse the data.

The need to analyse such data underlines the significance of data mining software within any company having a large pool of customers and with global operations.

For the case of Wal-Mart, the use of data mining techniques to conduct an analysis of the information contained in the centralised database enables the company to develop necessary campaigns for marketing and even predict loyalties developed by customers in relation to a myriad of brands offered by the company with better precision.

Data mining techniques are also helpful in aiding to build and manage customer relationships across all organisations in the world, including in the UAE. From the analysis of data contained in a data warehouse of an organisation using data mining techniques, the UAE organisations have ceased from maintaining a centralised call centre for contacting potential customers.

Rather, the focus shifts to targeting customers who have the highest probability for responding to a given offer from the analysis of their purchasing patterns.

Additionally, with regard to Zhu and Davidson, from the analysis of the data contained in a data warehouse using data mining statistical and other tools, “more sophisticated methods may be used to optimise resources across campaigns so that one may predict to which channel and to which offer an individual is most likely to respond (across all potential offers)” (88).

Once analysis is done to determine response patterns for potential clients for an organisation’s products, automation of mails can be done in the effort to solicit the potential customers to respond. This practice has been well developed and used not only in the UAE but also in the global arena.

Real world examples for the application of data warehousing and data mining used by the UAE organisations

Data warehouses and data mining used by the UAE are available in a variety of places across the globe. For instance, they are used in India in health care settings. One of such practical application is the use of data mining to aid in decision making as tools for evaluation of treatment choice for various ailments such as fibroids (Campbell 201).

In the installation process of such software, the main challenging question that appeared was whether data mining could indeed be applicable in facilitation of the treatment process for fibroids to provide means of predicating possible treatment choices.

If the answers were yes, the hospital technologists within India questioned on the most appropriate data mining techniques that would help to predict the outcomes of various treatment options. In the effort to address these queries, generation of an archive of data relating to different available treatment options and the responses of patients upon undergoing the procedure were maintained.

Based on the characteristics of the patients, analysis of the data warehouse helps to predict the most viable treatment option that is consistent with every patient’s fibroid treatments needs in India.

Extension of this decision through data mining and database warehouse in India to the diagnosis and treatment of other complex ailments has seen the nation rise up as one of the nations in the world housing the most successful treatment facilities with many cases of ailments requiring advanced treatment being referred to India.

Oracle software: how it supports the business The Oracle Company makes and sells various software applications for business support across the globe. The oracle software carries a myriad of functional modules deploying RDBMS, which functions as back-end.

The various functional modules ingrained within business support software produced by oracle include Oracle HRMS (human resource management systems), oracle CRM (customer relations management), Oracle financials, oracle projects, and oracle procurement among others.

The first business support software to be released by oracle was oracle financials in the 1980s. Later, the company released a myriad of business support software, including the database warehouse management systems and data mining software.

The oracle data-mining module (ODM) is essentially an optional relational data management system (RDBMS). It constitutes data analysis and data management algorithms designed to support business through easing tasks such as feature selection, classification of data, regression analysis, detection of various anomalies, making predictions, and other specialised analytics necessary when making organisational decisions.

With regard to Davenport, oracle data mining software is pivotal in “providing a means of creation, management, and operational deployment of data mining models inside the database” (214). Making of decisions within an organisation requires immense scrutiny and analysis of quantitative data that helps to explain trends in business operations and in general the industry trends.

Purposing to help an organisation to realise these functions, regression analysis-support and modules are incorporated into the ODM. The implementation of various business functional-support modules are done such that “the implementations are integrated right into the oracle database kernel operating natively on stored data in the relational database tables” (Davenport 215).

From these databases, different departments of an organisation can tap the necessary data, which upon its analysis helps in making vital decisions.

Use of Carrefour Technology in Europe and in the UAE Carrefour is one of the leading global distributors of various commodities. The company has various classes of distribution networks such as supermarkets and hypermarkets coupled with convenience and hard discount stores in America, Europe, the UAE, and other regions in the world. The organisation has been endeavouring to maintain its leadership within a competitive grocery industry.

The company planned to achieve this goal through “gaining control over its marketing process and more effectiveness in leveraging its business intelligence- with the ultimate aim of strengthening customer loyalty” (IBM Para 4).

The solution to resolve challenges facing Carrefour was arrived at by strategically deciding to partner with IBM coupled with other parents to design and implement a system for in-house promotion throughout the supermarkets and hypermarkets owned by the organisation.

This strategy was found to be incredible in aiding to plan and execute more focused marketing plans, which would ensure rapid assessment of the campaign feedbacks. It was essential in the quick evaluation of marketing efforts of the company. Getting information on how customers respond to a given promotional campaign may be measured from various dimensions.

The most significant way of measuring is assessing changes in sale levels of an organisation. Given that Carrefour has many retail stores across the globe, garnering all such information requires the creation of computer-enabled interfaces.

Faced with the need of rapid analysis of sales data, Carrefour had limited options rather than deploying data mining and data warehousing technology, which consisted of various solution components, which were an IBM Supermarket Application coupled with IBM DB2 from the paradigm of software.

Following the success of its technology in helping to establish better relationships with customers, suppliers, and in helping to plan for short but effective marketing campaigns, the Carrefour technology has been used in many European and the UAE organisations to the extent of being deployed in the retail industry and national organisations.

Pros, Cons, Strengths, and Weaknesses with respect to data warehousing and data mining systems The goal of using data management systems is to facilitate decision-making processes in a more rapid way. However, irrespective of the extent to which systems may be helpful to achieve this noble purpose, no systems lack pros and cons, and strengths and weakness. In case of data warehouse, copies of information garnered form transactions within organisations are maintained.

This case provides an essential opportunity for an organisation to “congregate data from multiple sources into a single database so that a single query engine can be used to present data” (Inmon 52).

Data warehouse also makes it possible to keep historical records of transactions even though systems for the transaction may fail to do so. This data is utilised in making future forecasts, which help to inform critical activities of a business, including the sale and forecasting of production patterns in the future.

Through a data warehouse, it also becomes possible for an organisation to come up with a means of integration of data from a number of sources in the effort to create an overall means for decision making in an entire enterprise.

It also enables an organisation to provide data and information that is consistent since the results of the analysis are representative of both current and historical trends from the analysis of data using data mining tools.

Furthermore, data warehousing is essential in “restructuring data so that it makes sense to the business users, restructuring the data so that it delivers an excellent query performance, even for complex analytic queries, without impacting the operational systems, and adding value to operational business applications, notably customer relationship (CRM) systems” (Inmon 55).

Consequently, through data warehousing, it is possible to provide data models for all data of interest irrespective of the sources of the data within an organisation. Although data warehousing has all these merits, it has central weaknesses (cons) in that data is usually stored in a ‘soft’ form.

The link between data warehousing and data mining is that it is easier to mine data, which is properly housed meaning that the effectiveness of data mining is dependent on data housing. Consequently, data mining has the demerit that it cannot be effective without the existence of an integrated organisational information database.

In case databases are corrupted, or information contained in them is lost through malicious acts of some employees of an organisation or unauthenticated access to an organisation’s database systems, it implies that data mining software loaded in an organisation’s systems would have no data source from which to carry out analysis.

In addition, as Haughton et al. reckon, “if a data mining query has to run through terabytes of data spread across multiple databases, which sit on different physical networks, the query is not efficient and that getting results will take a long time” (301). This demerit puts a pre-condition to data systems developers since data warehouse systems must be developed such that they are able to interconnect with other databases.

Market analysis for data warehousing and data mining systems The market for data warehouses and data mining systems is immense in the UAE and in the international fronts across many industries. For instance, in the discipline of human resource, data mining can be utilised in the identification of employees who are most productive to an organisation based on their historic efficiency and outputs recorded and maintained in an organisation’s integrated database (data warehouse).

This argument means that the market is substantive for the systems in organisations, which want to have an overall means for evaluation and interrelating data for different organisations’ departments for integration followed by the analysis of the integrated data in the effort to draw more decisions that are conclusive.

The market potential for data warehouse and data mining software has grown in multiple figures following the high demand for decision support systems in the field of engineering and general science. Such areas include education, genetics, bioinformatics, and mechanical and electrical engineering without negating the discipline of medicine.

For instance, with regard to Zhu and Davidson, “in human genetics, sequence mining addresses the important goal of understanding the mapping relationship between the inter-individual variations in human DNA sequence and the variability in disease susceptibility” (109).

The main aim for using data mining in the human genetics is to help in the determination of how alterations of gene structure influence the danger for contracting ailments such as tumour. This argument is significant in the attempt to design and implement strategies for ailment prevention, diagnosis, and treatments. Arguably, the subject of immunology is beyond regional physical boundaries between nations.

Consequently, data mining software such as the software for the multifactor dimensionality reduction would gain positive market reception in the UAE and internationally, including Europe. In fact, European nations have been committing hefty amounts of money to investments in the new immunology and diseases diagnosis technologies in the past three decades.

From a business dimension, the UAE has been noted as being a significant business hub within Middle East. Organisations operating in the region largely depend on information garnering, integration, and processing to make decisions for vibrant growth.

These organisations are able to withstand global market dynamics so that minimal impacts of global financial crunch are experienced in the UAE organisations in comparison to organisations operating in Europe. Growth and the ability to develop resilience to business dynamic depend on how much an organisation is risk-aware.

Analysis of the degree of susceptibility of an organisation to risks is dependent on cute establishment of the trends of business performance based on the historical data. Indeed, this goal cannot be realised without analysis tools such as data mining techniques.

As argued before, these tools and techniques cannot operate free of data. Since the goal of any organisation is to ensure its long-term operation in the effort to return value to its owners, data warehousing and data mining possess an incredibly high potential not only in the UAE but also globally.

Main suppliers’ systems Data warehousing and data mining systems can be designed in-house within an organisation. However, such an attempt would attract hefty costs. The alternative is hiring the service of an external supplier of the systems. Such suppliers include IBM and Oracle Foundation, among others.

It is important to note that, with globalisation and diversification of markets, it is no longer necessary to consider sources of suppliers for information systems of an organisation from just only potential supplier operating with a particular trade region or a country.

Rather, consideration of global dimensions is vital while evaluating the best information systems for procurement. Important aspects for considering when seeking the suppliers to procure data warehousing and data mining systems include the system availability, quality, reliability, and system security, among others.

Trends, perspectives, recommendations, and conclusion Many industries in all business fields operating in a competitive business world recognise the relevance of developing information-based organisations to help in decision supports.

The trend in the corporate world has been to seek mechanisms of ensuring that decisions affecting the business of an organisation are based on data that is accumulated by an organisation for a span of time in the effort to make the future forecast-based for instance on data on consumption patterns of certain customers in particular markets.

In the attempt to remain competitive through the establishment of specific market campaigns that would see potential competitors pose lesser threats of new entrants, organisations must integrate all data handled by different organisation’s departments into a single source from which all departments can tap.

The paper discussed this matter as one of noble factors that favour positive reception of data warehousing technology both in the UAE and in the international arena. The trend of data mining has been the deployment of three leading data mining techniques.

These are clustering, neural networks, and association rule and decision trees. They have been vital in alleviating the challenge of an organisation having too much data accompanied with little information.

Although an organisation can hold a tremendous amount of data in its warehouse that documents every transaction, such data is worthless if a means of its analysis is not available so that appropriate decisions based on the statistical data inferences can be made. In this perspective, the paper argued that data mining is the aspect that enables an organisation to conduct an analysis of data to reveal business trends.

Works Cited Browning, Dave, and Joy Mundy. Data Warehouse Design Considerations, 2000. Web.

Campbell, Kevin. Exploration of Classification Techniques as a Treatment Decision Support Tool for Patients with Uterine Fibroids: Proceedings of International Workshop on Data Mining for HealthCare Management. New York: PAKDD, 2010. Print.

Davenport, Henry. “Competing on analytics.” Harvard Business Review 3.1 (2006): 213-217. Print.

Haughton, Dominique et al. “A review of software packages for data mining.” The American Statistician 57. 4(2003): 290–309. Print.

IBM. Carrefour strengthens customer loyalty and its brand with a new promotions strategy, 2013. Web.

Inmon, William. Building the Data Warehouse. New York, NY: John Wiley and Sons, 2005. Print.

O’Brien, Jonhston, and George Marakas. Management Information Systems. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2011. Print.

Zhu, Xingquan, and Ian Davidson. Knowledge Discovery and Data Mining: Challenges and Realities. New York, NY: Hershey, 2007. Print.


Native Americans: Social Issue Analytical Essay essay help online free

The native populations The estimates are that the current people who report to belong to the American Indians are 2.5 million. Compared to the whole of the American population, the number is significantly small. Moreover, this is just an estimate. The predictions are that the number might even be smaller. Given the small number, the American Indians are considered to be among the minority groups in the American society.

The Native American Indians are exceptionally diverse group of people consisting of over 560 sub-tribes spread in almost all states. However, majority are living in Alaskan native villages. Due to their spread and small number, their tribes or bands are used distinguish them from the mainstream Americans.

However, the federal governments, majorly for political reasons, do not recognize most of them (Kemnitzer, 2008). Tribes currently recognized by the federal governments are located in distinct cultural settings and in most cases speaking their native languages.

The mostly stereotyped native Indian Americans are residing in the remote villages, far removed from the mainstream Americans. In most cases, they practice their own cultures. However, the practices have been undermined and discriminated against by the authorities. As modernization and urbanization continues to take its tall in America, most the natives have moved into towns.

Currently, about 33% of the Indian natives reside in urban centers. However, quit larger population still live in tribal trust lands and reservations (Kemnitzer, 2008). According to the US Census Bureau, the Indian American population consists of the younger generation.

The estimates are that 34% of the total population is below the age of eighteen. Compared to the American population the median age is 35 years and 26% are below eighteen years old.

Only ten thousand Indian American children are attending school. The number is far much less than any other American minority group (Gutierres et al., 2004). The federal government has been attempting to assimilate the natives into the American mainstream. However, the efforts have been futile (Gutierres et al., 2004). The only way through which these groups of people can be assimilated is through schooling.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to the US Census Bureau, only 3% of the adult natives are literate. Most studies indicate that the Indian natives have undergone intergenerational historical traumas causing the low literally levels. Over the centuries, the native Indians have been discriminated against (Kemnitzer, 2008).

To some extent, most of the tribes were exterminated in a bid to wipe them out. Even over the last century, the governments attempted to wipe out the cultural aspects of the Indian Americans.

Even though there are many similarities among the natives large differences actually exists. The heterogeneity can be observed among the individuals and communities particularly, depending on the ancestry and blood relations. Other differences also exist in the residential patterns, identity, cultural affiliations and participation in the mainstream activities (Schiele, 2011).

While considering social issues affecting the natives, it is critical to put into consideration their diversity and the implications such social issues have on their development, prevention efforts and implementations.

In this case, the discussion will center on many social issue affecting the natives. Like any minority in American society, there are many social ills affecting the native larger young population.

The social issues affecting the Indian American ranges from social discrimination, prejudice, stigma and stereotype to the substance abuse. National surveys that have been done indicate that there is high prevalence rate of the substances abuse among the native young population (Wallace, 2010).

The beliefs and stereotypes The American natives have historically looked down upon and the stereotypes continue today. For various reasons the natives have been stereotyped and such stereotypes are still engrained in the American mainstream (Trimble, 2008). For many years, the natives have been described as enigma by the mainstream American society.

We will write a custom Essay on Native Americans: Social Issue specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The sources of knowledge including the education system have been portraying the natives as primitive, savage, exotic, unspiritual and unromantic. In fact, the American society sees natives as those who do not belong to the human race (Ashley


Tour Operators’ Influence on Hotels in Mallorca Dissertation college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Introduction Tourism is rooted in the history of ancient civilisations. Over the years, the industry has grown to become one of the most lucrative sectors for the generation of foreign revenues in many nations. Franscesco Frangialli, the WTO secretary-general, posits, “Tourism at the turn of the century is growing faster than even our most optimistic predictions, which continuously simulate its development worldwide” (Rita, 2010, p.435).

The economic development of the Balearic Islands is strongly dependent on the inflow of tourists. Mallorca stands out as one of the biggest islands among the Balearic Islands in Spain with many three-star and five-star hotels. At present, governmental organisations and private companies attempt to find ways of attracting people from foreign countries to the Balearic Islands. Amongst these organisations, tour operators’ organisations influence the nature and magnitude of inflow of tourists into the Balearic Islands.

Literatures on factors affecting tourism attractions mainly focus on infrastructural development, the presence of natural or cultural sites, and the development of the tourism industry among others factors, thus leaving out the roles of travel agencies insufficiently addressed. For instance, some studies highlight why a certain place can attract the attention of travel agencies without showing the impacts of the agencies on the hospitality facilities such as hotels.

This challenge is aggravated by the inadequate or even lack of data showing how these organisations shape the development of tourist destinations. This study seeks to close this gap by restricting its concerns to the impacts of tour travel operators on hotels in Mallorca. Consequently, this study examines how the power of tour operators influences various hotels in Mallorca. This interrogative presents practical implications.

Precisely, the determination of influence of the power of tourists’ travel on hotels in Mallorca is important in the development of strategic plans, which are consistent with the considerations addressed by various tour travel operators in recommending various accommodation facilities for their clients.

Aims and objectives The inflow of tourists within a given geographical region is influenced by factors such as political, state of economic development, and even social factors. One important factor that is not significantly studied, which guides the objective for conducting this research, is the power of tour travel operators.

Researchers in the hospitality industry focus on the mechanisms of increasing the popularity of certain tourist destinations. Indeed, several studies have aimed at examining the factors that affect the development of the tourism industry (Izquierdo-Yusta


Stages Of Organisational Growth Analytical Essay cheap essay help

Introduction An organisation is a group of people who work together with coordinated efforts to achieve certain objectives or goals (Lewis, 2007). Organisations are established by individuals or groups of individuals. During their formation, there is usually very little to talk about by the owner(s) and too much for them to do. Just like human beings, organisations need to grow so as to enable the owner or owners realize their objectives.

If the aspect of growth is removed, then it becomes almost impossible for an organisation to exist beyond its formation stage (Alstete,, 2007). The signs of growth are expansion and increase in financial base.

It also includes increase in the number of employees and diversification of a business as well as the separation of the owner from the business. Organisations also grow through mergers and acquisitions, all in the spirit of attaining their mission and vision (Changing minds organisation, 2013).

Business management commentators have described various models of organisational growth. All of them vary in terms of how they conceptualize growth but they have one thing in common, that is, they all focus on the importance of creativity, resilience and innovativeness in the business (Dodge, Fullerton


Literature Review of MNCs scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Discussion Multinational corporations operate in environments where they deal with different cultures. Multinationals serve customers from various cultures and their workforce is also culturally diverse. The management has to deal with the diverse culture of the organizations to succeed in the global scene. The challenges that managers encounter when managing diversity will be assessed in chapter two of this article.

Literature review Multinationals are firms that are spread out in other countries other than the mother country. A multinational organization has its headquarters in one country, which is known as the home country, and then other branches in different countries known as the host countries. Multinationals are classified into four categories. The first category is the decentralized corporations.

These are multinationals that give the branches at the host countries the power to make decisions and conduct their own operations independently. The multinational branches in the host countries should have a strong local presence for them to be given the mandate to make their own decisions.

The second category is the global centralized corporations. These are corporations whose control is given to one group, usually the headquarters in the home country. All operations of the organizational groups are centralized. All the costs and decisions are made at the central group. The group can be located in an area where there are cheap resources to minimize costs.

The third category is the international company that builds on the parent corporation’s technology. The parent corporation in this case is usually the source of technology. The other group organizations source technology from the parent and build on it.

Finally, there is the transnational enterprise that combines the previous three approaches. Such organizations have some duties that are centralized, while others build on the parent corporation’s technology.

There have been changes in the workplace of multinationals over the last couple of years. According to Early and Gibson (2002:15), the most noteworthy changes are two. The first is the scope and concentration with which the market has been internationalized, while the second is that there has been reformation of companies.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the setting up of firms internationally, “open borders, bringing together of business regulations, pan-European strategic management, and the single currency have speeded up European economic amalgamation” (Mercado et al. 2001: 476). These have facilitated the mobility of people across Europe and in the world.

Multinationals ought to be as flexible and dynamic as possible in their operations. Teamwork is also paramount.

Flexibility is felt to be particularly important in this globalised business world since parts of a company may be “formed, disbanded and reformed to respond rapidly to changing business needs comprising members from different countries, different company locations and different teams” (Earley and Gibson 2002: 19). Technology enhances communication among the various organizational teams spread out in different countries.

Communication, among other concerns, is pertinent when dealing with teams that comprise members from different cultures. A collapse in cross-cultural knowledge transmission is seen as a danger, risk and hazard to a corporation’s competitiveness, feasibility and existence. Divides as a result of culture or any other cause hampers team efforts since conflicts are bound to occur when dealing with a culturally-diverse group.

Culture and Diversity Cultural diversity in multinationals is where employees working in the company are from different cultural backgrounds. The multinational corporations recruit employees depending in their skills, expertise and knowledge. They do not consider the race, ethnicity or the nationality of the individual as long as they have the right qualifications.

There have been disputes regarding cultural diversity in that it is likely to have some negative impacts on the organization (Early


‘Lin and Chang debate’ summary Compare and Contrast Essay online essay help: online essay help

The debate,’ whether policies to encourage industrial upgrading should conform to current comparative advantages or aim at missing out on the ladder’, saw a battle of brains, with the protagonists, Lin and Chang, renowned experts in their own fields engaging in a productive and healthy debate, arrived to the same conclusions while at the same time holding clashing views on the matter.

The following is a summary of the debate, emphasizing their differences as well as their emergent similarities on the issue (Lin and Chang 484).

Technological advances and industrial upgrading have taken the center stage in many development discussions with particular reference to developing economies. Both Chang and Lin agree on the intervening role of the state with regards to this matter.

However, Lin suggests the need for developing countries to import modern technology and institutions developed elsewhere and incorporate them in their system to achieve their end objective of sustained economic growth. This means that such countries should hold a comparative advantage view point, one advocated for in the Ricardo’s model.

In this case, countries should focus on industries where they can specialize in a bid to enable them compete effectively with other countries. The emphasis here is on such countries using their present factors of production such as cheap labor or natural resources, rather than wait for future factors of products such as skilled labor and capital.

Chang, however, is of a contrary opinion. He argues that a state needs to defy its comparative advantage in order to upgrade its industry.

This is because comparative advantage will help a country to achieve its short term efficiencies that deal with the efficient use of a country’s available resources, as opposed to the medium term advantage and long term development which lead to sustained growth that is the main focus of the discussion.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Chang also brings out the various differences on the assumptions implicated by the hoaxer-Ohlin-Samuelson (HOS) theory, which Lin bases his arguments on. The theory is on the assumption of perfect factor mobility.

Chang questions its practicality in the real world as it is not possible for a factor of production, for instance, labor to be transferred to a different industry or country. This is because its composition is subject to change. This is because labor, in this case, in order for it to maintain its relevance in that particular industry or country, needs to be developed by improving the knowledge and skills of the worker.

This is coupled with another emerging challenge of trade liberalization. This has to do with the work compensations schemes. This happens as a consequence of trade adjustment. Most governments in developing countries do not have elaborate compensation schemes that involve workers who change location or work in different industries as a result of trade adjustments.

This puts a constraint on one of the main focuses of Ricardo’s theory that is of perfect factor mobility. Lin however argues that the adjustment costs that emerge from trade liberalization can be accommodated in mainstream trade models.

Chang counters this suggestion by indicating that these costs have a huge impact on the economy and, therefore, should not be sidelined by policy makers by viewing them as a part of the trade models.

The coined aspect of ‘flying geese’, introduced by Lin, indicates that assets can be shifted to a different geographical location if any trade adjustment occurs in an attempt to incorporate them in the trade model, and in a bid to minimize adjustment costs. Chang indicates that such assets would not be of the same benefit in a different location as they originally held.

Despite the above detailed differences, the two intellectuals agree on the important role the government has to play in promoting technological and industrial upgrading as well as the fact that deviating too much from a country’s comparative advantages is risky and should, therefore, be avoided.

We will write a custom Essay on ‘Lin and Chang debate’ summary specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Contrast between Ricardo’s model and Greenwald and Stiglitz paper The Ricardo’s theory of comparative advantage indicates that a country exports the commodity in which it has a comparative labor productivity advantage (Morgan 67). This means that a country despite its absolute advantage still gains from trade.

This is where the bone of contention lies with regards to a model developed by Greenwald and Stiglitz (143). This offers the main basis for the differences between the two models as explained below.

The Greenwald and Stiglitz model indicates that since the developed economy enjoys absolute advantages in the production of goods, trade is not necessary as it is beneficial to only the developing economy.

Ricardo’s model differs with this view as it indicates regardless of the absolute advantage an economy enjoys, there is a need for trade as it needs to import goods based on their opportunity cost analysis, weighing their costs and benefits.

The Greenwald and Stiglitz model takes into consideration spillover effects in different sectors of the economy such as education, agriculture, health and the like. The Ricardo’s model does not take these into consideration.

Ricardo’s model’s main theme, that of comparative advantage, provides for the sustainable growth of a country that is developed by its effort to use its already existing resources and also participate in trade in a bid to obtain resources, such as technology, from the developed countries. This contrasts the Greenwald and Stiglitz model that assumes that countries without an industrial sector cannot achieve productive growth.

Works Cited Greenwald, Bruce and Joseph Stiglitz. “Helping infant economies grow: Foundations of trade policies for developing countries”. New Developments In macro Economics. 96.2 (2006): 141-146.

Lin, Justin and Ha-Joon Chang. “ Should Industrial Policy in Developing Countries Conform to Comparative Advantage or Defy it? A Debate Between Justin Lin and Ha-Joon Chang”. Development Policy Review. 27.5. (2009): 483-502.

Not sure if you can write a paper on ‘Lin and Chang debate’ summary by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Morgan, Mary. The world in the model: How economists work and think. New York: Oxford Publishers, 2012. Print.


Do We Have a Crisis in the High Street? Argumentative Essay college application essay help

Living in the XXI century means entering the realm of globalization, where the so-called “butterfly effect” is especially noticeable; the slightest change caused by a local factor in one of the global companies will inevitably trigger a train of changes within the rest of organizations all over the globe.

Although in most cases, these changes can hardly be regarded as crucial ones, in certain cases, the effects can be quite dramatic, leading to a series of financial failures, which, in their turn, will result in another crisis.

Because of the unreasonable steps undertaken by the UK government in encouraging the small private bank and retail business, a number of High Street banking and retail chains are being closed, which leads to massive increase in unemployment rates and the downfall of the UK economy.

In his article ‘Cable’s fables: High Street not in crisis, insists business secretary Vince Cable’’, Lyons (2013) offers an analysis of his interview with Vince Cable, a business secretary and one of the key authorities on the economical and financial affairs of the UK.

Often regarded as something to be avoided at all costs, a crisis is, in fact, an integral part of economical and financial development. There are theories that attempt at stating the exact amount of time, which a crisis normally takes, as well as classify crises according to their length and severity. For instance, there are banking, international financial, wider economic crises and a range of others.

Finally, the existing economical theories claim that a crisis leads to not only negative, but also positive outcomes, among which the re-interpretation of the state’s financial and economical values, rethinking the state’s political and financial strategy and redefining the state’s priorities must be mentioned.

Moreover, by analyzing the causes of the crisis, as well as its prerequisites and the outcomes, companies can possibly avoid similar experiences in the future.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The issue with the High Street crisis is not that simple, however. Despite the numerous pieces of evidence concerning its destructive effects and the anxious entrepreneurs doing everything possible to get the best of the current deals and wrap up the business activities before the effects of the crisis hit them, the very existence of the crisis has been questioned.

On the one hand, denying the crisis might mean refusing to accept the obvious truth; on the other hand, however, the crisis can possibly be proven a spoof. As the reports say, authorities, Vince Cable among them, believe that the crisis simply does not exist: “In general – and I do not want to minimise the impact on people losing their jobs which is obviously horrific – I don’t think I would describe it as a crisis” (Lyons, 2013).

To Cable’s credit, there are signs that certain retailers manage to fight the crisis efficiently and even start business in such an uncomfortable economical environment. As the recent news shows, though the rates of banks and retail shops closing down the High Street make twenty per day, at least two new banks have been recently opened.

While Cable might underrate the scale of the economical and financial problems, which the entire world seems to be gripped by, his arguments are rather valid.

The fact that people lose jobs very easily alone cannot prove the existence and development of a global crisis. While the unemployment rates are increasing, the financial aspect remains rather stable, which means that the current state of affairs might be considered from a less radical point of view.

Unfortunately, most evidence concerning the current financial state of affairs points at the fact that the crisis still exists and that more and more chains of services go bankrupt. To make the matters worse, the entire High Street business seems to have ceased to exist.

To analyze the issue in question, as well as offer prognoses concerning the further economical development of the state, one will have to consider the causes of the High Street crisis. To some extent, the owners of the banks and shops have to be blamed for their failure.

We will write a custom Essay on Do We Have a Crisis in the High Street? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As Mathew explains, Mike Jervis, a retail specialist at PwC, claims that in most of the cases of High Street shops bankruptcy, the owners overrated their business skills by creating too large chains and showing too little entrepreneurial activity together with a very scarce and rather poor analysis of the market (Mathew, 2013).

However, the situation with the High Street banks and shops can also be viewed as a result of extremely poor leadership strategies having been put to work.

One of the possible solutions to the High Street crisis, which is still an issue in the United Kingdom and whose destructive activities still continue to ruin the realm of the British entrepreneurship and is a major obstacle to all kinds of private business initiatives, is a change of the leadership strategy.

Taking a closer look at the current leadership strategy, which still remains the most popular means to exercise the control over smaller businesses, one can spot the inconsistencies and offer a more efficient manner of leading the High Street banks and shops.

It seems that over the past few years, the key strategies that the major banks and shops used to control smaller ones can be referred to as laissez-faire, i.e., the greater businesses offered the smaller ones much more space for their operations than these smaller enterprises actually needed.

Therefore, being handed too much freedom and taking the entire attention of the state, the media and the clientele, the smaller retail sectors and less trustworthy banks managed to put the entire High Street out of business.

Though laissez-faire leadership style is typically considered a relatively good one, since it does not presuppose putting much pressure on the subordinates (Barman, 2009), it also prevents from taking control over the less influential rivals, which is exactly why the High Street banks and retail shops have failed to fight the crisis back.

Moreover, it is necessary to stress that a number of signs have been pointing to the possibility of a global crisis breaking out. A close consideration of these sigs could have helped prevent the deplorable state of affairs that the Western world is currently in; therefore, the least that one can do now it to consider the prerequisites of the High Street crisis in order to avoid similar instances in the future.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Do We Have a Crisis in the High Street? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More When it comes to considering the pivoting point at which the High Street decline started, one will see inevitably that tracking back the reasons is not that easy.

As Sky News report, “A combination of factors – from the consumer spending squeeze to poor business models – is being blamed” (Sky News, 2013); however, this is as far as the research gets. In hard attempts to unbundle the tie of problems, which the High Street has had to face, the authorities are simply unable to define what the current problems have started from.

Like any other crisis, the High Street problem is not going to vanish without a trace. Supposedly, the crisis is going to be dealt with quite soon; however, its aftermath will still have a great effect on the world economy. Since the HIGH Street chains of stores and supermarkets are closing down, a steep rise in unemployment rates is expected.

In their turn, high unemployment rates are going to cause people’s anxiety concerning their own safety, as well as the safety of their investments. As a result, people might withdraw investments from their bank accounts to invest their money into something more stable. Hence, the fall of the state currency becomes a rather tangible threat, together with serious issues in currency exchange sphere.

The above-mentioned chain of events is likely to lead to United Kingdom losing its authority and, therefore, becoming a less influential state. The given change will, doubtlessly result in the change of the government policies and even worse financial state of affairs. Even though the given prognosis is extremely gloomy, the changes of such kind are anticipated, according to what the recent news says.

Even though, as it has been mentioned above, crises are a natural and inevitable element of economic development and that every crisis will someday be followed by another stage of economic growth, it is highly advisable that the UK government should take the matters in their own hands and consider the possible ways of cutting the corners to boosting the economical development.

At present, there are many ways to improve the current state of affairs, including the changes in the foreign and domestic policy, state economics and financial affairs. Nevertheless, not all of these steps can be considered reasonable and, which is even more important, long-lasting.

There is no need to stress the importance of searching for the solution to the current crisis. The apprehension that the mass media spreads in the United Kingdom might be considered a touch far-fetched, yet there are undeniable pieces of evidence to the regress of the UK economics due to the effects that the given crisis is going to have on the United Kingdom. At present, slight changes in the current economic policy can be suggested.

According to Sunderland (2010), the chance for the Great Britain to re-launch the High Street chain efficiently is to introduce bonus structures so that the central banks could take control over less trustworthy “bubbles” once again and reclaim their position in the modern business environment: “High on the agenda is reform of “warped” bonus structures with the aim of “making banking boring once more” (Sunderland, 2010).

Therefore, it can be concluded that Lyons’s article offers a very harsh yet well-justified perspective on what awaits the United Kingdom unless the proper leadership strategies are designed to restore the High Street banks and retail shops, at the same time providing the foil from smaller enterprises to develop.

Though Lyons does not offer many comments on what Cable says, it still has a very strong and long-lasting impact on the reader. The key reason for the article to stay in mind for so long is that Lyons uses his commentaries very wisely.

For example, the article opens with a shocking statistics concerning 20,000 people losing their jobs due to the HIGH Street crisis, which is immediately followed by Cable’s optimistic “The High Street is not in “crisis” despite the collapse of big-name shop chains, Business Secretary Vince Cable insisted today” (Lyons, 2013).

Therefore, it can be concluded that the High Street is not only facing crisis at the moment, but also has suffered a considerable amount of the crisis consequences, in contrast to what Cable says.

In fact, Lyons (2013) makes it very clear that Cable’s statement is far from being trustworthy; every single element in the article, starting from the sarcastic “Cable fables” rhyme to the acid commentaries to Cable’s quotes, almost screams about it.

It might be argued, however, that the article also has its flaws; for example, it is clear that Lyons (2013) could have done better than merely providing the readers excerpts from Cable’s speech and supplying his color commentaries to these quotes.

However, the given approach can be considered a stylistic approach that helps get the satirical tone of the article across and open the readers’ eyes on what is happening in the High Street. To Lyons’s credit, he succeeds in this task.

Because of the crisis, a number of banks have gone bankrupt, and the threat of an economic catastrophe has shaken entire Europe. Though one might argue that the bank owners were to blame for their own misfortune, the consequences are still very real, with people losing their jobs, banks going out of business and sterling dropping to the unspeakable $ 1.51 in February (Inman, 2013).

High Street crisis is real, and the best thing that people can do is acknowledge its existence and start searching for the solutions. An important lesson in currency exchange business, this experience has definitely left a mark on the UK economy.

Reference List Barman, K. 2009, Leadership management: achieving breakthroughs, Global India Publications, New Delhi.

Inman, P. 2013, ‘Pound falls to two-year low as currency markets lose faith in UK economy’, Guardian. Web.

Lyons, J. 2013, ‘Cable’s fables: High Street not in crisis, insists business secretary Vince Cable’, Mirror Money. Web.

Mathew, J. 2013, ‘High Street in crisis – but two new pound shops open every week’, International Business Times, 22 February. Web.

Sky News 2013, ‘High Street crisis: chain closures accelerating’, SkyNews. Web.

Sunderland, R. 2010, ‘Crisis economics: a crash course in the future of finance by Nouriel Roubini and Stephen Mihm’. Web.


The Walt Disney Company: Human Resource Strategy Exploratory Essay online essay help: online essay help

Introduction Founded in 1923, Walt Disney has grown to be the world’s largest animation company (Watts, 2013). From the humble beginnings of an entertainment company that started in the 20th century, Walt Disney has been able to develop a reputable brand in the family entertainment business.

Certainly, for more than nine decades, Disney World has been able to provide quality entertainment, not only for its customers in the US, but around the world as well. With its growing success, Walt Disney has become a multifaceted conglomerate that has developed deep roots in the entertainment industry.

The company has about five main business enterprises that include “media networks, parks and resorts, studio entertainment, consumer products and interactive media” (Watts, 2013, p. 5). The company’s niche has been on content innovation and the adoption, or introduction, of new technologies (Watts, 2013).

According to the vision of the company’s founder, Mr. Disney, most of the company’s activities have focused on fulfilling the vision of the founder, which is to position the company as a leader in the creation of “fun” entertainment (Johnson, 2011).

This paper provides a critical evaluation of the company’s activities by focusing on the structures and pillars of its human resource strategy. Through this analysis, the attraction of high quality employees, excellent customer service, and the focus on the company’s profitability surfaces as the main factors outlining the company’s human resource strategy.

These findings manifest through an understanding of how Walt Disney has been able to merge its human resource strategies with its business culture and values. Comprehensively, this paper explores the main pillars of Disney’s corporate culture and human resource strategy to establish the successes and failures of the company’s plan. However, first, this paper explores Walt Disney’s industry, competitors and key customers

Industry, Competitors, and Key Customers Walt Disney is an industry leader in the media industry. The company’s market share is strong, especially considering the fact that the company enjoys a significant market share in the movie, television, and theme park industries.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Considering Walt Disney is an entertainment industry, its main competitors are similar entertainment companies such as News Corporation, Time Warner Inc., and NBC Universal Media, LLC (Hoover’s Inc, 2013). Many researchers say Walt Disney has a strong competitive advantage because it has a strong growth potential and financial performance (Wall Street Journal, 2013).

For example, when comparing the financial performance of Walt Disney and Time Warner, both companies offer mild dividend yields of about 1.5% and 2% respectively, but Time Warner cannot match Disney’s ability to generate free cash through its diversified business segments (Wall Street Journal, 2013).

Nonetheless, Walt Disney experiences stiff competition in film production and network services because of the existence of other strong cable network companies (especially premium network companies such as HBO, which rate better than Walt Disney because its high subscription fees attracts more profits). CBS, Time Warner, and Viacom also pose equally stiff competition to Walt Disney.

Since there are many major communication and entertainment companies in the industry that pose a stiff competition for Walt Disney, a strong likelihood in the market will be price wars and increased product differentiation among the competitors.

Lastly, Walt Disney’s main target market appears to be children, but this is a wrong conceptualization of the company’s market scope because Walt Disney attempts to appeal to the entire family. Stated differently, Disney’s target market ranges from children, teenagers, and even adults.

The main criterion for defining Walt Disney’s main customer pool is therefore identifying anyone who has a “young heart.” Indeed, the criterion for defining Walt Disney’s main customers is enshrined the words of Disney’s founder, “You are dead if you aim only for children. Adults are only kids grown up, anyway” (Corrine, 2012, p. 142).

Human Resource Management Strategy Corporate Culture

Disney’s corporate culture stems from the core values that it shares among all its business segments. According to the company’s website, Disney Careers (2013) say, “Each of our company has a special ability to harness the imagination in a way that inspires others, improves lives across the world and brings hope, laughter and smiles to those who need it most” (p. 1).

We will write a custom Essay on The Walt Disney Company: Human Resource Strategy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Some of the core values that inform the culture of Walt Disney premises on innovation, quality, community partnerships, storytelling, optimism, and decency (Disney Careers, 2013). However, the main company values that stand out as the most significant values to the company’s human resource strategy include the values of optimism and innovation.

Attracting Human Capital

The first principle that informs Disney’s recruitment strategy is the conviction that the company should hire the best employees and give them adequate room to perform their duties (Watts, 2013). The exception to this rule is the understanding that the best employees are not necessarily the brightest or the smartest, but the best employees who demonstrate good aptitude for working in the company.

Walt Disney therefore considers a positive employee attitude as the first criterion for hiring new employees. Walt Disney offers the same significance for searching for internal talents as they do for searching for external talents (away from the organization).

When searching for external talent, Walt Disney appreciates the importance of embracing diversity as an important corporate value (Disney Careers, 2013). Walt Disney strives to ensure its employee pool reflects its global diversity. Certainly, among the most notable characteristic of Walt Disney’s recruitment strategy is the understanding that the human resource team needs to reflect the global diversity that informs its business.

Therefore, the company’s human resource team has a very diverse workforce that comes from different parts of the world. The company expects this diverse workforce to work in its different theme parks that are located around the world (Watts, 2013).

Consequently, Walt Disney boasts of having a diverse workforce that represents its global business. The company also demonstrates a strong commitment to incorporate diverse opinions and ideas to support its goal of upholding diversity.

Walt Disney believes that by embracing diversity, it mirrors the community that it serves. Therefore, the company may connect with its customers and guests better. Similarly, through this environment, the company may easily foster innovation and creativity throughout all functions of the company’s business.

Developing Human Capital

Hiring a new employee is only the first step of Disney’s human resource strategy. Training is the second step in this sequence because the company’s human resource team should provide newly hired employees with the best training, once they are hired.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Walt Disney Company: Human Resource Strategy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This type of training may occur in different forms, including classroom training and virtual training (Watts, 2013). Occasionally, the company also uses hands-on training. Regardless of the best methodology, Johnson (2011) explains that the company always gears its training process to align with the vision of the company.

Walt Disney also emphasizes greatly on the need for placing new employees in the correct departments for maximum use of their talents.

To realize this goal, the company has a three-month period where the company places new employees in new departments where the company evaluates their skills to ascertain if they meet the requirements for their departments (Watts, 2013). If not, the company moves the employees to another department within the company where their skill-set meets their talents.

The principle of allowing workers to choose their area of interest and suitability within the company is among Disney’s greatest strength because it helps the company to build trust and loyalty with the employees. Therefore, stated differently, Walt Disney gives its employees a second chance to redeem themselves, even if they fail to impress in their first attempt at working for the company.

Walt Disney therefore does not subscribe to the belief that if employees do not excel in one department, they are useless to the organization. Instead, the company finds another area where the employee may be useful.

Retaining Human Capital

Walt Disney admits that it reports varying employee retention rates across different departments (Hodges, 2008). However, the company’s employee turnover rate is lower than the industry’s average.

Much of the company’s commendable employee retention rates stem from the company’s commitment to provide a supportive work environment for the employees and its commitment to provide every employee with sufficient knowledge resources. The provision of knowledge resources is part of the company’s employee empowerment plan.

Walt Disney exudes a strong commitment to empower its employees so that they can exceed the expectations of their customers (Watts, 2013). This commitment premises on the understanding that customer loyalty grows where there is high quality customer services. Walt Disney believes that every employee may offer customers a “special service” that they will value about the company (Lamb, 2008).

This is especially important in making the customers have a special and exceptional experience with the company. If customers show discontent with their experience at the company, Disney authorizes its employees to give monetary compensation to the customers (Johnson, 2011).

Most companies do not accord their employees this type of privilege. Therefore, many employees of Walt Disney feel privileged to work under such conditions. This positivity improves the company’s employee retention rate.

Albeit every manager is supposed to be sensitive about the concerns of their employees, special groups of managers (service managers) ensure employees have a good experience with the company (Hodges, 2008).

Part of the role of a service manager is to avail the company’s products and services for the employees to enjoy whenever they are not working. Comprehensively, Walt Disney strives to ensure their employees have a good experience when working for the company. This commitment improves the company’s employee retention rate.

Weaknesses of the HRM Strategy

Despite the positive acclamations made about Walt Disney’s human resource strategy, the company has failed to register a high employee retention rate. Johnson (2011) blames the inability of Walt Disney to have a high employee retention rate to the weaknesses of the company’s HRM team.

While the company believes that having a positive attitude is the best criterion for evaluating employee suitability for Walt Disney, the company expects its employees to exude the same attitude, even when the workload is overbearing, or when the employees meet overbearing customers.

This may be a difficult demand for the employees because they are human and not machines that may maintain a positive attitude every day. The demand that the employees should demonstrate a positive attitude always may therefore be too demanding for some employees.

Conclusion After weighing the findings of this paper, it is correct, to say that Walt Disney’s human resource strategy stems from the commitment by the company’s founder to employ the most positively driven employees to work in the company. This direction explains why Walt Disney does not consider talent as its first criterion for hiring new employees.

Instead, the company values an employee’s commitment as the first criterion for hiring new employees. Therefore, prospective employees who demonstrate a positive attitude to work have a higher possibility of getting a job at the multibillion-dollar company.

Indeed, Mr. Disney firmly believed that a positive employee attitude would be a very crucial component for ensuring that the company provided innovative and entertaining content to its customers. This strategy has worked successfully for the company.

Considering Walt Disney’s culture hinges on the virtues of diversity, optimism, and innovation, Disney has done a good job in merging its human resource strategy to reflect these values. Indeed, its human resource strategy demonstrates a strong willingness to recruit talents from diverse backgrounds, recruit employees who are highly optimistic about the company, and recruit highly innovative employees.

The company’s commitment to empower its workers through training and flexible skill transfer supports this strategy. Other companies can borrow from Disney’s successful human resource strategy by taking good care of their employees and nurturing employee talent.

References Corrine, J. (2012). Finding Your Piece: 32 Principles to Help You Live Your Calling. New York: Balboa Press.

Disney Careers. (2013). Culture


Similes Conceptualization in Education Synthesis Essay essay help

Concept “Similes” pre-teaching conceptualization will combine language and creativity; it will also focus on the definition and nature of similes together with their use as figures of speech for students in grade 6-7. The learning process will ensure the students gain a wide perspective of similes and their meanings together with their use in language. Students will also get to know the use of conjunctions “like” and “as” used in similes.

They will learn how to differentiate similes from other forms of figurative language such as metaphors. Learning similes can be difficult for a number of students but this can be simplified by use of activities that create fun and involve the whole class.

In order for learning to be considered meaningful, it should be active, constructive, intentional and metacognitive. The activities in this unit will not only fall under the above learning processes but also on different levels of Bloom’s cognitive taxonomy. Below are examples of the different levels together with their objectives.

Knowledge– students will be able to give examples of similes. They will also identify similes from the stories I read during class work. This will demonstrate their ability to understand the use of similes in texts. For example, he is as fast as a cheetah used in a story to emphasize the speed at which an activity was carried out.

Comprehension– students will be able to state what similes are. Here, they will be required to identify the underlying difference between similes and other figures of speech. For example, the major difference between a simile and other figures of speech is that as simile utilizes “like” and “as” in drawing comparisons.

Application – students will be able to display a probable use of similes in speech. This will involve dividing them into groups where they will engage in activities that will enable them identify similes used in poems and books. They will also write their own similes and further show the use of similes in poems. For example, a simile is used to enhance meaning of the text.

Analysis – students will be able to discuss how to use similes in stories and poems. For example, how a simile can be used to enhance the theme of a poem. They will also discuss what makes the simile suitable in bringing out meaning according to the context of the poem. For example he ran a fast as lighting emphasizes on speed thus this simile will be suitable in emphasizing the aspect of speed in the poem.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Synthesis – students will be able to form their own similes. In groups they will write down similes based on a list of words that I will provide. For example they will form similes from the words; hare, chameleon, cheetah. Then a simile with the word “cheetah” will read- At the sound of the gun shots John ran as fast as a cheetah.

Evaluation – students will portray what they have learnt in both oral and written forms independently. Each student will write a poem using similes. For example a student will compose a poem using a simile as the title of the poem.

Structure I will have a book from which I will read a story that is “rich” in figurative language. Also, the students will be informed on what shall be learned for the next three weeks. They will also be divided into groups of 4-5 that will be used for different tasks in the course of the unit.

Day 1

An introduction to unit: I will offer a definition of the word “simile” as a figure of speech used to compare two nouns by utilizing the words “like” or “as”. As outlined in the anticipatory set.

Day 2

Identification of similes-They will be able to know similes that use “like” and give a few examples. For example, her face was like flames of fire when she got the bad news. The examples will be put into use during class activities at prior knowledge section.

Day 3

Identification of similes-They will learn how to use “as” in similes and give a few examples. For example, Peter is as wise as a hare. The examples will be put into use during class activities at prior knowledge section.

Day 4

Formulation of simile-Students will learn how to write similes without using “like” or “as” and how to differentiate these similes from metaphors. For example

We will write a custom Essay on Similes Conceptualization in Education specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More He is livelier than the choir (Simile).

She is an elephant in matters of law (Metaphor).

These examples will be put to use in the creativity section.

Day 5

Compose poem-Students will learn how to incorporate similes in writing poems and other types of literature. For example, I will give them a topic like “The last day in school” where I will direct them to use a number of similes in the poem. These examples will be put to use in the creativity section.

Prior Knowledge Students in grade 6-7 have some knowledge on figures of speech. To evaluate how much they know about similes, numerous group activities will be done. The first activity will involve the whole class. During the activity, I will read a script containing smiles and the students will shout “yes” once they have heard a simile. The one who gets it right will receive a clap from the rest of the students.

This activity will be a test for the students’ knowledge of similes. I will also avail examples of figures of speech and ask the students to classify them in their respective groups. For example, as fast as a cheetah is a simile while he is a cheetah when he runs is a metaphor.

Developmental Level According to Piaget’s levels of development, at this stage, children are under the concrete operational stage. During this stage, they can focus on matters happening in the external environment as well as analyze them logically. According to Piaget, teachers should incorporate learning activities that will enable the children learn by themselves through observation of concrete objects.

Since the development pace varies from child to child, I have outlaid varying kind of assignments that will suit his or her development. The children will compose assignments similar to the matters that often surround them. During this they will correlate their similes with what they have learnt.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Similes Conceptualization in Education by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The children will also compare the events that happen in the class environment to those of the external environment and indicate their satisfaction.

For example a student may identify a sport that is easy to him and then go ahead to compare it to the lesson activity that they find equally easy. For instance, a student who considers football an easy sport may formulate a simile that goes, “Learning similes is as easy as playing football’.

Anticipatory Set This is a continuation of the knowledge acquired from the prior knowledge section. Initially, I will try to establish how much the students know about figures of speech basing on their classification at the prior knowledge section. In case their knowledge on the topic is not sufficient, we will carry out a review before introducing the new concept.

Students will be required to classify figures of speech in their categories and provide reasons for this classification. For example they should tell me she is a cheetah when she runs is a metaphor since it involves an indirect comparison of two nouns. Later, I will introduce them to another figure of speech: smiles.

I then tell them similes are figures of speech that draws comparison between two nouns by utilizing the conjunctions “as” or “like”. Students will be asked if they know more about similes and the answers will be recorded for comparison by the end of the unit.

I will ensure that each student understands the various categories of smiles and how the similes are applied in varying situations. I will also tell the class of the projects I have in mind like simile construction and composition of poems.

By the end of the sub-section, the children will be assigned to write down similes and identify a number of poems that utilize similes. They will be required to differentiate a simile from a metaphor. For example, I will ensure they clearly differentiate between metaphors and smiles.

This will be shown by clearly displayed examples such as “life is a journey”. Here, the children should be in a position to differentiate the use of the metaphor from the simile; “life is like a journey”.

Motivation There are a number of learning theories that endeavour to explain the reason as to why some things are learnt and not others. Motivation is thus directly linked to these theories. Learning theories define the most effective means through which learning materials can be delivered to learners. This involves combining a number of approaches as there is no single method that is sufficient to motivate students.

Motivation has a direct link and a great significance in enhancing learning. There are two forms of motivation: intrinsic motivation and extrinsic motivation. The former is a form of motivation that comes from within but the latter is a form of motivation that comes from without.

The cognitive theory integrates both form of motivation. It is assumed that we either take action as a result of intrinsic motivation or it is a function of both.

By giving examples of similes that relate to real life situations, the students can connect well with the topic at hand. For example a student can say life is as hard as granite. Another way that I will use to motivate students is by ensuring that the learning process is as participatory as possible.

Motivation also enhances confidence. The students can participate both in class and in group work because they know that even if they are wrong they will be corrected gently. I hold the view that the group exercise is a significant motivator to my students. I believe that rewarding best performing individuals or groups is a great motivator too, and I will also deliver punishment if need be since I do not tolerate improper behavior in class.

I also believe in giving feedback to my students in regard to their assignments, this way they can understand what is right and maintain it or what they did wrongly and correct it. I will reward the student who gives the largest number of similes by offering lunch on the last day of the unit.

The greatest motivation for this unit will be that the student who writes the best poem will present it to the whole school during the school’s annual general meeting.

Discovery These children will be working on activities that will enable them discover the figurative use of language. Through formulation of smiles, they will discover how language can be creatively used in communication It will be more interesting if the children can form smiles by themselves.

Discovery occurs in the process of development. To help the children discover their abilities, the children will be issued with various poetic books and aided to read and understand the smiles contained in the books. For example a student will identify how a simile has been used to enhance the meaning of a poem. Additionally, the students will participate in discussion sessions that will enhance the use of smiles.

During the sessions, the children will be asked to apply the learnt smiles in their conversations. Afterwards, the children will formulate smiles in their own words depending on the environments they are interacting with.

This will be essential in approving the discovery of the students. For example, a learner may compare the poetic material with other study materials. This may involve use of a smiles like; “I wish all the learning materials were as interesting as poetry books”.

Creativity I believe that students learn best when they enjoy what they are doing. Theoretical approaches tend to be monotonous and boring. In an effort to create an active learning environment, I have designed a number of activities that will make learning similes more interesting. By incorporating participatory learning, the students will feel they are a part of the lesson and thereby concentrate, enjoy the lesson and learn more.

I believe that it is the teacher’s responsibility to create interest in the students. I have included a fun activity where by the students will be provided with fruits and vegetables which they will use in the practice of writing similes. For example one student in a group will hold an orange then the rest will write a simile about an orange in his or her composition book which I will later mark and give a feedback.

For example a student will write the simile your face is as round as an orange. The learning activities that I have used in this unit make the learning experience more interactive and memorable.

Creativity in this concept is made better by allowing the students compose similes poems and participating in group work. They can then extend their studies to other forms of figurative language based on the knowledge they have received on similes.

Exceptionality This occurs at two levels. In a class set up, there are students who have extremely high intellectual levels. Additionally, there are those who have very low intellectual levels. This requires the teacher to be sensitive enough to enhance sufficient development in both levels.

In an effort to ensure the lesson activities addresses the needs of all the students, I will adopt a number of modifications while at the same time organize additional activities for the slow learners and fast learners respectively. For the slow learners I will go an extra mile to provide the meaning of the vocabularies together with their attributes were necessary.

Providing these meanings will ensure that the students are able to easily figure out how the comparison between the two nouns used in the simile is arrived at. For example using a simile like he is as black as tar, I will define the key vocabularies which are black and tar. I will define black as a dark color and tar as a substance that is usually black in color which is obtained from organic material.

An understanding of the definition of black and tar together with its attribute will enable the student understand how the comparison between the two nouns was arrived at. That is, the two nouns share an attribute of darkness. This knowledge will be useful to them when it comes to simile construction.

I will also work with volunteers who will be required to summarize and reinforce the day’s lesson activities at the end of the lesson. The volunteers are mainly the fast learners who will help the slow learners remember what has been taught.

For instance, the volunteers will redefine similes, offer a few examples of similes and explain their use in literary compositions like poems. The volunteers aim is to help the slow learners understand the lesson all over again while at the same time reinforcing the main points.

I will also moderate the amount of work by giving them a task at a time. This way they will be able to work on their assignments without feeling pressurized.

For example, I will ask them to identify similes, after they have identified, I will ask them to explain meaning and so on. This way they will be able to exhaustively explore one area of study before moving to the next. This way, they will eventually understand the whole topic at their own pace.

The fast learners will be allowed to work ahead in the text book on the same topic of study provided it is at their own pace. For example they can look at other figures of speech like metaphors and establish how they differ from similes. For example they can establish that a metaphor does not use “like” or “as” in drawing comparison between two nouns.

They can also work on similes but at a greater depth for example they can identify longer and more complex similes and later share their findings with the rest of the class or in their groups. For example they can identify a simile like “Death has affected me many times; it was like the invisible salt in the waves”. They will then establish the indirect comparison of death to the invisible salt in the waves.

Measurement and Evaluation Grading of this concept will be based on the group assignments that involved composition of poems and similes. The literary compositions will be graded basing on imaginative and creative use of language. I will expect the students to showcase a mastery of skills since throughout the unit; they have handled several tasks on the topic.

The test for the learners will be on the various aspects learnt throughout the course. An emphasis will be laid upon development at various stages of the course. For example, learners will be tested and graded according to their ability to complete simile sentences, retrieve smiles from poems, form smiles from metaphors and compose poems. Other parts will include figurative speeches and grammar use.

The group project of composing poems will be graded by the end of the unit. Students who perform well in their compositions by submitting poems that follow the rules of poetry composition will receive a higher credit. For example the students will be required to submit a poem in which a simile has been used.

There are those who will incorporate similes in their compositions while others will use similes as titles of their poems. The evaluation will be dependent on the fact that they adhered to instructions (showing the use of the simile in delivering the general message of the text).

Analysis Students will take one formal test at the end of the unit that will cover the definition and nature of similes, examples and their use in speech. For analysis, each student will write a descriptive essay on similes that will assess their mastery of this topic. Group work will also be considered in which each group will submit a written assignment on a composed poem.

I will check on creativity, spelling, grammar and the use of figurative language. Each student will be expected to provide a sentence for the poem and he or she must incorporate similes in his or her poem. For example one student can start with this line, – At the sound of the gun short John ran as fast as a cheetah. Then the rest add up to this to make a poem which addresses the thematic concern of speed.

They will then choose one of them who will present the findings to the whole class. Students will also receive marks for group work. The final grade will depend on the two assignments plus a final formal test. My satisfaction on their understanding will depend on whether a better part of the class can write their own similes and apply the same knowledge in writing poems appropriately.

Application and Transfer Here the students will be required to integrate the concepts they have learnt with other fields. The learners will thus apply the knowledge acquired to other subjects.

This knowledge will be easily transferable to subjects such as music. They will be in position to write songs with figurative language as learned during the studies. For example, the written poems can be sung.

The unit can also be transferred to Art if the students are asked to draw or color objects that describe similes. For example a student can draw a rose flower, color it red, and write a simile. This will be read as follows “she wore a blouse that was as red as a rose flower.


The Role of Government Failure in Policy Analysis Exploratory Essay custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Government Failures as Precursors for Policy Analysis

The Effect of Government Failures on Different Subject Areas



Introduction Government failure by definion is the inability of a government or government agencies to achieve their goals and outcomes (Dollery and Wallis, p. 4). According to Dollery and Wallis (1997), there are three types of government failure, i.e. Legislative Failure, Bureaucratic Failure, and Rent-Seeking.

Weisbrod (1978), on his part, has a broader view of government failure, arguing that government failure should be looked at from 4 different levels, i.e legislative, administrative, judicial, and enforcement failure (Dollery and Wallis, 1997, p. 4).

Regardless of the form, government failure has been found to have a significant impact on policy analysis and the following paper will thus seek to analyze government failure and the role it plays in policy analysis in various areas.

Government Failures as Precursors for Policy Analysis According to Dollery (1997), government failure forms an integral part of the lexicon of modern policy analysis. Vining (2007, p. 156) supports this viewpoint, noting that public policy is as informed by an understanding of government failure as it is by market failure because the collective choices made by government organs have the potential not to promote social values in desired and predictable ways.

From a market theory perspective, Riley (2012) further argues that government failure is the best way of finding out what the consumer preferences are and then, based on these preferences, finding out how many among them are willing and able to pay for particular goods and services. As such, the success of the policy can be gauged.

The most important reason for using government failure as a precursor for policy analysis, however, is the fact that governments often opt to embark on projects when they do not have sufficient information that is needed for a proper cost-benefit analysis, many times leading to misguided policies with negative ramifications (Riley, 2012).

There have been several examples of failed government housing policies in the West in the last few years, for instance, and such failures must form the foundation for policy analysis to help prevent similar policy failures by goverments in future.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Effect of Government Failures on Different Subject Areas The effect of government failures on different subject areas is similar, with the most common thread being the fact that the effects are long term and far-reaching. This is because government policies are wide-reaching/ all encompassing spanning a large geographical scope and affecting a vast amount of people, a lot of times the entire population of a country (Byrnes, Dollery and Wallis 2011).

Housing and Transport, for instance, are different sectors yet the policies develped decades ago that regulate them have produced long term effects that are being felt today. The UK’s transport network has been facing long- term challenges due to poor long-term planning just as the housing sector in the US has suffered due to lack of foresight in policy- making.

Additionally, government failure has the same negative effect on both market and non market economies. In a non-market economy such as the Soviet Union, the market collapsed in the late ‘80s and early ‘90s due to poor policeis as did the US economy during the Great Depression in the 1930’s and the recent recession in 2007 due to the failed housing policy (Riley, 2012).

In both examples, a lot of people were affected and the effects were felt in the long term, not the short term.

Conclusion Government failures, while damaging and unfortunate, are not the end of the world. They provide the opportunity for lessons to be learnt so that better, more flexible and adaptable policies are developed for the future. Government failures should thus act as the precursor for policy analysts when developing new policies so as to ensure that they do not make the same mistakes of their failed predecesors.

References Byrnes, J., Dollery, B., and Wallis, J. (2001). Local Government Failure In Australia: An Empirical Analysis Of New South Wales. Retrieved from

Riley, G. (2012). Government Failure – Introduction. Tutor2u. Retrieved from

We will write a custom Essay on The Role of Government Failure in Policy Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Vining, D., Weimer, L., and Aidan, R. (2007). Policy Analysis for Capella University, 5th Edition. USA: Pearson Learning Solutions.


First World War and Germany Analytical Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Roger Chickering examines the comprehensive effects of the World War I on imperial Germany. The author is of the view that the war affected every person in society, irrespective of gender, age, educational background, race and religious affiliation. The book evaluates the role of the military in perpetuating the conflicts, the diplomatic aspects, governmental role, the politics, and the industrial sector.

In particular, the author is more concerned with giving the effects of the war on the German people, unlike other authors who generalize the effects of the war. In this regard, the author reports that the persistent effect of the total war on the underprivileged and the rich was massive. It affected both male and female members of society, the elderly and the youth, farmers and the city-dwellers, Catholics, Protestants, and the Jews.

The book analyzes the role of the military in any war. It states that the war affected the socio-economic and political structures of Germany more than it did in other countries. The first chapter talks about the period in which the war started (The war begins). In the first chapter, the author gives the immediate cause of the war whereby he compares the war with the modern day terrorism that is sponsored by the state.

It started with the shooting of Francis Ferdinand when he had visited Serbia. The incident surprised many in Europe since the Serbia government had been accused of being involved in the death of the heir to throne.

In subsequent subsection, he talks about the spirit of 1914 whereby he notes that the drama and the extravagant expectations of war lent almost mystical status to the spirit of 1914 (Chickering 15). Under the plan section, the author notes that the war was well planned, with many soldiers believing that Germany was superior to other nations, having crashed the French troops in the 1870-71 war.

The second chapter (The war continues) talks about the dynamics of the war as it progressed to the dangerous zones. The author looks at the role of bureaucratic institutions and the industrial sector in propagating the war. From this chapter, it is established that the war could not have achieved its objectives at the start without the support the bureaucrats and the wealthy businesspersons.

The business community provided adequate funds for feeding and paying soldiers while the bureaucrats offered technical support, as well as morale. In the third chapter (The war grows total), the author reports that the war was no longer under the control of the Germany government since it had attracted the attention of other players in the international system.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In 1916, the land campaigns were instituted whereby other races were expected to surrender land to the Germans. This was made possible through Hindenburg policies. At the same time, German troops occupied various parts of Europe while some soldiers took the war to sea. The fourth chapter (The war embraces all), observes how other groups in society, including women and the elderly, were forced to join the war.

At this stage, even the owners of the means of production felt the effects of the war. The fifth chapter (The War breeds discord) proves that the war had become so expensive and costly to an extent that many people were in the process of surrendering. The sixth chapter (The war ends) reports that the German populace could no longer sustain the war hence they embraced peace.

Effects of the War on Germany at Mid War The author observes that the German empire is one of the empires that lost terribly in the First World War. Germany engaged in the conflict by declaring war on Serbia following the killing of the Austria-Hungary prince. German troops engaged the enemies on both eastern and western. However, the German territory was safe at start of the war.

At some point in 1914, the eastern part was invaded, but the enemies were defeated and the country continued to enjoy peace, even though its troops were at war abroad. Things changed in the winter of 1916-1917 when the British troops attacked several cities in Germany. Germany was faced with severe food shortages since the infrastructure was badly destroyed.

The 1916-1917 winter, also referred to as turnip winter, was the trying moment for the people of Germany since many individuals went for days without food. In 1916, there were two major battles on the western front, which weakened the capability of Germany. The battle at Verdun and Somme had tremendous effects to the Germany since it lost many soldiers and resources fighting the war that it never succeeded.

Germany lost an approximated two-hundred and eighty thousand soldiers at Verdun while an approximated six-hundred thousand soldiers lost their lives at Somme. The loss of soldiers at the two battlefronts demoralized the German people and solders.

In 1917, the German morale was declining since the number of solders lost could not be explained. The country suffered from inadequate work force since few people were willing to engage in war after realizing that it could not be won. At the home front, the war was unsustainable since enemies were attacking from all fronts.

We will write a custom Essay on First World War and Germany specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In the same year, Ludendorff claimed that Germany would launch a peace offensive in the west, but the plan was cut short since the allies were very strong. In 1916, the Hindenburg program encouraged people to contribute financially since the country was facing serious financial shortages.

Farmers were forced to give their horses to the military since the supplies from Russia and Austria could not reach the country. In the middle of the war, the British launched an offensive that incapacitated Germany in terms of food supply. The economy of the country went down to an extent that it simply depended on the wealthy for the production of weapons.

With time, church materials were ripped out and would be melted to produce weapons. So many farmers and workers in various industries were transferred to the military, which affected the country’s food supply. The government was forced to come up with a feeding program that would help the poor who could not afford the basic needs.

In Europe, a number of countries faced challenges, as the war progressed since the number of soldiers killed was shocking. Each country, including France, Britain and Russia, lost troops in large numbers.

The war could no longer be sustained and many countries were of the view that the conflict had to be resolved peacefully. Just like in Germany, the populace in other countries was in strong opposition of the war since it affected their normal lives.

Works Cited Chickering, Roger. Imperial Germany and the Great War: 1914 – 1918. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005. Print.


The Comparison of Roman and Mongol Empires Essay (Critical Writing) argumentative essay help

Introduction Even though the Roman and the Mongol Empires were located in separate continents, they shared some elements in common. Similarities existed in terms of their organization, leadership and justice system among others.

Similarly, both empires were large; they covered large geographical areas with huge populations. In enhancing administration, both empires were divided into distinct territories, for instance, the Roman was divided into provinces whereas the Mongol was divided into four major divisions.

Though these empires had common similarities, they differed in their style of leadership. The Mongol embraced the monarchy whereas the Romans had a decentralized and democratic system of administration. Thus, due to the vastness of the two empires, internal problems such as; lacks of unity, economic and political and military turmoil were common, in fact, these problems contributed to their collapse.

Why Mongol was “Empires” rather than an “Empire” The vastness of the Mongol empire made it to be known as the “empires”. The empire had small empires within itself. It covered a contiguous land mass stretching as far as Eastern Europe, Central Asian, Middle East to Siberia, Iran and the Sea of Japan1.

Burbank and Cooper indicates that the total area covered by the empire was approximately 9,300,000 sq. miles which was equivalent to about 16% of the total earth surface. The empire had a population of about 100 million people2.

Characteristics of the Mongol and Roman Empire Organization

The Mongol empire was organized on Confucian ideas and education. By embracing Confucian ideas, the empire fixed creative ways of organizing its army. For example, to ensure efficiency in the army, the empire created divisions within depending on responsibilities and tasks to be completed.

Security was important for the its survival and conquest of new lands; hence, the empire established the Kheshing to address security issues in the whole empire3. Reward for the army for their loyalty to the empire was a policy. Promotions were awarded to loyal armies whereas those who failed to observe this virtue were dismissed or punished4.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Similarly, the Roman Empire had an organized system anchored on classical learning and the Roman law. They had astute army which was organized in ranks. Roman law was an order to be followed by all in the empire.

Road System

The Mongol empire had an elaborate road network. The roads spawned across the empire linking the entire empire to the outside world. Of great importance was the Silk Road5. Silk road supported the economy of the whole empire and was important in the transportation of porcelain, silk and tea to the outside world.

Romans also had an elaborate road system that connected Rome to the rest of the empire. The road system was vital; it simplified movement of the army and connected the empire to major trade routes in the region. The roads were paved, thus, lasted for many thousand years.

Differences among the Empires Religion

Religious beliefs were perhaps the major distinction between the two empires. While the Romans practiced Christianity, the Mongols embraced the doctrines of Confucius. Religion ultimately influenced future beliefs and decisions of leaders in both empires.

Justice System

The Mongol empire had an organized justice system. They had a supreme judge in charge of keeping records of the empire. Besides, the justice system was responsible for implementing and enforcing army, food and family laws. The common code of law in the empire was the “issue”6.

In some occasions, the law was applied partially among the ruled. The “issue” allowed thorough screening of army generals based on their performance. The law prohibited vandalism and thievery; however, it was tolerant on religious views.

On the other hand, the Romans had a unique justice system. They had a law that spelt a distinction between human beings. The “ law of persons” as it was known, granted restrictive rights to men in regard to acquiring citizenship, voting and vying for public posts.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on The Comparison of Roman and Mongol Empires specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Slaves and other citizens who had stayed in the empire and had no forms of identification were given partial rights; however, legal protection was a priority among other privileges.

Control and economy

Trade was at the heart of Mongol empire. They traded in tea, silk and porcelain. To enhance trade, the empire developed silk roads and expanded ports such as the Fuzhou and Guangzhou. Similarly, trade was increased to cover parts of India, Arabia and Persia territories. Trading activities increased contacts between the Mongols and the Western and Arab world.

On the other hand, agriculture was widely practiced in the Roman Empire. It was mechanized, for instance, mills were found in places such as Rome to grind wheat. Also, long distance trade was widely practiced, in later centuries, participation in this form of trade was reduced.

Geography The Mongol empire spanned across territories that included the Yellow Sea to Eastern Europe. It also covered Korea, Armenia, Persia, China, Mongolia, Thailand, Burma and Vietnam among other areas. These regions were covered by mountains, forests, rugged landscapes and waters.

The vastness of the Mongol was replicated in the Roman Empire; the empire was very large and it was characterized with terrains, seas and oceans. Charles indicates that the total area covered by the empire was

approximately 5 million square kilometers7. The empire had about 50 to 60 million people equivalent to about 1/6 of the world population.

Divisions of Territories The Romans Empire was divided into provinces for administrative purposes. Outside the Roman Empire, the provinces and territorial units remained the administrative units of the empire. Different forms of provinces existed. One of these was the imperial provinces. Imperial provinces were newly conquered territories found along the borders. Another province was the senatorial province.

The senatorial province was established along the borders. Because the Romans had control of these provinces for a longer period, they were known for being stable and peaceful. Similarly, the Mongol empire was divided into four major divisions.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Comparison of Roman and Mongol Empires by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The II-Khanate covered parts of the Middle East and Asia, the Great Khan covered parts of the Far East, Russia and China, Chagadai Khanate was predominant in Ventral Asia and the Blue Horde was found in Southern Siberia and Kazakhstan

Expansion The Mongols expanded their territories through conquest. Charles indicates that the Mongols conquest contributed to its expansion in North China and present day Iran8. During their conquest, they waged war leading to many deaths. The same strategy was also employed by the Romans. The Roman Empire used military to expand to new lands.

According to the circumstances, the military carried out direct conquest or the empire encouraged the friendly kingdoms in strategic buffer zones to yield into their demands in return for security along their borders. Also, the Romans used the annexation strategy. The Romans annexed empires that were friendly in return for protection.

Forms of Administration The Mongol empire was marked by true unit of unification. Hence, the centralization of authority consolidated power of the empire and made expansion into new lands easier. Liebeschuetz indicates that the central leadership understood the importance of a strong alliance because it eliminated threats to the authority and influenced other friendly empires in the region9.

On the other hand, the Roman Empire had a decentralized form of administration. The empire was governed through its cities10. Hence, each city strove to establish personal power and authority based on their emperors, rather than for the whole empire.

Style of Leadership The Mongol leadership was tribal anchored on family ties and chieftain. With Genghis Khan taking the throne, the clans merged under his leadership becoming a universal ruler. In a nutshell, Liebeschuetz shows that the Mongol leadership was monarchical. It was absolute in nature with the Mongol ruler being given the mandate to protect his people11.

On the other hand, the Roman had a democratic form of leadership. The people elected the senate which ruled for life. The senate was mostly made up of wealthy and members from aristocratic families. New senators were selected to replace who died while in office. Thus, the participation of the people in electing the office holders was a sign of democracy in the empire.

Population According to Liebeschuetz, the Mongol Empire was large. It was approximated to consist of about 100 million people. The population was organized along tribal lines, spanning across Siberia, China, Mongolia, Persia and Korea among other areas. The population was diverse, comprising of people from various regions such as the Koreans, Europeans, Chinese and Indians among others.

Also, the Roman Empire had a considerably higher population. The population was about 50 to 60 million people from various cultural and racial backgrounds. In North-West Europe region were Europeans, in the Near East were people of Asian origin while in the Mediterranean were mainly Africans from North Africa.

Stability of the Empires Despite covering large areas, both empires had a series of problems which hampered efficient administration. These problems resulted in the instability of the empires. One of the problems experienced by the empires was the political and military turmoil. Because of the vastness of the empires, the military in both cases was in disarray.

Rather than giving their allegiance to the central authority, they opted to follow the commands given by their immediate commanders who fought alongside them. For example, the Romans permitted foreign armies to fight for them in return for money.

While they could accept meager pay than the local army, they had less commitment and loyalty to the empire. Moreover, the loyalty which had developed among the citizens also weakened. In the past, both empires cared so deeply about its population.

Lack of unity was also a major problem of the two empires. Because of their hugeness, efficient skills of administration and organizing the entire empire was a challenge. For example, despite being resolute fighters, Mongols had insufficient administration skills.

They entrusted administration to outsiders who had little loyalty to the empire12. What is more, inept and corrupt in the administration often contributed to rebellions in some parts of the empire.

Rebellions had some repercussions for the empire because it made the empire lose the control of the newly conquered lands. With a decentralized administration, Romans problems were even more. Decentralization hampered the consolidation of power in the whole empire.

Though the Mongol empire had a strong economy supported by trading activities, the Roman economy was weak. The hostile tribes, the pirates along the coastal cities disrupted trade. Besides, the scarcity of gold and silver led to inflation because these resources were needed for minting money.

Other problems included raising the taxes. High taxes created a burden to the people. Also, the agricultural sector experienced more problems. Yields in various parts of the empire were increasingly low, coupled with years of war which destroyed agricultural lands, a series of food shortages and population decline was the order of the day.

Bibliography Allsen, Thomas T. Mongol Imperialism: The Policies of the Grand Qan Möngke in China, Russia, and the Islamic Lands, 1251-1259.Carlifornia: University of California Press, 1987.

Bradley, Keith. Slavery and Society at Rome. London: Cambridge University Press, 1994.

Burbank, Jane, Cooper Frederick. Empires in world history: power and the politics of difference. New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 2010.

Burgan, Michael. Empire of the Mongols. New York: New York: Infobase Publishing, 2005

Halperin, Charles J. Russia and the Golden Horde: The Mongol Impact on Medieval Russian History. Indiana: Indiana University Press, 1985.

Wolfgang, Liebeschuetz.”The End of the Ancient City,” in The City in Late Antiquity. New York: Taylor


Neorealism: Kenneth Waltz ‘Theory of International Politics’ Research Paper scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction




Introduction A theory is a set of ideas which provide an explanation of something. Theories act as frameworks for guiding scholars and researchers in their work so as to avoid duplication of ideas or repeating the mistakes which were made by previous researchers or scholars.

In international relations, theories are used to explain the relationships between nations of the world. The theories look at the philosophies which shape the relationships between nations and the key interests of the nations which participate in international relations (Acharya


Social Media as Part of PR essay help free: essay help free

Table of Contents Introduction

Advantages of social media to an organization

Disadvantages of social media to an organization


Reference List

Introduction In marketing, the key function is to spread information from the organization to the public. The organization spreads information that could be of interest to the public and that could be useful to sell its products, services or brand name. This spread of information is what is referred to as public relations. The topics on which the organization informs the public about may not necessarily require direct payment.

Thus, payment is usually indirect. For instance, an organization can persuade the public to buy its product or services. Marketing may also be used to persuade people to trust a company’s leadership. The payment for public relations in this case would be increased number of people buying the company’s products, which increases its sales and profits simultaneously (Coombs, 2007).

Public relations could occur in various ways, like speaking at conferences, passing on the messages through media houses and through websites. Over the recent years, social media has also increasingly become a part of media by companies. Communication has become easy due to technology (Newson, Houghton


Overview of qualities and standards of global employment Case Study best college essay help

The challenges and opportunities associated with overseas positions are as follows: the cultural differences create the assimilation process somewhat lengthy; the expectations of the management personnel, as well as employees, are in high regard, according to the increase of the company’s production or output.

The opportunities are based on the contribution of knowledge and acquisition of unique set of skills that the new setting will provide but also, on the changes that can be implemented on social and individual levels. The problem of the cultural difference is one of the major ones, as the person has to learn the traditions of intricate beliefs of the society.

Usually, people are involved within the norms from very young age and are able to learn and absorb the rules and regularities of society over a long amount of time. The fact that an employee from another part of the world has little time to study the unique culture creates a stress and constraints on the abilities to get familiarized with the society.

The expectations are on the highest level, as the person invited is considered knowledgeable and of high professionalism, as to conduct own mastery and management in the new setting. The process of increasing the company’s productivity and the development of the personal skills of employees is the goal of every superior and so, a close understanding on the organizational level is needed for success.

The opportunity to increase personal knowledge of the culture and understanding of the company politics creates an advantage for an international employee. The set up of new and more advanced techniques and process will ensure the prosperity and positive direction of the business.

The qualifications of a person coming abroad are very important for the way they will adopt to the new culture and vice versa. The employee must be very flexible in the transition, as to make it unnoticeable for the employees and other managers of the company. The local representatives, as well as customs and governments must be consulted, so that no ethically disrespectful behaviors are exhibited.

The employee and the company, including the social setting, must function as a unit, so that there are no disturbances in the normal activities of the worker’s and company’s work. An intellectual and responsible approach must be used by the employee, so that the trust and understanding of the new company is gained.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The social customs, traditions, religious values, business standards and other experiences must be analyzed in precision, in order to avoid any missing links and details. Also, the political and economical qualities of the nation or country must be studied, so that business technique and general morale of the country are well known and are used to an advantage.

If a business functions on an international level, the policies and procedures according to other countries must be studied as well. This creates an environment filled with learning and pressure, and the employee must be able to withstand the stress. Not only must the culture of one country and people be learned but also a number of different world views and norms.

So, the employee must have great attention to details and an ability to correctly interpret and use the information received. The overall qualities are related to hard work, determination and respect towards the people and the country (Plessis, 2010).

Reference Plessis, A. (2010). International human resource management: An overview of its effect on managers in global organisations. Interdisciplinary Journal Of Contemporary Research In Business, 2(4), 178-182.


The Trader Project: Project Management Case Study writing essay help: writing essay help

Introduction The major aim of all organisations is to provide vital goods or services to its clients. Organisations ensure that their activities benefit their stakeholders. Therefore, profit-making organisations must ensure that they generate profits without exploiting their customers. The complex nature of the activities of various organisations necessitates them to strive to improve their efficiency.

This enables an organisation to gain a competitive edge over its rivals. From time to time, organisations implement various initiatives that strive to improve their activities. Automation of various activities is one of the major strategies that companies use to improve their efficiency. However, a company has to take extreme care to ensure the successful implementation of various IT projects.

Efficient project management enables a company to implement the projects successfully. Some of the causes of failure of IT projects include lack of proper planning, poor leadership, and failure to anticipate various problems that may occur during the implementation of the project. The costs of implementing IT projects ranges from hundreds of thousands of dollars to millions of dollars.

Therefore, failure of IT projects may have devastating effects on a company. It may even lead to the collapse of a company. The Trader project faces some of the above problems. These problems led to the inflation of the budget of the project. In addition, they led to a significant delay in the completion of the project.

The Trader Project The Trader project strived to automate the activities of Barwest Bank. The aim of the project was to automate documentary letters of credit (LC) and Documentary Collections (DC). In addition, the project would lead to the automation of other financial transactions of the bank. Automation would reduce the operational costs of the company.

It would enable the company to reduce staffing in the Foreign Service Office (FSO) and Financial Services Branches (FSB) by 25%. The break-even of the automated system was only three years. This was due to its ability to increase the efficiency and reduce operational costs. The budget of the project was £1,000,000. However, the project exceeded its budget estimates.

In addition, the project did not follow its schedule. Implementation of the project lagged behind its schedule by several months. These problems increased the break-even period to six years. In fact, the system may not break-even after six years due to various factors that are beyond the control of the company.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Problems The Trader project faced various problems that hindered its implementation. The problems led to a significant increase in the budget of the project. However, most of the problems were avoidable. The problems that the project faced included:

Poor management and leadership styles

Poor project planning and control

Lack of efficient communication channels

Management and Leadership Styles The management and leadership style of a project determines the success of the project. Leaders should ensure that they motivate project members to achieve their objectives. The type of leadership or management style that leaders employ is usually dependent on the type of project. No leadership or management style is suitable in all types of projects (Jones, Steffy


The Health Authority-Abu Dhabi Report essay help online

The Health Authority-Abu Dhabi is a governmental regulatory body that is charged with the main responsibility of bringing sanity in the healthcare sector by ensuring that quality services are offered to the community. Its main function is to monitor the health status of the people and analyze the performance of various systems put in place.

Additionally, the agency has an overwhelming task when it comes to enforcing the standards, inspection of regulations, and enhancement of world class-class services. For all these to be achieved, the agency has to develop awareness programs to sensitize the population about their rights as far as healthcare is concerned.

Before the inception of HAAD, the healthcare sector lacked order and private service providers charged exorbitant prices on poor quality services that never aimed at improving the living conditions of people. Currently, the organization is supposed to ensure that payments and compensation rates of the health system in the region are fair and competitive. Recently, a new law was enacted to curb the increasing cases of fraud and malpractice in the healthcare system.

The latest act is expected to guard the benefits of all individuals in the system, as well as supporting the practical wellbeing of all members. Through the law, the private sector is in a position to develop, as it has the freedom of offering various services at different prices. On the other hand, it is mandatory for the employer to obtain health insurance treatment for its employees, including their families.

Each company in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi has no option but to follow the new law to the later and any organization found to have violated the law is subjected to punitive measures (Williamson, 2002). This paper will look at the causes of poor governance in the HAAD and will suggest some of the ways through which the organization might improve its performance.

HAAD should act as the custodian of the public good meaning that it has to look into the welfare of each interested party, including the service providers and their various clients. Unfortunately, the agency never paid any attention to one of the major articles in the amended version of the law and this led to the violation of the rights and the privileges of one party-the employers.

The chief executive officer of the agency issued a warning erroneously calling on all companies to renew their licenses with the insurance firms, as soon as possible since violators were to be dealt with according as cases would be filed against them in the courts of law. The CEO went on to set the amount that would be payable to the government upon violation of the new policy.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The circular generated a heated debate in various levels of government, as well among private organizations and companies because no consultations were made and implementation of the policy would lead to great losses. Organizations had already drafted their budgets and they faced challenges trying to cope with the new demands. Within no time, the president of the UAE had to intervene by cancelling the order and instructing the agency not to interfere with the performance of companies.

This was upon an extensive consultative meeting with the affected companies in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi. The owners of various companies were concerned with the short notice given in the middle of the year when they had already drafted their budgets meaning that they were going to register huge losses because of poor planning on the side of the agency (Kaen, 2003).

The chief executive of HAAD and the entire board could not sit down and come up with the best strategy to address the issue at hand because of various reasons, as discussed below. First, the country suffers from poor leadership where a leader of any organization or government agency tends to believe that he or she has unlimited powers to draft and implement a policy without proper consultation. Leaders employ a very poor leadership approach where they declare themselves the overall managers whose decisions are final.

It is unsurprising to note that a leader refers to the organization as “my company” or might sometimes use words such as “my governance attitude” to mean his or her leadership style. The board has always conducted its activities without involving other important stakeholders in policy formulation and decision-making and as such, it stays beyond accountability and undertakes its function in whatever way it likes (Duggal, 2013).

The appointment of the board members and directors raises several questions and it is one of the main problems explaining why the agency does not follow the law in executing its important functions.

For instance, the board single-handedly appoints senior managers of the agency, which means that the process of recruitment does not abide by the rules of meritocracy where the individual is chosen based on his or her academic qualifications and experience (Chandrasekhar, 2011). Research shows that managers singled out without sufficient knowledge and experience will never aspire to fulfill the interests of all stakeholders, but instead they will be working for those who appointed them (Solomon, 2013).

Implementation of corporate governance principles in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi is a challenge because proprietorships are allowed to participate in capital markets, yet families control them. Similarly, the cronies of the local leaders run the public agencies and the main leadership style employed is autocratic where decisions are made without consulting any person, apart from the appointing authority. Lewin noted that this form of leadership style causes discontent among various stakeholders and it impedes policy formulation.

We will write a custom Report on The Health Authority-Abu Dhabi specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Another problem is government’s participation in the board, as the law requires that the local government be represented in the agency board. Political leaders will never appreciate the views of their opponents no matter strong they might be mainly because this would reduce their popularity (Clarke, 2004).

Finally, the agency lacked quality human resources to assess the situation and advice the senior management accordingly. Studies show that the agency is made up of individuals who are never open to change, which means that they do not like professional challenges that are based on honesty and moral values.

Suggested Solutions for Improving Corporate Governance in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi The executive (the presidency) should set up a commission of inquiry to investigate the conduct and the performance of the agency, with focus on the appointment criteria. The HAAD has to continue offering its services because the health sector cannot do without the regulator given the fact that fraudsters are ready to deprive citizens of their hardly earned cash by giving them leap services and poor quality products.

One of the recommendations is that disclosure be made mandatory for any insurance company that wants to do business in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi (Sifuna, 2012). Relatives and other close friends run the private companies in the region and they always influence decisions in the government agency, forcing junior managers to serve their interests instead of fulfilling the public interests. Several law making and enforcing institutions should be strengthened to ensure that all individuals abide by the set rules and regulations.

For instance, the police should have arrested the board’s chair and the CEO for contravening the law (Solomon, 2013). Unfortunately, the criminal justice system does not serve the interests of the common citizens, but instead it exists to fulfill the wishes and the desires of the mighty. Finally, the board has to be transparent in dealing with all stakeholders by ensuring that information is circulated at the right time.

References Chandrasekhar, R. (2011). Mahindra Satyam-Restoring corporate governance. Richard Ivey School of Business Foundation, 2(9), 1-28.

Clarke, T. (2004). Critical Perspectives on Business and Management: Five Volume Series on Corporate Governance – Genesis, Anglo-American, European, Asian and Contemporary Corporate Governance. London: Routledge

Duggal, A. (2013). Independent directors are becoming important catalysts in good corporate governance. The Economist Times, 12(19), 1-15.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Health Authority-Abu Dhabi by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Kaen, F. R. (2003). A blueprint for corporate governance: Strategy, accountability and the preservation of shareholder value. New York, NY: AMACOM.

Sifuna, A.P. (2012). Disclose or Abstain: The Prohibition of Insider Trading on Trial. Journal of International Banking Law and Regulation, 27(9), 23-45.

Solomon, J. (2013). Corporate governance and accountability. Hoboken, N.J: Wiley.

Williamson, O.E. (2002). The Theory of the Firm as Governance Structure: From Choice to Contract. Journal of Economic Perspectives, 16(3), pp. 178–87, 191–92


Corporate Social Responsibility: Viacom Company Research Paper college essay help near me

Table of Contents Abstract

Viacom Company Overview

Circumstances that triggered the need for CSR initiatives

Targeted outcome from these initiatives

Managing people and financial resources to accomplish CSR goals



Abstract Companies across the globe have devised different corporate social responsibility (CSR) initiatives to address the common social challenges affecting their customers. Among the companies with comprehensive and well structured CSR initiatives include the Viacom Inc. This analytical treatise attempts to explicitly review the CSR initiatives of the Viacom Company. Reflectively, the company strives to factor in the three Ps of management strategies comprising of the Planet, Profit, and People in its CSR activities.

These seer values are designed to facilitate sustainability due to acceptance by the community and coexistence, thus, earning the company a competitive advantage over other service providers in the same field of operation. Specifically, the paper adopts a holistic approach in extrapolating corporate social responsibility, environmental stewardship, and quality in service delivery with an added value tag at the Viacom Company.

Viacom Company Overview The Viacom Inc. Company is a mass media company based in the United States of America and has several subsidiary brands within its business activities. Founded in 2006, the company is the fourth largest in the global mass media industry and provides services such as radio, cable television, movies, and publishing.

The company generated revenue of US$ 13.887 billion in 2013 and currently has an asset value of US$ 22.250 billion. The company operates in the competitive and dynamic global mass media industry. The company functions as a private entity with diverse interest in the entertainment industry.

Since its inception, the company has remained profitable due to its competitive business models and series of CSR initiatives. The organizational overview of this company consists of several divisions such as the BET Network, Paramount Pictures, Viacom Media Networks, and the Viacom International Media. The company operates under a board of directors (Viacom, 2014).

The company’s management philosophy is systematic governance with flexibility for innovation and creativity. This philosophy operates on the assumptions of confident, competent, and responsible business activities. The philosophy encourages a practical approach to addressing daily challenges in running the business and monitoring progress of the implemented strategies. In addition, the philosophy provides channels for constant motivation and rewarding the customers through a series of CSR initiatives (Viacom, 2014).

Viacom Company has managed to maintain innovation and commitment to quality in products through the ‘create share value’ policy which promotes customer loyalty. Besides, the company has participated in a series of corporate social responsibility activities through ethical managerial commitments designed to support socially responsible activities in the business such as the annual ‘Viacommunity Day’, which enhances its resource based approach to CSR (Viacom, 2014).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The competencies exhibited by the company are part of its overall strategic management and ethical corporate responsibility model. As one of the most efficient company in the global mass media industry, it defines its success from the opportunities it offers to the loyal customers who form part of the corporate social responsibility pillar. This competitive strategy has enhanced the corporation’s competitive advantage in the market.

The CSR initiatives are more than a public relations exercise since the green campaign, the annual ‘Viacommunity Day’, education trust, and health initiatives are part of the company’s management philosophy meant to promote the ‘create share value’ policy (Viacom, 2014).

Circumstances that triggered the need for CSR initiatives Addressing social based concerns through the creation of shared responsibilities was the main reason for the establishment of the different CSR initiatives. The company was interested in eliminating their customers’ dependence on incentives by governments and other private organizations.

For instance, the ‘Get Schooled’ initiative by the Viacom Company was informed by the need to provide a long term solution to education crisis in the US and other parts of the globe. It is a private sponsorship program which supports schools by developing infrastructure, training teachers, offering financial support to students, and leadership training. The aim of this initiative is to guide and support youth in their career life.

This initiative is run by employees of the organization. Through partnership with the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, the company has been in a position to provide education to disadvantaged students across the globe. The initiative is supported by the ‘roadblock’ commercial that shows the power of educating the community (Viacom, 2014).

Besides, the need to raise the level of HIV/AIDs awareness inspired the creation of the ‘Rap-It-Up’ Emmy Award. Through this initiative, the company was able to address the social concerns in different societies as a result of the effects of HIV/AIDs. The ‘Thin Line’ program aired on MTV by the company is an initiative that was meant to protect the youths from digital abuse.

Moreover, the ‘Comedy Central’ program by the company has been active in raising environmental awareness across the globe (D’Amato et al. 2009). Another CSR initiative aimed at addressing educational concerns across the globe is the ‘Kindergarten to Cap


The War on Drugs in the US Term Paper college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

History of the War on Drugs

Key Points

Pros and Cons

Results of the War on Drugs

Recent Trends


Works Cited

Introduction Drug use is a common practice in nationals all over the world. In the US, recreational drug use has occurred for centuries. Unlike with other consumer products, drugs can have adverse effects on the individual. For this reason, the government tries to regulate the use of drugs among its citizens. In the US, the negative impacts of drug use became evident in the society at the end of the 19th century, when it was observed that psychotropic drugs such as cocaine and morphine led to addiction.

The government therefore started imposing prohibitions on the use of and trade in these drugs. In 1914, the Harrison Administration passed the Harrison Narcotics Act, which imposed greater restrictions on psychotropic drug trade. However, the most significant government action in response to drug use occurred under the Nixon administration, when a war on drugs was declared.

History of the War on Drugs The modern war on drugs in the US can trace its beginning to the Nixon administration. On June 17, 1971, President Richard Nixon declared that drug abuse was “a national emergency” and he proceeded to rank it “public enemy number one” (872). He declared a “war on drugs” and dedicated significant federal resources to this task. A number of notable events led to the start of this war. While drugs had always been a part of American popular culture, trends in drug use during the 1960s led to the need for a war on drugs.

During the 1960s, the US witnessed a spike in drug use among middle-class white youth (Benavie 34). The prevalent drug use among this class led to drugs losing some of their stigmatization and this increased drug consumption. The government came up with radical policies to solve the drug problems in the country. This commitment to fight drug abuse has remained strong in each US president since that time.

Key Points In its history, which spans over four decades, the war on drugs has had a number of significant moments. The first major moment in the war was in 1973 when the Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA) was formed. This agency was tasked with reducing the availability of illegal drugs in the US.

It set out to accomplish this task by curtailing the supply of drugs, especially from the international market. Another key moment was in 1981 during the Reagan administration. The President called for touch actions against drug users since he saw this as a more effective method than trying to cut the supply of the drugs. During this period, the US adopted a “zero tolerance” policy against users of illegal drugs. This “tough on drugs” policy has continued to characterize the approach used by successive administrations.

Pros and Cons A significant benefit of the war on drugs is that it led to a sharp decline in the production and distribution of illicit drugs. Due to the punitive penalties attached to dealing in illegal drugs, people were dissuaded from engaging in these activities. The overall quantity of illicit drugs available in the country therefore decreased.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The war increased awareness of the negative effects of drugs among Americans. The government earmarked millions of dollars for education programs that were meant to empower the community. These programs highlighted the destructive nature of drugs and urged Americans to stay away from drugs.

A major demerit of the war on drugs is that it prevented the government from engaging in action to address the causes of drug abuse among most US citizens. Niesen notes that by positioning drug abuse as a problem to be dealt with by individuals and families, successive US administrations have avoided resolving the possible root causes of drug abuse, such as poverty and unemployment (872). Another significant demerit of the war is that it contributed to the large systematic corruption in the criminal justice system. By criminalizing drugs, the government created a situation where many individuals were in violation of the law and eligible to criminal penalties (Nicholson 305). To avoid these penalties, many detained drug users bribe law enforcement officials or criminal justice personnel.

Effects on Media, Economic, Policy, and Public Opinion

The mass media was significantly affected by the war on drugs. To begin with, the Nixon administration made extensive use of mass media to advise the public on the dangers of drug use. Niesen documents that the media was advised to give regular reports on the rise in drug-related deaths and print research findings that would help deter drug experimentation (875). The media endorsed sensationalism as a strategy to provoke public interest on the topic of drug abuse.

Public opinion concerning recreational drug use was affected by the war on drugs. Before this war, moderate drug use was normative behavior among youths and many middle class Americans.

The “war on drugs” led to the public view that all drug users were addicts. When declaring drug abuse “public enemy number one”, the Nixon administration did not distinguish between drug addicts and social users. Nicholson et al. note that the “war on drugs” approach promoted the perception that any drug use is abuse where illicit drugs are concerned (305).

Economically, the war on drugs led to an increase in government expenditure. The prohibition of drug use increased government spending on drug prevention. From the onset, the government dedicated significant resources to wage the war.

We will write a custom Term Paper on The War on Drugs in the US specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Specifically, law enforcement and criminal justice resources were used to deter illegal drug use and punish individuals who violated the law. On the other hand, the “war on drugs” greatly benefited drug dealers. Nicholson confirms that the “war on drugs” approach has contributed to the sustenance of a profitable black market in drugs for decades (305).

Results of the War on Drugs The US has been involved in an intensive “war against drugs” for over four decades. The war has led to an increase in the number of inmates in American prisons. Drug offenders make up a significant portion of the prisoners in US penitentiaries (Jones 492). The Bureau of Justice Statistics reveals that over 50% of federal convicts are imprisoned on drug related charges (Sledge par. 4). Most of these drug offenders are social users who do not have criminal records.

The War led to the emergence of a huge black market that deals in illicit drugs. Williams reveals that criminalization of drugs destroys the legal economy and an underground economy emerges to satisfy the demand (326). As such, the “war on drugs” has led to the growth of a powerful black market that dealt in the illicit drugs. This black market enjoyed great profits since it could inflate the price of the drugs and obtain a large profit margin.

The war on drugs has failed to mitigate drug use among Americans. Millions of Americans continue to use illicit drugs in spite of the aggressive government efforts to stop illegal drug use. As of 2000, the National Household Survey on Drug Abuse reported that an estimated 11 million Americans were regular users of illicit drugs (Block and Obioha 108).

Recent Trends In reaction to the fact that the traditional war on drugs has been hugely ineffective, there have been notable shifts in how the government and the community view the problem of drug use. Some policy makers have recognized that recreational drug use is an integral part of the American culture.

Promoting a drug-free life is therefore unrealistic. They have therefore called for the decriminalization of some drugs. Marijuana is one drug that has been legalized in some states in an attempt to deal with the drug problem. Block and Obioha note that legalization does not imply that the government is advocating the use of addictive drugs such as heroin and cocaine (108). Legalization means that it is not a criminal act to use, sell, or buy drugs.

Another trend has been in the emergence of preventive programmes that aim at harm reduction without preaching and propaganda. Such programs acknowledge that drug taking is a fact of life and aim to prevent drug abuse, which causes detrimental outcomes.

In addition to this, there has been a move towards viewing drug abusers as individuals in need of medical assistance instead of viewing them as criminals. Research shows that regardless of how successful criminal penalties are in reducing drug use among people, treatment is more effective.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The War on Drugs in the US by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion Drugs remain to be an important issue affecting the American community. This war costs the government billions of dollars per year and the lives of many people are disrupted as they are subjected to criminal penalties for using or dealing in drugs.

In spite of these significant economic and social costs, the war on drugs has proved largely ineffective. There is no possibility that it will lead to the eradication of the drug problem faced by the country entirely. The US government should therefore consider alternative approaches to deal with the drug problems faced by its citizens.

Works Cited Benavie, Arthur. Drugs: America’s Holy War. NY: Routledge, 2012. Print.

Block, Walter and Violet Obioha. “War on Black Men: Arguments for the Legalization of Drug.” Criminal Justice Ethics 31.2 (2012): 106-120. Web.

Jones, Michael. “Prison overcrowding: the sentencing judge as social worker”. Widener Law Journal 18.1 (2009): 491-498. Web. Web.

Nicholson, Thomas, David Duncan, John White and Cecilia Watkins. “Focusing on abuse, not use: A proposed new direction for US drug policy.” Drugs: Education, Prevention


How do Religion, Culture and Ethnicity Affect the Success or Failure of a Global Enterprise in China? Analytical Essay essay help site:edu

There are many factors that would tend to have a significant impact to the success or failure of global enterprises or businesses operating in international scenes. As a matter of fact, these factors are highly regarded in every segment of the modern business world, considering their significant impact on businesses.

These factors would tend to serve as perfect guidelines for global entrepreneurs in their business plans, especially when they intend to venture into new markets or when planning to expand their businesses to other regions. There is no doubt that these factors form part of the most important things that global entrepreneurs would consider when laying planning for their businesses.

This paper observes some of the ways in which factors such as religion, culture and ethnicity affect the success or failure of global enterprises. In order to offer valid information of how these factors may influence global enterprises, China is used in this paper as the country to research. The paper also highlights the factors that could impact upon the decision making of the global entrepreneur in the selected country.

Cultural and ethnic diversities in China and their Impact on Global Enterprises China is not only recognised as the fastest advancing economy in the world, but also as one of the most multicultural countries in the world today. The multiculturalism of China would come as a result of globalization and other factors that would include technological changes, an aging workforce and high demand for knowledge and skills in various areas.

Globalisation simply refers to the constant process through which different cultures, societies and economies interact with each other on global scales. Globalisation is said to be synonymous with the economic development and success of a nation, and this is evident in China where various aspects of globalisation have continued to play a significant role in transforming every sector of the economy (Combs et al. 2006, p. 517). Ever since the era of globalisation, China has undergone a massive social and economic transformation.

The industrial revolution was arguably one of the most important periods in the globalization timeline. This period would see a significant improvement in the quantity and quality of commodities in various regions of the world. This, in turn helped to improve global business relations between countries through exports of products.

The first phase of globalisation would come to an end after World War I. This war had brought adverse implications on the economic scenario, leading to a number of major crises that would affect the world in the 1920s and 1930s. Some of these crises are the gold standard crisis and the Great Depression..

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Globalisation in the modern era, which occurred after World War II, has had a greater impact to the global business scenario, compared with the previous phase of globalisation. The global leaders had used this opportunity to enhance economic ties between countries allover the world. More importantly, it was also in the course of this time when many major countries came to attain their independence.

Following this significant advancement, the involved countries would start their own bilateral systems which served as avenues for economic relations with the rest of the world. These developments helped to strengthen the global economic situation, thus leading to improved trade relations among countries.

Other significant developments whose occurrence had been facilitated by globalisation include the establishment of the United Nations Organization (UNO), the World Trade Organization, creation of global corporations, and blend of tradition and culture across the nations. These factors played a key role in making China a multicultural country as people of different ethnicities found their way into the country mainly for economic-related reasons.

As various scholar and researchers have concluded, the largest impact of globalisation on countries would occur in the course of the modern age. For example, it was during this era when widespread development would take place in all sectors of China’s economy. This has further contributed to increased interactions between China and other countries, and in that case, sharing of cultural aspects, ideas, and traditions would occur, putting a direct influence on the country’s globalisation process.

In a matter of decades, China has changed from a determinedly Chinese nation to one of the most culturally diverse countries in the world. As it would be observed, the aspect of cultural diversity has had far-reaching implications for the Asian country. China’s diverse cultures have significantly continued to impact many aspects of the way the nation relates with other countries around the world, especially in matters to do with business and commerce.

Multiculturalism is a construct that would tend to bring significant implications to societies (Cox


Advertising, Publicity, and Public Relations Exploratory Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Significance of a Salesperson

Expectations of a Salesperson

Advertising Policy

Public Relations, Publicity, and Corporate Advertising

Publicity in Future



Introduction The ultimate goal of every business is to sell its products to as many customers as possible in order to make high profits. To achieve this goal, businesses employ various strategies, which include advertising, public relations, publicity, and direct salespersons to market their products. This paper will discuss the importance of each of these strategies in the process of marketing a product.

Significance of a Salesperson Salespersons make significant contributions to their companies since they possess a variety of values that alternative marketing systems such as e-commerce cannot replace. To begin with, a salesperson is an expert who is well connected in a particular market segment. This enables him to reach out to customers and to identify their needs, thereby creating opportunities for new product development and market share expansion.

An effective salesperson is usually likeable and is capable of building strong relationships with customers. The relationships enable customers to identify with the company’s product, thereby increasing the chances of repeat purchases. Salespeople identify important leads that ultimately turn into huge sales.

They are passionate about the company’s product and explain its benefits to customers in a manner that creates a lasting emotional impact. It is this personal connection rather than the product or brand that turns potential customers into actual customers. In a nutshell, salespersons are very important since they enable companies to take business away from their competitors.

The type of the product being sold determines the significance of the salesperson. For instance, first moving consumer goods (FMCG) such as bread usually do not require a salesperson because the consumers already have adequate knowledge about them. Additionally, the product is so important to the consumer that they have to buy it without being persuaded by a salesperson.

However, for a service such as insurance a salesperson is very important because the product is costly, has complicated features, and is often associated with rip-off. In this context, a salesperson is not only needed to explain the benefits of the product, but also to convince customers to purchase it.

Expectations of a Salesperson The main expectations of a salesperson include the following. First, a salesperson expects to maintain a high customer satisfaction rate. This helps in reducing customer attrition by improving the loyalty of existing clients. Second, a salesperson expects to maintain a positive and professional attitude.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A positive attitude is important to a salesperson since he is bound to experience rejection in the market. A positive attitude provides the motivation to pursue new leads in order to meet sales targets. Third, a salesperson expects to meet his sales targets within the set timeline. In order to realize this expectation, the salesperson is required to have excellent negotiation skills and product knowledge.

The sales role is a position that I would be interested in. This decision is supported by the following facts. To begin with, the role will enable me to make valuable contributions to the company. Undoubtedly, selling is the most important activity in any company since it directly generates revenue.

The sales role is also important to me because it creates new challenges that have to be addressed through innovative strategies. This not only eliminates boredom, but also provides numerous opportunities for learning and creativity. Working as a salesperson is a highly rewarding career in nearly every company. For instance, most organizations provide their sales personnel with a fixed and a variable pay. The variable component provides the opportunity to the salesperson to increase his income according to his ability.

Advertising Policy Ethics determine the long-term benefit of advertising. Specifically, the society’s perception or attitude towards an advert can lead to an increase in demand or a total rejection of a product. An advertising activity is considered to be ethical if it demonstrates respect to the target audience.

Showing respect in advertising involves anticipating and addressing the intentional and the unintentional effects of an advert on the society. Based on these perspectives, my advertising policy would be to create responsible desire. This involves using advertising to create desire or stimuli in a manner that does not create harm in the society. Basically, this policy is based on the principle of do good and no harm.

The proposed policy is likely to be effective because it addresses all the elements of a firm’s triple bottom line. The elements include profitability, social responsibility, and environmental responsibility. Creating responsible desires leads to sustainable advertising. Adverts that do not cause any harm to the society and the environment will not be resisted by social activists or banned by the government. Thus, they can be used for a long time to stimulate the public to purchase a particular product, thereby increasing the company’s profits.

Public Relations, Publicity, and Corporate Advertising Publicity, public relations, and corporate advertising have the following similarities. First, they are all used to create awareness about a company and its products. Second, they all depend on the print and electronic media to convey information about the company and its products.

We will write a custom Essay on Advertising, Publicity, and Public Relations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Publicity, public relations, and corporate advertising are different in the following ways. Publicity is the act of drawing the attention of the media in order to improve the visibility of a brand, product or a company in the public. The main objective of publicity is to garner as much media coverage as possible in order to create awareness about a brand or a product.

Unlike advertising, publicity is often not paid for. Moreover, publicity does not involve controlling what is being covered by the media. Thus, publicity can be positive or negative. For instance, Virgin Cola brand received positive publicity in the US when the chairman of the company that produces it, Sir Richard Branson, drove a Sherman tank down a street in New York in 1998 during its launch. The main strength of publicity is that it enables companies to create brand awareness at a low cost.

Public relations activities are concerned with influencing the public’s opinion through the media. Thus, its main objective is to improve the reputation of a brand or a company. For instance, after the 2010 oil spill in the Gulf of Mexico, BP used public relations in 2012 to regain its reputation as an efficient firm in the oil industry. Thus, the main benefit of public relations is to help companies to minimize the negative impact of various events on their brands.

Advertising involves paying media companies to convey specific information about a brand or a product. Unlike publicity, advertising enables the company to determine the message that the media presents to the public about its product.

The difference between advertising and public relations is that the later positions information as news, whereas the former presents information as an appeal to make a purchase decision. For instance, Nokia Lumia 920 gained market share in the US in 2012 after its advert presented iPhone 5 (its main competitor) as boring.

Publicity in Future Publicity will continue to play an important role in improving the competitiveness of products in future because of the following reasons. First, publicity ensures credibility since the message about the product emanates from an independent source. As the public becomes more informed about the consequences of consuming various products, publicity will be one of the tools that companies will use to enhance the credibility of their brands.

Second, publicity is cost-effective and provides a lot of information to the public. As competition increases in various industries in future, companies are likely to turn to publicity to improve their brand awareness at low costs. Finally, technological advancements such as the use of the internet and smartphones to access real-time information will enhance the suitability of publicity in marketing.

Conclusion Advertising, publicity, and public relations are used by marketers to improve the brand awareness for their products. Unlike advertising and public relations, publicity is cost-effective and is likely to be used in future by companies that have limited marketing budgets. Apart from implementing the aforementioned strategies, companies should employ salespersons to sell their products. However, the need for a salesperson depends on the characteristics of the product.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Advertising, Publicity, and Public Relations by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More References Amstrong, G.,


Corporate Governance Sector in UK Coursework scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Introduction Corporate governance is the relationship between the daily running of an organization and its ownership. It entails the processes, procedures, decisions, and controls that define the effective running of an organization vis-à-vis the ownership. In UK, the effectiveness with which corporations operate has been an arduous journey, which is still in growth. This paper will look into the forces that led to these changes including the Enron Scandal.

The paper will also describe findings with reference to the Tesco PLC (2013) case. Finally, the author will conclude on the effectiveness of the UK corporate governance sector. London Stock Exchange is the custodian of governance rules in UK. LSE manages the agency relationship between owners of a company (shareholders) and the day-to-day controllers of operations for profit making purposes.

General Background The UK corporate governance sector has had numerous changes and the reports have had a key role to play in these changes. Changes have occurred primarily based on the need to remunerate corporate chiefs fairly, the need for careful investment of shareholders’ money continually, and the need to improve shareholders’ returns.

Although these are the basics, other factors come into play because of the changing economic times buoyed by technological advancement, a shifting social-corporate relationship, and competition. The following reports are an indication of the metamorphosis of the corporate governance and recommendations accrued over time.

Cardbury Report 1992

The report, commissioned in the wake of numerous UK scandals, aimed at instilling integrity, transparency, and accountability in the entire decision-making processes in an organization. Corporate governance in UK lies upon that bedrock. It established auditor independence, encouraged information flow to the shareholders, and established a structure in which an organization could run independently (Chapman, Hopwood


Roll Rite, LLC Evaluation Essay college application essay help

Introduction Roll Rite, LLC is a private company in the US that specializes in the manufacture of tarp equipment. It was the first company to design and manufacture a high-tech electric tarp system. The equipment is mainly used in the trucking industry. Owing to its aggressive growth caused by unrivalled innovations, this would be the right time for the firm to venture into international markets.

Based on the high number of prospective countries where the company would export its products, the process of identifying the best foreign markets to venture into could be a rigorous process. Business organizations sell their products and services in foreign markets that could result in improved sales growth and equity (Chan, Covrig and Ng 1501; Lileeva and Trefler 1070; Müller 100).

However, many companies do not conduct evidence-based analyses before they venture into foreign markets. As a result, such companies end up making huge losses. This paper discusses the data, market indicators and steps that the leading producer of tarp and allied products would utilize in order to select the best three markets to export its goods.

The need to rank markets It is always prudent for business managers to rank potential markets so that they have an outline of the expected business trends. Managers should not rely on business assumptions that are not supported by real market data. This happens when some members of the team could have some hidden agendas, which could imply that foreign markets could be selected based on personal reasons rather than for gaining competitive advantages.

In order for the management team of Roll Rite, LLC to identify correct markets that have the potential to help the firm realize improved financial growth and competitive advantage, it should engage in series of informed decisions. The decisions could be made based on the market data obtained from markets with regard to attributes, strengths, and weaknesses of the firm and its manufactured goods. Thus, the ranking could provide an essential starting point that could support collective-based discussion to culminate in the selection of the best foreign markets.

However, Roll Rite, LLC will not basically rank potential markets to justify the selection of the viable markets. The involved team may make some other crucial considerations that could guide it to know the order of pursuing the identified foreign markets. For example, budget constraints of the firm could make it avoid some foreign markets that could be characterized by high operations.

If this happens, then the company could enter into markets that do not have very high scores, but which are marked by manageable financial costs involved in daily operations. In fact, the firm could venture into close markets like Mexico and Canada, although they could have lower rankings than African markets, which could be associated with high costs of operations. Also, the team in charge of analyzing the external markets could consider some important strengths of the firm, for example, a wealth of experience in regard to dealing with specific markets.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, the decision of the team will not only be based on the outcomes of analytical models used to assess foreign markets. Such models will be updated on a regular basis to reflect market dynamics and growth trends of Roll Rite, LLC. It will also be important for the management of the firm to remember that the analysis of market indicators is a long process.

How Roll Rite, LLC will select foreign markets The firm has gained a substantial market share in the US due to its innovative products and excellent customer service. It has developed a great image in long durability of its products, which are manufactured using the best technologies. The firm has been recording consistent financial growth over the years though the market for tarp products has been marked by a high level of competition.

In an attempt to assess its potential in foreign markets, Roll Rite, LLC would want to identify the markets that could have the most potential for its tarp systems. Although the company is marked by a significant financial strength, it would like to enter markets that are characterized by high penetration rates and low investments in the forms of advertisements and promotion.

The management team has felt that it would be easier to enter into the markets that have been already using tarp systems imported from the US. On the other hand, it would be quite difficult to penetrate easily into foreign markets that use tarp systems produced by local manufacturers (Kim and Wei 90).

In fact, the local manufacturers could adopt low pricing strategies that could drive Roll Rite, LLC out of the market. Thus, the sources of tarp systems in foreign markets will be an important factor to consider before the management can settle on a particular foreign market. The following steps would be followed in a model that could enable the firm to accurately identify external markets that could help it to gain competitive advantage and improved financial outcomes.

Step one: Developing indicators As a result of the management team analyzing past sales, conducting competitive market research, and discussing with other market players in the trucking industry, it argues that the following indicators would impact the final decision with regard to the choices of foreign markets.

Product-based indicators

These would include the level of US exports of tarp systems and components. The rationale would be that the firm has gained competitive advantage solely on product innovations and durability. It is documented that the firm has been doing pretty well in markets characterized by a high level of competition from other tarp systems’ manufacturers. Therefore, the most essential product-based indicator would be the level of exports from the US business rivals into external markets.

We will write a custom Essay on Roll Rite, LLC specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Past leads and sales would also be important product-based indicators that would influence the market choices. It is clear that the trucking industry is controlled by some US and foreign competitors. Thus, it would be essential to analyze the sales of these companies.

Industry size indicators

One of the indicators in this category would be the population. Generally, product sales correlate with the number of individuals that characterize markets. Therefore, larger populations would result in better sales than smaller populations. The per capita income of the people in specific markets would be quantified to determine income levels.

Populations that are marked by high income levels are also characterized by higher sales than the populations with low income levels. Also, it would require the analysis of the total market for tarp systems. This would involve the identification of specific market niches that have the potential for the products.

Market growth indicators

In assessing the potential of the foreign markets, the management team would determine the growth trends of the tarp systems’ markets (Petersen, Pedersen and Lyles 1110; Shrader 50).

For instance, it would enter markets characterized by higher growth rates than those with stagnated or negative dynamics. In fact, it would be pretty hard for Roll Rite, LLC to engage with new distributors without past dealings with tarp systems from the US in a stagnant market.

Country Imports from the US (millions USD) Market growth (%) year over year Ease of business Canada 300,347 2.7% 50 Mexico 226,153 4.7% 35 China 122,016 0.4% 90 Japan 65,145 -6.9% 25 Germany 47,442 -2.8% 20 United Kingdom 47,442 -13.7% 30 Brazil 44,116 0.7% 45 Netherlands 42,654 5.0% 70 Hong Kong 42,450 13.3% 80 Korea 41,555 -1.7% 40 Figure 1. A table showing the data for the three main market indicators (2013).

For simplicity, the value of imports from the US by foreign markets, average growth rate, and the ease of doing business were used as the indicators. Figure 1 shows that Canada imported products of the highest value from the US while Netherlands imported goods and services of the least value.

Although the foreign markets recorded good import figures, it is clear that a good number of foreign markets showed negative growth with regard to foreign products from the US. This observation brings complexity in the analysis of the best markets to carry out business. For example, although the United Kingdom is ranked number 6 in terms of the value of imports, the country recorded a decrease of about 13%.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Roll Rite, LLC by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Thus, Roll Rite, LLC would be careful not to venture into markets that might be attempting to reduce the value of products they import from the US. Such a move could lead to huge financial losses. It would be interesting to monitor the growth trend of Hong Kong over the next one year to assess if it still has high growth rate with regard to the US imports.

If the growth rates were maintained, then the company would consider the foreign market as an excellent vehicle to gain competitive advantage and increase market share. Although other ranking features will be introduced in the subsequent sections, Canada has recorded very high value of imports, and the growth rate is also good.

The higher the value of the ease of business market was given the easier it was to conduct business with the county. For example, China has the highest value of the ease of business. It could be that there are less legal hurdles that could hinder a company to operate in China. Also, it could have a conducive political environment that favours investments by local and foreign business establishments.

Step two: Changing the data into indicators that can be used for comparison This step involves assigning the data to the indicators used in the first table some point scores so that the market performance outcomes for all the countries can be ranked using numbers.

Various approaches can be utilized, but team members will have to judge and apply the right scores so that there would be comparability between the indicators. In regard to Roll Rite, LLC, the country with the highest value of imports from the US was considered the benchmark upon which the other states in the table were assessed. The following table shows the data with specific ranks.

Country Imports from the US (millions USD) Rank Market growth (%) year over year Rank Ease of business Rank Canada 300,347 1 2.7% 4 50 7 Mexico 226,153 2 4.7% 3 35 4 China 122,016 3 0.4% 6 90 10 Japan 65,145 4 -6.9% 9 25 2 Germany 47,442 5 -2.8% 8 20 1 United Kingdom 47,442 6 -13.7% 10 30 3 Brazil 44,116 7 0.7% 5 45 6 Netherlands 42,654 8 5.0% 2 70 8 Hong Kong 42,450 9 13.3% 1 80 9 Korea 41,555 10 -1.7% 7 40 5 Figure 2. A table showing the three indicators of the foreign markets and their rankings.

Next, it was important to introduce scores into the table. For this case, the country with the highest value of imports, Canada, was assigned a score of 100. This was used as the reference score for other foreign markets. Also, the raw point scores for the other market indicators were assigned using a similar approach. The following figure is a table with the indicators, rankings and raw point scores.

Country Imports from the US (millions USD) Rank Raw import points Market growth (%) year over year Rank Raw growth points Ease of business Rank Raw ease points Canada 300,347 1 100 2.7% 4 22 50 7 55 Mexico 226,153 2 75 4.7% 3 28 35 4 70 China 122,016 3 55 0.4% 6 15 90 10 40 Japan 65,145 4 40 -6.9% 9 8 25 2 85 Germany 47,442 5 30 -2.8% 8 10 20 1 90 United Kingdom 47,335 6 29 -13.7% 10 6 30 3 80 Brazil 44,116 7 25 0.7% 5 17 45 6 60 Netherlands 42,654 8 21 5.0% 2 30 70 8 50 Hong Kong 42,450 9 20 13.3% 1 70 80 9 45 Korea 41,555 10 19 -1.7% 7 12 40 5 65 Figure 3. A table showing the market indicators, rankings, and raw points.

Step three: Weighting indicators Not all market indicators could have great significance in selecting the foreign market. In other words, some market indicators should always be considered more essential than the rest. It is recommended that every market indicator should be assigned a weight that correlates with its importance in foreign market assessment (Deng 80).

The three indicators were assigned values between 1 and 3 (3 was the highest weight). Specifically, the ease of business was assigned a weight of 3 while market growth and value of imports were assigned weights of 2 and 1 respectively. The ease of penetrating a foreign market by Roll Rite, LLC was a very important aspect in business operations. This was the most important indicator that should be assessed in detail when planning to venture into foreign markets where the firm has little or no prior experience.

The second most important indicator for Roll Rite, LLC was market growth because, without proper market growth analysis, the firm could start operations in a foreign market that has resolved not to engage in business, for example, with companies from the US (Yeaple 300).

Lastly, the least important indicator for the company was the value of imports because, based on its business aggression, the company could enter a foreign market with a low value of imports from the US, but end up gaining a significant market share and financial growth.

Country Imports from the US (millions USD) Rank Raw import points w Market growth (%) year over year Rank Raw growth points g W Ease of business Rank Raw ease points Biz W Canada 300,347 1 100 1 2.7% 4 22 2 50 7 55 3 Mexico 226,153 2 75 1 4.7% 3 28 2 35 4 70 3 China 122,016 3 55 1 0.4% 6 15 2 90 10 40 3 Japan 65,145 4 40 1 -6.9% 9 8 2 25 2 85 3 Germany 47,442 5 30 1 -2.8% 8 10 2 20 1 90 3 United Kingdom 47,335 6 29 1 -13.7% 10 6 2 30 3 80 3 Brazil 44,116 7 25 1 0.7% 5 17 2 45 6 60 3 Netherlands 42,654 8 21 1 5.0% 2 30 2 70 8 50 3 Hong Kong 42,450 9 20 1 13.3% 1 70 2 80 9 45 3 Korea 41,555 10 19 1 -1.7% 7 12 2 40 5 65 3 Figure 4. A table showing market indicators, rankings, raw points, and weights of indicators.

In order to arrive at the final scores, the weights of the markets and point scores were multiplied. The result was a score for each indicator. Afterwards, the three score values for each market were summed up to obtain the total score.

The following table shows the completed calculations.

Country Imports from the US (millions USD) Rank Raw import points w score Market growth (%) year over year Rank Raw growth points g W score Ease of business Rank Raw ease points Biz W score Total score Canada 300,347 1 100 1 100 2.7% 4 22 2 44 50 7 55 3 155 299 Mexico 226,153 2 75 1 75 4.7% 3 28 2 56 35 4 70 3 210 341 China 122,016 3 55 1 55 0.4% 6 15 2 30 90 10 40 3 120 205 Japan 65,145 4 40 1 40 -6.9% 9 8 2 16 25 2 85 3 255 311 Germany 47,442 5 30 1 30 -2.8% 8 10 2 20 20 1 90 3 270 320 United Kingdom 47,335 6 29 1 29 -13.7% 10 6 2 12 30 3 80 3 240 281 Brazil 44,116 7 25 1 25 0.7% 5 17 2 34 45 6 60 3 180 239 Netherlands 42,654 8 21 1 21 5.0% 2 30 2 60 70 8 50 3 150 241 Hong Kong 42,450 9 20 1 20 13.3% 1 70 2 140 80 9 45 3 135 295 Korea 41,555 10 19 1 19 -1.7% 7 12 2 24 40 5 65 3 195 238 Figure 5. A table with the calculated scores of the market indicators.

The following data show the order of the foreign markets based on their total scores that are shown in the above table. The highest scoring market is the top while the lowest scoring market is at the bottom.

Country Total score Ranking Mexico 341 1 Germany 320 2 Japan 311 3 Canada 299 4 Hong Kong 295 5 United Kingdom 281 6 Netherlands 241 7 Brazil 289 8 Korea 238 9 China 205 10 Figure 6. A table showing the order of foreign markets based on their total scores.

The three best markets (Mexico, Germany, and Japan)

The three best scoring foreign markets were Mexico, Germany, and Japan respectively. The management team of Roll Rite, LLC should use the model results to form the basis for discussion as they plan to venture into the three markets that were shown to have the best scores.

Although Mexico was not characterized by the highest market growth, it was the second best market with regard to the value of imports from the US. Thus, it seems that the country has a conducive business environment that could benefit the company. Interestingly, Germany was marked by negative market growth trend, but it was the score best market in the overall score. The negative growth could have been contributed by political events, which could go away in the near future.

Thus, it is an ideal market that Roll Rite, LLC should focus on entering in order to increase its market share. Japan is a highly industrialized country and with a significant value of the US imports (Chen, Lee and Isobe 134; Makino and Montgomery 480).

Roll Rite, LLC could gain a substantial market share in Japan based on its innovative ways of manufacturing tarp systems. In conclusion, the model has presented an excellent approach to study the potential of foreign markets with regard to Roll Rite, LLC. The firm will focus on the outcomes of the model to launch further market research studies to understand the markets better.

Works Cited Chan, Kalok, Vicentiu Covrig, and Lilian Ng. “What determines the domestic bias and foreign bias? Evidence from mutual fund equity allocations worldwide.” The Journal of Finance 60.3 (2005): 1495-1534. Print.

Chen, Gong-Meng, Bong-Soo Lee, and Oliver Rui. “Foreign ownership restrictions and market segmentation in China’s stock markets.” Journal of Financial Research 24.1 (2001): 133-55. Print.

Deng, Ping. “Investing for strategic resources and its rationale: The case of outward FDI from Chinese companies.” Business Horizons 50.1 (2007): 71-81. Print.

Isobe, Takehiko, Shige Makino, and David B. Montgomery. “Resource commitment, entry timing, and market performance of foreign direct investments in emerging economies: The case of Japanese international joint ventures in China.” Academy of Management Journal 43.3 (2000): 468-484. Print.

Kim, Woochan, and Shang-Jin Wei. “Foreign portfolio investors before and during a crisis.” Journal of international economics 56.1 (2002): 77-96. Print.

Lileeva, Alla, and Daniel Trefler. “Improved access to foreign markets raises plant-level productivity… for some plants.” The Quarterly Journal of Economics 125.3 (2010): 1051-1099. Print.

Müller, Thomas. “Analyzing modes of foreign entry: Greenfield investment versus acquisition.” Review of International Economics 15.1 (2007): 93-111. Print.

Petersen, Bent, Torben Pedersen, and Marjorie A. Lyles. “Closing knowledge gaps in foreign markets.” Journal of international business studies 39.7 (2008): 1097-1113. Print.

Shrader, Rodney C. “Collaboration and performance in foreign markets: The case of young high-technology manufacturing firms.” Academy of Management Journal 44.1 (2001): 45-60. Print.

Yeaple, Stephen Ross. “The complex integration strategies of multinationals and cross country dependencies in the structure of foreign direct investment.” Journal of International Economics 60.2 (2003): 293-314. Print.


Contract Law: Breach of Contract and Remedies Available Case Study college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Introduction A contract as an accord between businesses or individuals who may by mutual consent agree to do something or one may agree to undertake something for a consideration.1 Agreements can oral or written, or even implied depending with the issue at hand.2 In most cases, contracts end up in court claims for failure by one arty to fulfill his part of the bargain, whether in part or full.

For any claim to contractual material breach to be successful, the injured party must establish that: indeed there was a contract; the defendant is indeed the right party to bring a claim, the contract was breached, and the claimant suffered monitory losses.

In a similar case held in 1853,3 it was held that if a party privy to the contract has rendered it difficult to fulfill his part of the contractual bargain, at end of the agreed term that party is directly liable for breach.4 This paper will discuss the relevant facts in Mr. Cosimo and Natural Stone House performance case and advice needed by Mr. Cosimo to pursue the case and Natural Stone House to counter the case.

The legal Issue(s) (Contractual) Relevant facts to the case

Natural Stone House (“NSH”) under Mr. and Mrs. Alfredo was contracted by Mr. and Mrs. Cosimo to supply and install granite surfaces for the kitchen comprising a bench-top, a servery top and splash-backs July 2013. Mr. Alfredo showed to Mr. Cosimo samples of granite. Ultimately, Mr. Cosimo selected Verde Sorrento granite for the kitchen surfaces. A quotation was made by Mr. Cosimo and handed to Mr. Alfredo on 31 July 2013.

The quotation entailed $5,370 for the bench-tops and about $1,595 for the splash-backs. On 12 August 2013, revised the quotation and offered a single price of about $6,495 which was accepted by Mr. Cosimo. Mr. Cosimo also paid 50 percent of the total cost.

This meant that Mr. Cosimo had seen that the granite bench-tops supplied by Mr. Alfredo were the material he really needed. NSH supplied the material and as agreed and started work on 21st September the same year. However, Mr. Cosimo was not pleased prompting him to cancel the contract.


Mr. Cosimo is intending to bring the matter to court. He thinks that NSH has breached the contract by delivering bench-top which was not fit for its purpose and of an unacceptable quality. It is also the view of Mr. Cosimo that the materials supplied must befit the work anticipated. It was also anticipated that NSH would raise counter-claims. Using all relevant contractual principles, this paper advises Mr. Cosimo of the strength of his claims as well as the strength of the anticipated counter-claims.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The reason behind the client’s need to obtain advice

There are various reasons clients want to be advised on legal matters particularly contractual claim. In this case, however, main reason why Mr. Cosimo needs legal advice is basically to know how the court deals with contractual claim cases.

The client may want to be advised on how to adduce the evidence and also convince the judge regarding the facts to the case.5 The client may also want be advised on what kind of evidence if in writing to present before the lord judge. Likewise, if it is oral, then the client may want to know how to proof it existence via circumstantial evidence or witnesses. 6

The client may also want to be advised on how to claim and proof damages resulting from the violated contract.7 That is, the claimant after vividly proving that indeed a contract exited and terms were breached, he or she should then proof to the judge that she or he suffered financial loss in the process.

In most cases, the claimant must present beyond reasonable doubt before the judge some evidence to proof the financial loss.8 Specifically, the claimant will also be seeking to know whether the money claimed would solve the problem.9 The client may also want to know the leverage that defendant is likely to get in terms of claim defenses.

Applying relevant principles of law and authority and Legal advice The aspect of material breach will no doubt come up. In Suisse Atlantique case (1967) House of Lords defined fundamental breach as a contractual breach which entitles the wronged party to treat or a consideration as it is a violation and rescinds the agreement.10 In this case, the judge would want to know among many other things whether the other party (defendant) did not meet (intentionally) his part of the bargain.

Since, the breaching party (Mr. Alfredo) did not intentionally breach the contract; Mr. Cosimo would argue that though was not stated in the contract, it was within the powers of Mr. Alfredo to supply kitchen graphite bench-tops of high quality and right standards.

However, this would not be a material breach as it does not deprive Mr. Cosimo of the real intention and purpose of the deal. In this case, Mr. Cosimo would not be allowed to repudiate the agreement but would only demand for some cure which would be in the form of fixing the issue or reduction in price of the project.

We will write a custom Case Study on Contract Law: Breach of Contract and Remedies Available specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In the case of the money be claimed, it is likely to be less material if the issue at hand is something that can be made good with less expense or reasonable effort, whilst upholding the agreement. Taking into consideration the goodwill by Mr. Alfredo to fix the problems as well as the willingness to acquire material from a supplier of their choice, probably this would not be a material breach, and as such, Mr. Cosimo would not be able to terminate the contract.

The claimant should also consider the chances that the defendant or breaching party will fix the problem.11 In contract law, in the event that the issue is likely to be fixed and that the breaching party has shown intentions to the same, the court is likely to rule that the contractual violation was immaterial. In this case, Mr. Alfredo offered to exchange it for a different type of granite to the same value to be selected by Mr. Cosimo, either from NSH or an alternative supplier. Mr. Alfredo did this as a gesture of goodwill.

The other aspect that Mr. Cosimo should know before proceeding with the court action is whether Mr. Alfredo breached the agreement in bad faith. In contract law, if the violation of the agreement stemmed from bad faith or was willful and the case is taken to a court of law, the judge is more likely to rule in favor of the claimant because of the material breach.12

For instance, if the court establishes that Mr. Alfredo completely ignored the terms of the contract, then he would have materially repudiated the contract.13 However, if it establishes that a breach or violation emanated from circumstances that were beyond the control of Mr. Alfredo then he is not likely to be held responsible for materially breaching the contract.

Alternative Responses to the Issue The client (Mr. Cosimo) will respond based on the likely defendant’s counterclaims.

Procedural strategies or tactics

In the case of Mr. Alfredo, there are rules of civil procedure which may be strategically employed. For instance, he may begin by applying for summary judgment, or apply for security for costs or apply strike out the claims altogether.14 Mostly, these tactics are used in cases that are highly importance. In such situation, Mr. Cosimo may employ tactics in order to impart pressure on the other side and in the process form part of a winning approach.

Variation of a written contract

Mr. Alfredo could also file a defense particularly based on supposed variation of a contract after it had been performed. That is, Mr. Cosimo only reacted after the granite bench-top had been put. In addition, it was the same material that Mr. Cosimo had checked in July and made an order.

In contract law, it is common practice claim that the agreement was considerably varied by just a conversation, in this case, by facsimile a letter in response so as to dispute the fact it was violated.15 This would eventually put the judge or courts of law in a challenging position since it would require oral evidence which normally takes place only during the final trail.16 As such, the defendant would have managed to buy more time. This tactic would provide the defendant with more time to put together his evidence particularly the oral evidence.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Contract Law: Breach of Contract and Remedies Available by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The premise is that any mistake made in court is likely to cost the party a lot therefore there is need to get prepared well. The defendant may as well argue that the contract was varied. In contract law, it is common practice, even where a contract is written, for the defendant to disown and even argue that it was altered or changed and as such, he or she did not in any way contravene the terms of the contract.

This is also a very risky road to be taken by the defendant therefore he or she must buy enough time in order to put down tangible evidence.

Mr. Cosimo should first know that in a contractual claim, the defendant is allowed to raise enough legal defenses. Usually, it is not enough for the defendant to merely deny legal offenses; he or she must counter the claimant’s allegations with reasonable evidence or argument. The main reason for raising these legal aspects at earlier stages is because he or she may not be allowed to raise them at latter stages.

The outcome of the dispute and remedies are available for the parties

The court is likely to rule that the contractual breach was immaterial and as such the contract was still in force. Therefore, the only cure for Mr. Cosimo is to request for materials that fit her desires. In other words, the only remedy available to Mr. Cosimo is reparation with orders to cost. In the case of Mr. Alfredo, the cure would be restatement of the contract with no orders to cost.

Bibliography Casenote Legal Briefs, Contracts Murphy Speidel and Ayres (Aspen Law


Customer Intimacy and Other Value Disciplines Case Study scholarship essay help

Introduction This essay is based on an article, Customer Intimacy and Other Value Disciplines by Michael Treacy and Fred Wiersema (1992). The Value Disciples model focuses on three areas, which organizations should act upon in their operations to gain market shares. Treacy and Wiersema (1992) note that an organization should choose one of the value disciplines and concentrate on it constantly and vigorously, but it must also not ignore the other two areas. The two areas must meet the industry standards.

Operational excellence enhances organizational operations through quality services at low prices. Organizations should focus on efficiency, management of the supply chain, and streamline operations.

Product leadership should focus on innovation, product design, development, short time frame, and branding in a highly dynamic market.

Customer intimacy requires organizations to succeed in customer service and attention by tailoring products and services to meet specific needs of customers. In addition, organizations should also concentrate customer relationship management, exceed customers’ expectations in product and service delivery, focus on customer lifetime value, and be reliable and close to customers.

Therefore, according to Treacy and Wiersema (1992), these are the three ways to achieve market leadership.

The problem or opportunity for the organization Losing market share

Compaq, Home Depot’s competitors, and Adidas lost market shares to their rivals because of the failure to understand and focus on the three ways for achieving market leadership. On the other hand, organizations, such as Compaq, Nike, and Home Depot gained significant market shares from their competitors because they focused on one of the value disciplines.

Firms could lose market shares due to several reasons. For instance, Compaq lost market share to Dell other competitors because of weaknesses in its delivery systems. Dell realized that Compaq and IBM delivery systems were weak. While its competitors concentrated lower prices, Dell developed an efficient operating model that eliminated dealers and distributors. This enhanced operational efficiency and excellence. As a result, Dell was able to acquire a significant market share from its competitors.

Second, organizations lose market shares when they fail in product development. Product development requires creativity, which might be lacking in an organization. Firms that lose market shares have failed to recognize and embrace new ideas from outside. Unlike successful firms, organizations that lose market share fail to develop and commercialize their ideas fast.

This could result from a failure to engineer business and management processes quickly. When organizations fail to pursue new solutions persistently, their products may become obsolete as competitors develop better ones to meet emerging needs of customers. Therefore, product leaders must persistently seek for new solutions and commercialize the resultant products. Johnson


Dispute Resolution Mechanisms Analytical Essay college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Preservation of Relationships

Protection of Privacy

Flexibility of Proceedings



Introduction Professional practices require guidelines that ensure people work in a healthy environment and interact without conflicts. Work policies are not adequate to guarantee employees’ safety and assure them of proportional compensation when they are injured or their property destroyed. There is the need to ensure employees work in unity and assist each other to ensure the goals of their organisations are achieved.

Organisations cannot achieve their objectives if there are unresolved conflicts between workers and management (Henshaw 2012). Therefore, there is the need for the establishment of dispute resolution mechanisms to ensure all conflicts are solved as soon as they occur. In addition, this ensures disputes are solved in appropriate ways without violating the rights of workers or other parties involved. This paper analyses how the dispute resolution mechanism of NZS3910: 2013 Conditions of Service.

Preservation of Relationships The article explains various ways of ensuring there is a healthy relationship between contractors and engineers. These two parties play important roles in ensuring projects are completed within the specified time and that they are of the desired quality. The article highlights the need for effective communication between the contractors and engineers to ensure the following issues are addressed.

First, there is the need to ensure contractors are in total control of their projects and thus that can predict the outcome of construction processes (Salacuse 2014). Therefore, the article gives the contractor the power to communicate in writing to the engineers and inform him of any proposed changes that will ensure adverse impacts of various situations are minimised or eliminated.

This means that they are in charge of monitoring the progress of their projects and inform engineers about any unexpected situations that may affect the quality of their work. The effect may lead to poor quality work or delayed completion of projects.

In addition, it advocates for meetings between contractors and engineers to ensure they have adequate time to discuss issues that may affect the quality of projects. These meetings may be planned by either of them to ensure they present their views on ways of reducing costs of managing the effects of the external environment that may affect the quality or duration of a project (Henshaw 2012).

These meetings should be held immediately the concerned parties notice that there are issues that must be addressed. It is necessary to explain that projects are very delicate and thus there is the need for contractors and engineers to pay attention to their proceedings. This will ensure all situations are monitored and appropriate changes made as soon as they are noticed.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moreover, the contract allows the engineer to request his contractor to make changes to a project to ensure the quality of their work is not compromised. Engineers are supposed to make recommendations and specify the time within which corrections are supposed to be done (Otis 2009).

For instance, if an engineer suspects the quality of material or design is inappropriate in a given area, he has the right to request the contractor to make changes within specified period that should not exceed five days unless under extreme conditions. These provisions promote healthy relationships between contractors and engineers and ensure their projects are completed within specified time. In addition, they help in eliminating misunderstanding between these parties and ensure there is adequate dialogue whenever conflicts arise.

Protection of Privacy The contract highlights the need for the contractor, engineer and other stakeholders to provide the necessary information required to ensure a project succeeds. This means that withholding useful information from other parties is an offence that may attract prosecution and termination of contract (Salacuse 2014). Therefore, all parties are supposed to evaluate the role and importance of their information to the success of their projects.

However, there are some issues that are not bound by this provision. This means that the parties have the right to keep or share some information depending on their assessment of their appropriateness in the success of a project (Sears 2010). First, the contractor or engineer has no right of using the personal information of another party for reasons other than the ones it was requested for. This means that the personal information provided during a contract period is used within a specified time and not after the completion of a project.

In addition, the state will collect personal information from an individual when it is necessary to do so and if the intention is within the scope of a project and its contract. Individuals have a right to have their personal information kept in secret and disclosed after they are consulted and agree on the issue (Adrian 2014). All information stored in state offices should be protected from unauthorised access and disposed according the appropriate procedures.

Flexibility of Proceedings The clause advocates for timely communication between contractors and engineers about any changes if there are fears that any of the following is bound to happen. First, sometimes the contract price may be altered because of changes in prices of the materials used. The contractor is supposed to notify the engineer in writing and inform him about the changes and how they impact the cost of their construction (Otis 2009).

In addition, all projects usually have scheduled periods within which they must be completed. However, some issues may arise and make contractors unable to complete their projects within the stipulated time. Therefore, they are supposed to communicate with engineers to ensure they understand this situation and make arrangements to accommodate the delays. This ensures disputes between engineers and contractors are minimised.

We will write a custom Essay on Dispute Resolution Mechanisms specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In addition, all parties involved in a contract have a statutory duty of ensuring they reduce the impacts of unexpected events (Sears 2010). All stakeholders are supposed to request for a meeting to discuss proposals that will avoid or reduce the impacts of unexpected situations. Advance notices are usually given to all stakeholders to ensure the value of any variation arising from the matter is not affected.

Moreover, engineers are supposed to inform contractors if they discover any defects in a project. In addition, a five day period is allowed to remedy the situation. This allows the contractor adequate time to make appropriate changes and inform the engineers if they can manage the situation (Otis 2009). This is a reasonable way of assessing the suitability of a contractor to manage complicated tasks and if he proves to be unsuitable the engineer may hire another person to do the job.

This will not affect the project or performance of the first contractor because he will have understood the situation. These provisions are based on the fact that there are unavoidable circumstances that may cause conflicts between contractors and engineers. Therefore, the project should be flexible to ensure the effects of unexpected events are accommodated without compromising the quality of a contractor’s work.

Conclusion It is necessary to establish a healthy relationship between a contractor and engineer to ensure projects are completed within their stipulated time and are of high quality.

The privacy of the contractor or engineers’ information is important in safeguarding their rights and ensuring they work in healthy environments. Projects must be designed in ways that accommodate unexpected changes; therefore, they must be flexible to ensure they enable contractors and engineers to make changes that are aimed at improving the quality of constructions.

References Adrian, J 2014, Construction Productivity: Measurement and Improvement, Stripes Publishers, New York.

Henshaw, J 2012, A Guide to Scaffold Use in the Construction Industry: OSHA 3150 2002, CreateSpace Independent Publishing, New York.

Otis, L 2009, Construction Dispute Resolution: Leading Lawyers on Understanding the Benefits of ADR, Educating the Client, and Navigating the Effects of the Economic Downturn, Thomson West, Minnesota.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Dispute Resolution Mechanisms by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Salacuse, J 2014, The Three Laws of International Investment: National, Contractual, and International Frameworks for Foreign Capital, Oxford University Press, Oxford.

Sears, K 2010, Construction Contracting: A Practical Guide to Company Management, Wiley, New York.


The Search for Order by Robert H. Wiebe Critical Essay essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Summary

Critical Analysis



Summary Written by Robert H. Wiebe in 1967, the book, The Search for Order, is a perfect chronicle of the Americans’ search for economic, political, and social order between 1877 and 1920. The search kicked off immediately after the Reconstruction Era until 1920 just before the vagaries of the Great Depression set in.

The Reconstruction, which was occasioned by the Civil War, failed and people started looking up to themselves and this change was supported by the growing industries. This shift from government dependence to self-actualization was at the center of the controversies that followed including the introduction of the Gold Standard, the agrarians’ fallout, and the bulging need for professionalism in the country among other issues.

Theodore Roosevelt’s triumph to presidency consolidated the calls for professionalism in every aspect of the American livelihoods including politics. The First World War was a shocker to the US, which mistakenly thought it had enough diplomatic ties to control such an occurrence. The key concern in the book is the progressive movement that gripped the Americans, which seemed to be the genesis of the disorder that Wiebe seeks to address via this book.

Critical Analysis Conventionally, by exploring the undying spirit for search for order amongst Americans from the late nineteen century, Wiebe, through the law of unintended consequences, highlights the ripe disorder that defined the American society at the time. One of the critical issues that I learnt from the book is the disorder that prevailed after the abortion of the Reconstruction and the subsequent quest for restoring order in the American society.

Wiebe (1967) confesses, “Americans in a basic sense no longer knew who or what they were…The setting had altered beyond their power to understand it and within an alien context they had lost themselves” (42). As aforementioned, Americans embraced professionalism in their dealings and thus they departed from the earlier way of handling issues via moral lenses. Americans embraced officialdom and thus “the heart of progressivism was the ambition of the new middle class to fulfill its destiny through bureaucratic means” (Wiebe 1967, 166).

Unfortunately, while bureaucracy was initially meant to bring order and progression, it soon degenerated to chaos as the changing social, political, and the economic environment introduced new challenges. People wanted accountability from the government; however, this push was not strong enough following the government-engineered Reconstruction Era, which aborted miserably. People had lost faith in the same government that they wanted to be accountable.

Therefore, in the raging confusion, the very ideals highly regarded in society like anticorruption started to wane. Corruption and political persecutions found their way back into the mainstream government. Unfortunately, the masses were too disorganized to voice their issues- they had neither inner push nor reason to champion for reforms. Therefore, “with no purpose beyond disclosure and conviction and very little organized support behind them, they captured the headlines, and then disappeared” (Wiebe 1967, 172).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, as aforementioned, Wiebe’s purpose of compiling this book was to highlight how Americans realized order in a seemingly hostile and disorderly environment. Therefore, even though the author starts by highlighting a disorder, he quickly moves to the central theme and explores the journey to an ‘orderly America’. By the turn of the twentieth century, the cards were changing as allegiance shifted from politics to professionalism.

In a span of 11 years, Americans had three presidents all of which were progressives. President Theodore Roosevelt in particular was a darling to many Americans due to his liberal stand on governance. He brought order in a hitherto disorderly society grappling with the vagaries of a changing environment.

While William Taft was somehow undecided on liberal issues, by the time he rose to power, the progressives had already been established and they carried on with Roosevelt’s spirit until Wilson Woodrow won the presidency and continued with restoring the order that Theodore had initiated. By 1912-1913, the American society had achieved domestic ‘order’ and so they started pushing for foreign policy and investments overseas.

Unfortunately, as aforementioned, the outbreak of the First World War was a shocker to the Americans as their teething diplomatic ties were thrown into disarray and the disorder moved from domestic to the international arena. However, Wiebe is only concerned with the domestic order and as he closes up the book, he notes that the 1920s brought order in the American society –an order that had been elusive for many years.

Conclusion Wiebe’s book, In Search for Order, is a masterpiece as it gives an impartial view of the American’s search for order immediately after the abortion of the Reconstruction all through to the 1920s after the First World War.

The book is thematic and Wiebe does not dwell on the disorderly era for long, but he shifts to the theme of his book. He does this by dedicating a larger part of his book to the ‘search for order’ aspect. The book is informative and from it. I learnt of the Americans’ resilient journey towards ‘order’, which they ultimately realized according to Wiebe’s chronicles.

Reference Wiebe, Robert. 1967. The Search for Order, 1877-1920. New York: Hill and Wang.

We will write a custom Book Review on The Search for Order by Robert H. Wiebe specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More


Strategic Entrepreneurship within the Current Market Dynamics Report essay help

Summary The business sector continues to undergo tremendous developments in the 21st century. With numerous technological advancements, wider market bases, higher consumer purchasing powers, and market liberalizations in many parts of the world, entrepreneurs and businesspersons continue to enjoy high profits margins from their investments.

Despite these advancements, the resulting business environment becomes competitive with increased risks, inadequate forecasting abilities, emerging structural systems, and fluid firms as well as industrial boundaries. All these factors compel management teams in business firms and franchises to engage in innovative ideas that can withstand the new business landscape intertwined in dynamism, complexity, chaos, and contradictions.

Formulation of plans plays an imperative role in effective management of business opportunities. It is from these strategic management plans that leadership structures in any business entity develop the ways of maximizing the opportunities, while reducing the risks associated with the threats and weaknesses evident in the venture.

Plans and objectives offer the engaged workforce clear goals and expectations within given periods, thus creating a hard-working labor force. This increases the chances of high productivity, hence earning more profits to the business. Strategic planning, proper management, adequate entrepreneurial skills, and efficient workforce provide the grounds for successful business set-up with the ability to enjoy competitive advantage over the rivals in the market.

Key Learning Points Strategic management is a process that guides the day-to-day activities in a business entity; it helps in continuous renewal and growth of business by providing contexts essential for development and implementation of business operations. Business entities formulate such plans by developing missions, achievable objectives, strategies, as well as setting policy guidelines (Schendel


Importance of Effective Communication in BPM Projects Research Paper college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Importance of effective communication

Choice of an effective communication method



Introduction Business project management (BPM) refers to an approach that involves synchronization of business processes and operations in order to satisfy the needs of customers (Chong, 2010). Its main role is to improve the efficiency, flexibility, and effectiveness of businesses processes through innovation and incorporation of technology. In order to achieve success during BPM projects, it is imperative to understand, develop, and apply effective and efficacious communication strategies (Chong


The Nature of the Work of Teachers Report college essay help online: college essay help online

Introduction The main aim of this research paper is to establish the nature of work of teachers and the motivation behind it. The interviewing process has been used as the data collection tool. Generally, interviews provide in-depth information pertaining to participants’ experiences and viewpoints of a particular topic (Turner, 2010, p.754).

After gathering data from a teacher through interview, the gathered data was analyzed and a comprehensive list of an average teacher profile was created. The findings from the teacher revealed that all teachers belonged to the teachers’ union, which participates in collective bargaining services on behalf of teachers with relevant authorities.

Literature Review According to Macbeath (2012, p. 77), it is almost inevitable that schools in some form will continue to exist in the foreseeable future, and it is also inevitable that teaching and learning will continue to expand to sites other than schools. This statement triggered a research study on teaching profession.

Generally, teaching is a process of monitoring learners by way of inferring emotions, beliefs and knowledge, ability to detect gaps between correct knowledge and possible incorrect students’ knowledge, the ability to communicate this knowledge to the students, and finally, having the ability to provide feedback through assessment and corrections to students (Dessus, Mandin


A Dystopian State: Astutopia Reflective Essay college essay help

Astutopia is the name of the aspired New World Order. This world aims to end global warming marked by overpopulation, which has gradually depleted the environment and associated resources. The guiding symbol is shown below; this symbol represents the land envisioned by the ruling government. This land can only be attained if everyone works hard to support the cause.

The New World Order aims at reducing the current population by half, and thereafter, it ensures balance is maintained by conducting IQ tests once in every 10 years to get rid of less smart people. The IQ tests evaluate the smartness of individuals using transmitters that are connected to the brain, and smartness is assessed based on three strikes: economic, logic and efficiency. Failure in either one of the strikes is an indicator of stupidity.

The number of newborns each year is closely monitored by the government. This New World Order ensures that the little resources left can be salvaged and used to restore the environment. It also dictates that members of one district should not interact with members of another district to prevent a revolution.

Ministry of Plenty The have-nots (not smart people) work tirelessly in accordance with the objectives of the haves (very smart). Upon completion of assigned work to the satisfaction of the haves, the have-nots are given some money, just enough to meet their basic need for food and hoping for a better future.

This hope is enough to keep them working for the good of the aristocrats. Education and hospital needs are received by only those people who show their identification cards that are issued by the smart. The parent of any child spotted without the card is thrown into the dungeons of death.

The dungeons of death are mining valleys where anyone violating the law works for the rest of his or her life until he or she dies. People in the dungeons are provided with water, and the heavy work here is intended to slowly suck all the energy from their bodies until they die. There is no communication with one another, and any slight sluggishness is met with several lashes.

Ministry of truth The dungeon of death acts as a consistent reminder of the consequences of violating any one of the teachings approved by the Ministry. The Ministry develops teachings and doctrines in favor of the ruling government, and all institutions act as propagation media. The education system reinforces the essence of the dungeons, and the aim is to instill fear within the children so they can adhere to laid down teachings and doctrines. Teachers help in the selection of very smart persons, and the birth of smart people is controlled using tubes and the IQ tests. Individuals who pass the IQ tests are allowed to give birth while those who fail work in the mines or other menial jobs like farming and cleaning.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Ministry of Love Anyone who tries to disagree with the objectives of the ruling class will be instantly killed while his or her relatives will be thrown into the dungeons of death.


Stability of governance will be reinforced using surveillance cameras that will be installed in all prohibited areas, for example, at the boundaries of districts. In addition, each district will be fitted with security lights having these surveillance cameras to monitor the conduct of people (NightWatcher).

These people will be warned of the existing cameras to make them aware that they are being watched; thus, avoid doing wrong. The government will also explain that it does not intend to punish anyone; hence, the reason for creating awareness. Aerial surveillance teams will also survey each district at predetermined times to monitor ongoing activities. Aircrafts will be installed with cameras capable of capturing an area of 36 square miles (Timberg). This technology is meant to caution citizens so they can avoid trouble.


Astutopia was born in 2050 after the land fell into a state of deprivation; there was no water, food, fuel and land due to overpopulation, according to the U.S. Census Bureau. It was important to salvage the little left; hence, the testing began. Screening was done in all districts by the elite group.

People were ranked in the order of most productive to least productive. All the people falling in the lower quarters of the list were thrown into the dungeons of death until the desired number of people remained. All departments of internal security worked collectively to ensure that no endorsed law was violated.

Using the surveillance system explained above, it will be easier to note the slightest of violations, thus ensure prompt action. The registry of persons continues to ensure that the balance in population numbers is well maintained to avoid overpopulation. The divide and rule method is used to confine people in their particular districts and avoid assembling of persons that could lead to the downfall of this Astutopia.

Own Position

This is a very daunting task because it does not line with my humane character. I was earnestly and fervidly involved in developing the concept of Astutopia, and I even played a greater part coming up with the consequences of aversion. Initially, it seemed a very interesting challenge, but upon narrowing down to the actual details of Astutopia, I felt the humanity in me being threatened. Every person played a role based on ability, but generally, everyone played an essential role to finishing the entire project.

We will write a custom Essay on A Dystopian State: Astutopia specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited “NightWatcher.” NightWatcher Security, 2011. Web.

Timberg, Craig. “New surveillance technology can track everyone in an area for several hours at a time.” The Washington Post, 6 February 2014. Web.

U.S. Census Bureau. International Database. 19 December 2013. Web.


A Sick Medicaid System Case Study college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction


Problem Definition




Introduction Low-income earners benefit from Medicaid, which provides the means to receive health care. The U.S. federal government put in place measures to ensure that all states complied with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA). The states were required to secure Medicaid records.

Different states adopted different options that they deemed fit for them. States could either update their current (legacy) systems or develop a new one. Maine developed a new system that turned disastrous (Oz, 2008).

Overview The Medicaid System was developed with an aim of assisting persons with low incomes to obtain health care services. Since the program was sponsored and funded by the government, it had to comply with some of the laws put in place concerning healthcare and other related issues. In 1996, the government enacted an Act that required healthcare providers in the states to secure Medicaid records.

Every state had to find a way of integrating their Medicaid claim systems to comply with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996. Different states adopted different options that they thought best suited them. One of the ways in which states complied with the provision was by maintaining their ‘legacy’ systems while updating them and providing a web link to the system.

However, other states (such as Maine) decided to develop a totally new system in order to comply with HIPAA and ensure that it was flexible enough to accommodate changes whenever need arose. However, the option of developing a new system proved disastrous in this case.

In the case of the Medicaid system, the states that decided to maintain their ‘legacy’ systems benefited more than those states that decided to create a new system. One of the advantages was the ability to save more money while at the same time complying with HIPAA.

Maine’s Department of Human Services (DHS) spent $70 million within six year while developing and maintaining the new system. A significant proportion of this amount went to paying CNSI.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Another advantage of not adopting a new system was the fact that there was no need for employing new staff for the development team. The IT department head of DHS knew that the team needed between 60 and 70 members in order to complete the exercise in time (1st October 2013).

The states that maintained their legacy systems did not require more staff to develop a system since all they needed was to update their current systems and link them to a website. Another advantage is the fact that there was no need for training.

Maine, which decided to develop a new system, had to train the providers how to use the new system. However, training was not done and this lead to more problems. Another advantage of using the legacy system is the fact that there was no risk of getting more errors. The new system was characterized by numerous errors.

Problem Definition One of the problems that has been identified is the development of a new system rather than maintaining the ‘legacy’ Medicaid system. However, the main problem that was associated with the failures of the new system was the lack of communication among programmers. The lack of communication led to the waste of resources including time and money.

It led to the loss of money that was required to outsource the development procedures to other companies such as CNSI. Even before the problem of lack of communication was sorted, it took a long time, which lead to disappointments among the medical practitioners.

After the issue was sorted, the DHHS director announced that the new system was working as efficiently as the old one. This was after spending millions of dollars in a system that was supposed to work better than the previous one.

Recommendations Gopal, Mukhopadhyay and Krishnan (2002) argued that communication is one of the issues that affect software project management. According to them, communication is most vital during the software development process. Communication and coordination is required in order to ensure that there is improved performance.

We will write a custom Case Study on A Sick Medicaid System specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For this case, Maine’s DHS should have ensured that there was proper communication between the state’s programmers and those of CNSI. They worked on different parts and yet did not consult each other. For this reason, the different parts of the system conflicted and created numerous errors. After the nomination of a physician to head the unit, things worked for the better.

Miller and Luse (2004) also identified that communication was important among information systems staff and other users and managers in order to ensure that the projects are successfully developed. They pointed out that ineffective communication led to the failing of IS projects.

Conclusion Communication is vital for the success of any organization especially when it comes to the information systems staff. They require coordinating with other users and managers in order to ensure that systems are successfully developed (Miller


Marketing Strategy and Organizational Effectiveness in Samsung Essay best college essay help

Samsung is one of the largest electronics companies in the world. The firm’s brand is recognized in many parts of the world and this has strengthened the value of its products in various global markets. In the mid 1990’s, several management initiatives helped the firm to improve the value of its products in the market. The firm’s management positioned it as a global brand which helped the firm to build a strong corporate image.

During that period, the firm had more than 10 popular products in the market which had strong customer loyalty in different markets. The firm’s rise as a global brand was made easy after it had withstood the Asian financial crisis of 1997.

It managed to turn around its operations which helped it register positive results in less than five years (Khanna, Song and Lee 142). This paper will discuss how Samsung can improve its performance in the market.

Samsung needs to come up with more competitive strategies to help it deal with the changing market environment. The technology industry is experiencing a lot of changes, which require Samsung to develop new strategies to maintain its competitive edge in the market. Samsung has managed to become one of the largest mobile device manufacturers in the world, surpassing Nokia and other firms.

This is because of its focus on high –end smart phones which have superior technological functions compared to substitute models manufactured by its competitors. The firm needs to look at ways of extending its influence into other markets.

This is because U.S. and European markets have been projected to experience a slump in consumption patterns in the near future (Khanna, Song and Lee 142). The firm needs to formulate new ways of increasing the value of its products in the market to overcome high competition from low priced substitutes.

The firm lacks a strong recognized brand which can be compared to Sony’s Walkman or Microsoft’s Windows. The firm’s recent focus on smart phones and L.E.D. television sets has made it stand out as a learning organization, which is ready to take a leading position in the technology industry.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The firm needs to develop a long term value proposition in the market by developing an easily recognizable brand to help it strengthen its market position. Samsung needs to capitalize on emotions of its global customers by giving them a signature product which is capable of making them appreciate other products, manufactured by the firm (Khanna, Song and Lee 143).

A strong and easy to recognize brand will have a positive effect on other products which are manufactured by the firm. This will increase the value attached to them by consumers thereby making them more competitive in the market.

Some products which are released by the firm into the market have achieved a mature life cycle within a very short time. This puts more pressure on the firm to release newer versions of similar products into the market.

It is necessary for the firm to put in place measures that can help it take advantage of opportunities in lower segments of the market; since the upper income market segments will continue to experience slow growth in revenues. It is projected that the middle and low segments will continue to expand and this will open up potential opportunities for profitability in the firm.

The firm needs to reinvent itself to capture lucrative global markets to help it experience more success in its operations (Khanna, Song and Lee 145). It also needs to embrace cross cultural management strategies to help it maintain a competitive edge in different global markets.

Samsung has a diversified business portfolio and this has made it easy for the firm’s management to implement several innovative practices in its operations. It managed to compete favorably against Japanese companies by shifting away from analog to digital technologies in the late 1990’s.

Therefore, the firm needs to maintain its strength in manufacturing by building strategic alliances with other global firms, to help it strengthen its value proposition in the market. These strategic alliances will be crucial in helping the firm improve the quality of relationships it has with its customers.

We will write a custom Essay on Marketing Strategy and Organizational Effectiveness in Samsung specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Samsung needs to take note of the business environment it operates in. Samsung needs to ensure that its operations satisfy different market needs which are served by its wide product range (Khanna, Song and Lee 146).This will help the firm to understand different consumer segments and their needs.

The firm’s processes are highly innovative and this has helped the firm to introduce revolutionary concepts into the market. The firm has a good product mix and it needs to extend the market’s attention to other high quality products which it manufactures. A lot of interest in the firm’s products in the market is focused on its mobile devices and L.E.D television products.

The firm produces high quality washing machines, refrigerators, microwaves and other household products, which have the ability to bring in more revenues if they are marketed well. The firm needs to increase its market share in household appliances because these products have a longer life cycle in the market compared to mobile devices and L.E.D TV’s.

The market for home appliances is not as competitive as other market segments which the firm operates in (Khanna, Song and Lee 147). It needs to market these products in selected markets more aggressively to improve its performance in the market.

Samsung can use various management models to improve its performance in the market. The firm needs to adopt Management By Objectives model to improve its internal and external business processes. The MBO model will help Samsung’s management to focus on goals which are easy to achieve to help the firm improve its financial results.

The firm’s management needs to track issues that have an impact on its survival in the market, to come up with radical proposals which address them. The MBO approach gives the firm a chance to formulate strategic plans and performance indicators, which help to monitor its operations in the market (Bradley 81).

The MBO model will enable the firm’s management to analyze results of various product categories it sells in the market, to assess their value to its operations.

The firm also needs to carry out a value proposition analysis for its target markets and consumer segments. This will help the firm’s management to analyze what motivates specific consumers to purchase its products and the value they get from using these products.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Marketing Strategy and Organizational Effectiveness in Samsung by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The firm needs to come up with new production systems to help it achieve long term organizational goals (Bradley 79). The value proposition analysis should take note of resources, which the firm has set aside to help it achieve its long term goals.

Works Cited Bradley, Nigel. Marketing Research: Tools and Techniques. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2007. Print.

Khanna, Tarun, Jaeyong Song, and Kyungmook Lee. “The Paradox of Samsung’s Rise.” Harvard Business Review (July- August 2011): 142-147. Web.


Company Metadata and Master Data Management Research Paper essay help free

Metadata is a type of data that is factual and that acts as extra information through which organizational data is presented. The data is concealed in a document, attached and created in a computer file. It can take the form of revised history and comments between a document and the editors such as in the case of word processing in Microsoft Word. Metadata can be described in terms of how data is formatted.

It is divided into two; structured and descriptive metadata. Structured metadata involves the plan and pattern of data structures, while descriptive metadata is where an individual creates data content. Metadata can be used in describing digital data in a specific discipline, and by relating the information and the context of the data files (Baca, 2008).

There are various security issues related to metadata. One such issue is the possibility of information leakage, an aspect that could easily damage an organization.

A patient or any other unauthorized personnel may, for example, illegally access a patient’s health information and that related to other sensitive details, a situation that is not only harmful to the client, but to the hospital as well. To prevent leakage of such information, there is need to use data loss and leakage prevention technologies. This is the easiest way of ensuring that data stored is kept safe and confidential (Baca, 2008).

Data Loss prevention is widely known for closely monitoring endpoints, networks and data sources for accidental outflow of susceptible information. Metadata can be integrated in several ways. An organization can, for example, start by evaluating where priorities exist like in terms of the various stakeholders involved through data integration.

Additionally, the BI Metadata Repository Manager system can be used to come up with a write protect documents that gives access to other links online where one can get a document in a HTML format, based on metadata.

Another way in which metadata can be integrated is in corporate metadata that assists in saving time and money while creating metadata. This method increases the quality of information delivered from data warehouse to business users, and leads to better decisions being made based on the information provided (Vitt, Luckevich


Girls Uncovered: Book Analysis Analytical Essay best essay help: best essay help

“Girls Uncovered: New Research on What America’s Sexual Culture Does to Young Women” is a book that champions the need for young women to preserve their purity. The book reiterates that girls need to take control of their sexual conduct for them to be able to enjoy a fulfilling womanhood. The book is very relevant especially in an era where heightened sexual activity dominates teenagers’ lives.

“Girls Uncovered” is authored by Freda Bush and Joe Mcilhaney. Both authors are pediatricians and they have substantial experience when it comes to raising girls. This book is written as a guide for parents who are in the process of raising daughters.

The book offers statistical and research-based evidence that enables parents to give their daughters advice that is relevant to the current sexual culture. The authors successfully delve into the sex topic in a straightforward manner. The book’s main goal is to present the benefits of abstinence to young girls, and show how this abstinence can be achieved.

The opening chapters of “Girls Uncovered” cover statistics that concern the aspirations of young girls. According to the authors, most girls express the need to have a stable marriage and a career when they grow up. The book continues by showing how engaging in early sex can have detrimental effects on these aspirations.

Among the adverse effects of premarital sex that are discussed in this book include; sexually transmitted diseases, physical scars, emotional scars, and teenage pregnancies. The authors focus on all these factors in detail except for abortion, which is barely mentioned in the book.

In addition, the authors take time to address some of the common misconceptions about sex. For instance, the authors fault the notion that girls and boys are affected in the same way by premarital sex. The book covers the emotional, hormonal, mental, physical, and psychological aspects of premarital sex.

One of the strong points of this book is that the authors stress on the need for parental involvement when raising daughters. According to the authors, girls are more likely to be misguided than boys are1. This is why girls need the input of both a father and a mother when it comes to receiving advice. The advocacy of parental responsibilities is the hallmark of this book.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The role played by a complete set of parents in a girl’s life is emphasized in this book. The involvement of parents in a girl’s life can be assumed to apply to boys also. The fact that the authors focus on girls as their main subject nullifies the need to mention the role parents play in a boy’s life. The book nobly urges parents to assume a meaningful position in their children’s lives.

This concept seems foreign to several modern parents. Most modern parents are eager to delegate this role to teachers and nannies. This book does not advocate for tyrannical parenting but it champions for willful involvement by parents. The authors are also able to avoid portraying this involvement in a ‘legalistic’ manner. However, parents are urged to take genuine interest in the lives of their female offspring.

For instance, the authors suggest the use of honest and open communication. In addition, parents are required to respect the unique needs of their daughters during this interaction. The authors are able to sustain this tone throughout the book and this makes the book more solid.

The book’s chapter on emotional attachment is particularly interesting. In this chapter, the book makes reference to a hormone known as oxytocin. According to the authors, oxytocin is a hormone that is responsible for the bonding that occurs between mother and child2. The authors note that this hormone is also produced during sexual encounters.

This means that the concept that a sexual encounter can exclude emotional connection is a fallacy. This chapter cautions the ‘hook-up’ generation against trivializing sexual encounters. For example, the book lists several emotional miscommunications that can result from casual sexual encounters.

The emotional attachment subject stands out because it contradicts the manner in which sex is portrayed especially by the new media. Televisions and films often depict sex as a casual fixation that is not related to emotions.

There are very few weaknesses in this book because the authors have done a good job in presenting a solid argument. The few issues that surface in this book are almost negligible. First, the book’s title bears some weaknesses. For instance, the title does not assume a proper book-title version. The long nature of the title is more befitting for an academic paper than it is for a book.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Girls Uncovered: Book Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A shorter and more precise title like “America’s Sexual Culture: Impact on Young Women” would have made a more significant impact. In addition, “Girls Uncovered” sounds more like an obscene film parody. Conducting an internet search using this title proves this point further. The other weakness is that the book tends to be a bit repetitive. The authors seem to be trying to fit a little information in a big space.

This makes the book repetitive in a few instances. For instance, some chapters are longer than they should be. This repetitiveness makes the readers feel as if they are in another boring parental seminar. The authors should have protected the integrity of the book by ensuring that they get straight to the point without elongating issues.

American parents are bombarded with various issues that have to be put into account when raising teenagers. There is a lot of information pertaining to parenting of teenagers and parents sometimes have trouble navigating through it. For instance, the media is filled with psychologists who claim to have the answer to effective teenage parenting.

However, the practical application of these theories often falls short of parents’ expectations. This is especially true for parents who have to raise girls. The authors of this book advocate for abstinence. Most girls’ parents in America have given up on abstinence and they have instead chosen to pursue alternatives such as teaching their daughters safe sex methods.

Other parents have accepted that the modern world cannot accommodate abstinence. These defeatist attitudes have dominated American parenting. “Girls Uncovered” presents research of what the defeatist attitude produces. Some parents do not even bother trying to pursue the abstinence option. The authors outline the various benefits that come with abstinence as an incentive to the complacent parents.

In America, it is almost impossible to separate abstinence from religion. Most people are of the opinion that the only reason girls abide to abstinence is because a particular religion forces them to do so. The link between religion and abstinence is also solidified by the fact that the abstinence message is often carried by pastors and other church leaders.

However, there is a difference between the abstinence message contained in this book and the one that is usually conveyed by religious leaders. Religious leaders urge girls to uphold abstinence and earn heavenly rewards. The message in this book is that girls should uphold abstinence and reap its benefits almost instantly.

Therefore, girls who have no interest in religion always mistake the abstinence message to be part of the gospel and they are likely to dismiss it. It is up to religious leaders to change the tone of their message. Their message should start with the instant benefits outlined in this book and then finish with the big picture.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Girls Uncovered: Book Analysis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The religious message should show that it benefits both the body and the soul to pursue abstinence. In addition, the message should not be confined to churches but it should also be spread out to other areas in the community.

This book can be instrumental in instilling a sense of accomplishment among its girl-readers. Most girls often feel like they are ‘missing out’ by practicing abstinence. However, the authors detail very realistic benefits that come from abstinence. Emotional health is very closely related to spiritual health.

This means that readers of this book will grow spiritually after having to grow psychologically and emotionally. Disciples of Christ need all the emotional growth they can get in order to get them to grow spiritually.

This book has the potential to benefit various groups of readers. Parents and young girls are most likely to find this book helpful. The authors of this book are able to demystify the American sexual culture and propose a complete overhaul of the culture.

The book also acts as a morale boost for those girls who have chosen to abstain from sexual activities. Among the various issues that need to be changed in the American society, sexual culture is the most urgent one.

Bibliography Mcilhhaney, Joe, and Freda Bush. Girls Uncovered: New Research on What America’s Sexual Culture Does to Young Women. New York: Moody Publishers, 2012.

Footnotes 1 Joe Mcilhhaney and Freda Bush, Girls Uncovered: New Research on What America’s Sexual Culture Does to Young Women (New York: Moody Publishers, 2012), 18-19.

2 Joe Mcilhhaney and Freda Bush, Girls Uncovered: New Research on What America’s Sexual Culture Does to Young Women (New York: Moody Publishers, 2012), 70-71.


The CLASS Act: Analysis Essay essay help online free

The CLASS Act was part and parcel of the 2010 PPA that was enacted by the government with the aim of boosting the healthcare concerns of the working Americans. It was purely administered by the government. The Act was voluntary and it aimed at proving healthcare benefit on areas such as severe cognitive impairment, disability, and long term physical illnesses.

This healthcare benefit was supposed to cover the entire life of the applicant. According to the argument put forward by the Congressional Budget Office (CBO), the CLASS Act was supposed to lower the federal budget. However, the Act has not solved the issue of long term care so far.

To begin with, the estimates provided by CBO were not accurate. This concern was raised by the Congress even before PPACA was endorsed. For example, there was double counting of the premiums that were collected.

The CLASS Act has failed to take care of long term care because it did not secure the funds needed to settle the benefits of the program. It misconstrued the latter with the cost of expanding PPACA entitlements (Brown


Creating partnership: Enterprise Resource Planning Coursework essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Complexities of measuring ROI in an inter-organizational systems implementation

Decision making in an inter-organizational systems implementation is a continuous process that involves many stakeholders. Since the decision makers possess different experiences, measuring ROI becomes a complex process. It becomes difficult in choosing the most effective methods for measuring ROI and risks involved in the system are more due to lack of certainty (Gable, 2003).

When decision makers are many, they are likely to have different opinions, which have to be considered. The problem of diversity also arises because varied loyalties from organizations that collaborate with each other have to be respected, which adds complexity to the system implementation.

In addition, some partners may not be willing to present essential information and when they avail it, it lacks credibility in measurement of ROI making the implementation process more complex (Parr


The Traffic in Women: Notes on the “Political Economy” of Sex Analytical Essay college application essay help: college application essay help

In her essay The Traffic in Women: Notes on the “Political Economy” of Sex, Gayle Rubin strived to outline factors that contribute to the fact that even today, women continue to be subjected to different forms of a societal/patriarchal oppression.

While doing it, she made a deliberate point in mentioning a number of discursively relevant theories that provide a partial insight into what may be considered the dialectically predetermined reasons for the earlier mentioned situation to continue remaining an integral part of today’s socio-political realities.

In my paper, I will outline the major qualitative aspects of the author’s line of reasoning (in regards to the theories of Marx, Levy-Strauss and Freud). I will also argue that, contrary to what Rubin implies throughout the essay’s entirety, there is indeed a certain rationale in referring the notion of women’s patriarchal oppression, as such that has been biologically rather than ideologically/socially predetermined.

The first major theoretician of gender inequality, to which Rubin refers in her essay, is Karl Marx. Although, in his writing he never tackled the subject matter explicitly, he nevertheless did succeed in exposing Capitalism, as such that indirectly contributes to the ‘domestication’ of women.

The validity of this idea Rubin illustrates in regards to the discursive implications of the Marxist view on of the generation of the so-called ‘surplus product/value’, as such that ‘fuels’ the free-market economy’s proper functioning. As the author noted: “If the total value of the things the worker has made exceeds the value of his or her wage, the aim of capitalism has been achieved.

The capitalist gets back the cost of die wage, plus an increment-surplus value” (161). This, of course, presupposes that, in order for capitalists to increase the amount of ‘surplus output’, generated by hired employees, the latter must be exploited in the most effective manner.

In its turn, this explains the phenomenon of the so-called ‘corporate culture’, when workers are being instilled with the sense of loyalty towards their exploiters, and the fact that women are assigned to take care of housework-duties, without being paid.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More By acting as unpaid ‘housewives’, women allow their husbands to concentrate more on their career-advancement (as a reward for their increased ability to generate more ‘surplus product’).

This, however, naturally results in women’s continual ‘dehumanization’, as their status of ‘housewives’ (euphemism for the notion of lowly female servants) automatically imply their lessened intellectual abilities. Thus, Marxist theory suggests that it is specifically Capitalism, as the form of a socio-political governing, which creates objective preconditions for women to continue suffering from a patriarchal oppression.

Nevertheless, Rubin rightly suggested that this point of view cannot be referred to as such that represents an undisputed truth-value.

The reason for this is apparent – there are plenty of examples of women having been subjected to the different forms of a patriarchal oppression not only in Capitalist, but also in pre-Capitalist and Socialist societies: “Women are oppressed in societies which can by no stretch of the imagination be described as capitalist” (163).

The validity of this suggestion Rubin illustrates in regards to the theory of Levy-Strauss, who views the oppression women as a byproduct of male-dominated societies striving to ensure their structural integrity.

For example, in the tribal societies of Polynesian natives, it represents a commonplace practice for males who seek to attain a social prominence by bestowing gifts upon each other – even though that the act of a gift-giving is not being even slightly justified, in the economic sense of this word.

By indulging in this practice, natives are able to strengthen the extent of their ‘kinship’ with each other, which in turn makes it easier for them to face life-challenges.

We will write a custom Essay on The Traffic in Women: Notes on the “Political Economy” of Sex specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More According to Levy-Strauss, the fact that the practice of incest is being traditionally considered utterly inappropriate is best explained within the discursive framework of a ‘gift-giving culture’ – it is exactly because by marrying men outside of their own family/tribe, women establish kinship-ties with potential would-be-enemies, which explains the origins of an anti-incest sentiment in just about every human society.

It is needless to mention, of course, that by being objectualized as ‘gifts’, women inevitably end up facing a patriarchal oppression, because the very practice of their earlier mentioned objectualization deems women inferior to men: “If women are the gifts, then it is men who are the exchange partners. And it is the partners, not the presents, upon whom reciprocal exchange confers its quasi-mystical power of social linkage” (174).

Nevertheless, because Levy-Strauss’s theory suggests that the ‘exchange of women’ is the necessary prerequisite for the emergence of culture, it automatically implies that without such an exchange, there would no human civilization, as we know it – a rather controversial idea.

After all; whereas, people’s strong affiliation with the ‘women exchange’ practice reflects the sheer extent of their existential primitiveness (the measure of their closeness to apes), their capacity to push forward scientific and cultural progress is being reflective of their ability to suppress ‘monkey’ within.

This is exactly the reason why it is namely in Western scientifically and culturally advanced societies, where women are entitled to the same scope of civil rights and liberties, as men are.

In her essay, Rubin also made numerous references to the Freud’s theory of psychoanalysis, as such that provides a psychological insight into what causes women to experience deep-seated anxieties of inferiority, which in turn make them more likely to end up being mistreated.

According to Freud, the actual cause of these anxieties is the fact that, throughout the course of their lives, women never cease experiencing the sensation of ‘penis envy’: “The girl turns from the mother and represses the ‘masculine’ elements of her libido…

She compares her tiny clitoris to the larger penis, and in the face of its evident superior ability to satisfy the mother, falls prey to penis envy and a sense of inferiority” (187). It is quite clear that the psychoanalytic view of the subject matter implies the essentially biological roots of women’s patriarchal oppression.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Traffic in Women: Notes on the “Political Economy” of Sex by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However, this is something that Rubin cannot accept, which is why throughout her essay, the author continues to imply that the extent of just about theory’s (the tackles the issue of women’s oppression) validity reflects its spokespersons’ willingness to refrain from succumbing to ‘biological determinism’.

For example, while referring to the theory of Levy-Strauss, Rubin states: “The ‘exchange of women’ is a seductive and powerful concept. It is attractive in that it places the oppression of women within social systems, rather than biology” (175). Yet, it is specifically the conceptual framework of biology, within which the issue of women’s oppression should be discussed.

We need to understand that, biologically speaking, the representatives of Homo Sapiens sub-species are nothing but hairless primates. In the societies of primates, males dominate – the very laws of nature predetermined such a state of affairs.

This is the reason why, contrary to what many feminists believe, throughout the humankind’s history, there has not been even a single example of women having exercised the de facto matriarchal dominance within the society.

As Henslin pointed out: “The anthropological record shows that all societies for which evidence exists are (or were) patriarchies… Stories about long-lost matriarchies (societies in which women-as-a-group dominate men-as-a-group) are myths” (297).

Nevertheless, this is not only the result of the fact that, as compared to women, men are physically stronger – the very biological constitution of female bodies makes the representatives of the ‘weak gender’ to be differently ‘brain-wired’. The reason for this is apparent – as compared to what it happened to be the case with men’s ‘external’ genitals, women’s genitals are ‘internal’.

It is its turn, this causes women to exist in the state of a constant sexual tension – unlike men, women are quite incapable of detaching their rational psyche from the physiologically predetermined workings of their bodies. Because of that, female whole bodies can be well conceptualized in terms of a sexual organ (this is why women get easily aroused, because of having clearly non-sexual parts of their bodies, such as hands, touched by men).

Whereas, men’s sexual arousal is best compared to a skin-itch, which disappears after having been scratched, women’s sexual arousal is best compared to a skin-rash, which only gets worse while scratched. In its turn, this creates objective preconditions for women to be able to realize the full extent of their existential potential only through socialization (preferably sexual) with men.

As Weininger noted: “A woman does not value herself by the constancy and freedom of her personality… (she) can only value herself at the rate of the man who has fixed his choice on her” (123).

This presupposes women’s comfortableness with being objectualized – hence, establishing a metaphysical ground for women to continue facing patriarchal oppression. The above-statement also exposes the conceptual erroneousness of political philosophies that promote the idea that it is possible to enforce gender-egalitarianism.

Works Cited Henslin, James. Sociology: A Down to Earth Approach. Upper Saddle River: Pearson, 2011. Print.

Rubin, Gayle. “The Traffic in Women: Notes on the “Political Economy” of Sex.” Toward an Anthropology of Women. Ed. Rayna Reiter. New York and London: Monthly Review Press, 1975. 157-210. Print.

Weininger, Otto 1906, Sex


A Case for Global Ethics Essay college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Defining Ethics

Why Global Set Ethics are needed

The Global Ethics

Can the Global Community agree on the Ethics?

Setting the Ethics




Introduction Globalization is changing the world into a close-knit society where people of differing nationalities and cultural backgrounds interact on a frequent basis and engage in actions that influence them. Ferrell and Fraedrich (2009) note that because of these interactions, there have been numerous attempts made to establish a set of global ethical standards.

This attempts have been prompted by the realization that global ethic will encourage good business practices in all countries. However, the goal of achieving a set of global ethics is yet to be realized and some scholars have even argued that this goal is utopian. According to them, universal ethical standards cannot be achieved because of the cultural differences that exist across the globe.

These opponents also argue that global ethics might not be the most desirable since conditions vary between nations. This paper will argue that global set ethics are required and they would promote standard ethical behaviour all over the globe. The paper will highlight what this ethics would be and demonstrate that it is possible for people around the world to agree on such set ethics.

Defining Ethics Ethical scholars and philosophers have always held the view that ethics are important for the establishment of a well functioning society. According to Smilja (2011), ethics imply “social codes that point to a particular behaviour or restrict it” (p.397).

Ethics are of great importance in the decision making process of individuals since they prescribe a legitimate and illegitimate behaviour. A clear set of ethics enables people to determine what conducts the society will judge as “right” or “wrong” and therefore engage in the most socially appropriate behaviour.

While ethical norms are easy to come up with in a homogenous society, the case is not the same for a multicultural community since each culture has its own particular beliefs, values, and ethical systems, which may not be compatible with those of other cultures.

Evanoff (2010) elaborates that ethical beliefs are culturally constructed and this explains the differences in ethical systems across cultures. In spite of this, it is both necessary and possible for people from different cultural backgrounds to agree on a set of ethics that they can uphold.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Why Global Set Ethics are needed Multicultural interactions are more likely to happen today than at any other point in human history. It is therefore necessary for people to have an ethical system that can guide their interaction and assist in dealing with problems of mutual concern. The rapid development of transportation and technology has converted the world into a global village.

In addition to that, interaction among people of differing nationalities is more prevalent today than at any other time in history (Chryssides


European consumer policy and regulation in contrast to the United Kingdom Synthesis Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Introduction The consumer protection policy refers to the stipulated mechanism which gives the consumer the freedom to shop and enjoy various products within their establishments. For instance, the European Union (EU) policy and regulation offers freedom to customers or consumers linked to the European Community to operate freely and shop anywhere and to enjoy protection and price advantage and the supply of quality goods to them.

Vulnerable consumers refer to those that are exposed to unfair pricing systems, low quality products, limited consumer rights, inadequate access to information and the repression of speech. Vulnerable consumers may include normal buyers, organizations or individuals who are exposed to unfair consumer practices from the supplier, dealers, government or the representative unions.

According to the Consumer Protection Strategy of 2007 to 2013, the primary role of consumer protection is to enhance equal classes of protection and security within the EU. It also facilitates a rich integrated domestic market.

According to the EU, the objective of a good customer protection approach includes the ability to empower the consumer through the creation of a transparent market which can supply the consumer with a wide spectrum of options in terms of quality of prices of commodities. It is also the objective of the policy to safeguard the consumer from all risks and threats.

The Consumer Policy Strategy focuses on different priority areas that include favorable consumer protection policy, fair oversight of consumer market and state consumer policies, facilitating consumer policy through the establishment of market regulation tools and placing of customers at the helm of other EU policies.

The strategic policy is expected to inform and educate the consumers through integration of the practices of the EU centers. The UK, a member of the EU is bound by the directive of the domestic UK law.

The consumer protection claims are handled when the complaints are forwarded to the director general who deals with fair trade. It is however not easy for consumers to complain straight to the OFT1 and they have to employ a middleman. This study evaluates the European and UK policies of consumer protection. The essay will focus on the impact of fair, favorable or unfavorable policies on the consumers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Background Consumer protection constitutes laws and rules organized to facilitate consumers’ rights protection and ensure fair trade. It is also the role of the policy to safeguard the weak and vulnerable consumers. Consumers who cannot take care of themselves or who are afraid to take a step of claiming their rights have the advantage of obtaining anchorage from the consumer policy and regulation approaches.

The policy not only protects the consumers but also enlightens them on the various rights and existence of consumer support agencies. The agencies include Consumer Protection Organization, Federal Trade Commission, ombudsmen, business consultancies and government organizations.

A consumer2 is a person who procures goods and services for consumption or direct ownership. His aim is to keep or use the service or goods and not sell them.

Vulnerable clients When a consumer is weak or not equipped enough to fight for his or her rights in respect to commodity prices; he or she is said to be vulnerable. Exploitative policies among the various nations under the EU have subjected consumers to inflation and sub-standard products and services for a long time. Efficient and effective legislation safeguards consumers against health risks and risks related to unnecessary expenses.

Weak consumers cannot file their complaints when faced with inappropriate services and low quality products from sellers and manufacturers. They are forced to buy and use what to them is substandard and inconvenient but due to the need for the particular commodity, they are forced to succumb to the demand and go on procuring it.

The EU3 and UK policies both outline measures for the consumer protection but not all are put into consideration especially when the issues are related to health, ethics and quality production.

Other types of vulnerable consumers comprise of those informed individuals who are always ready to fight and express their concerns but lack the intervention of a ‘middleman’ or somebody who can represent them in the judicial system or at the high office for immediate action.

We will write a custom Essay on European consumer policy and regulation in contrast to the United Kingdom specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Vulnerable consumers4 may also include the normal buyers who buy essential commodities like food and clothing even if the prices are compromised. They are highly taxed and tend to pay extremely high to acquire the product differently from other consumers from different locations who use the same product.

The consumers may need to complain but the communication channels may be “blocked” by certain interested parties. The conditions can also become oppressive and inconvenient because of little intervention from the observers and other agencies under the EU. The observers can be government agencies, foreign experts and rights’ protection facilities.

Regulation and consumer policy Proper regulation and consumer protection help both the consumer and the market to work more efficiently. The policies are usually concerned with advertising, complaints, mergers and competition, transparency, fairness and consumers’ rights. The consumer protection policy and regulation in Europe and the UK5 prioritize advertising as a move towards the creation of a competitive and fair market.

The advertising clause serves to improve information quality by maintaining responsible and appropriate standards. The EU Consumer Policy works towards enhancing the consumers’ concerns at the EU level and various issues are addressed through legislative processes. The clause on mergers ensures that all issues are evaluated in the merger or through competitive enquiries.

The principle of consumer regulation is usually responsible for facilitating sensible industrial regulation and evaluation with focus on ensuring consumer s’ rights regulation. The clause on super complaints deals with market failure and makes informed decisions by using the power of the super complaint network.

The consumer’s product safety approach assures the consumers the safety of given products and the authority to question safety standards and deceptive operations of the market.

The European consumer policy and regulation The European consumer policy and regulation is a destination approach in terms of performance, structure and evaluation. The strategic approach focuses on the consumers’ rights in the market mechanisms. It stresses on a number of considerations. The approach considers the clause on fair consumer protection and regulation to be an efficient one in safeguarding consumers’ interests.

In this case, the Council Commission focuses on simplifying the laws by amending the major directives on consumer protection. The commission’s responsibilities constitute the publishing and making of a Green Paper Publication on the evaluation of consumers’ protection. The commission necessitates harmonization towards an improved trend and facilitates an effective consumer protection strategy.

Not sure if you can write a paper on European consumer policy and regulation in contrast to the United Kingdom by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The approach by the European agency focuses on favorable redress and enforcement of the consumer protection laws. The consumer is mandated to monitor the state enforcement systems through surveying and close examining their performance. For an effective, fair and open market, the European consumer policy6 and regulation focuses on the fair evaluation of the consumer market.

It also monitors the national consumer policy. Market surveillance has been enforced through employment of devices such as RAPEX (Rapid Alert System) and also through cooperation from USA, China and other countries working together with the EU in ensuring the continued maintenance of consumer safety. The policy and regulation approach has always prioritized consumer protection.

The commission’s responsibility is to ensure that the consumers access health, transport and industrial facilities. It also ensures that all products of general interest and global service at the EU level are protected. Education is crucial for the consumer and the European commission on consumer protection policy and regulation because it promotes information, sound decision making and awareness in the consumer.

The commission finances the initiative aimed at providing information to prospective consumers like actions by the European Consumer Center Network (ECC-Net). The commission also participates in campaigns in newly established member states. The consumer policy strategy of 2007 to 2013 aims at uniting the 27 national domestic markets to form the biggest retail market internationally.

In the wave of the latest expansion, Eurostat targets 495 million EU inhabitants. The prospects of e-commerce are not fully exploited. The consumer strategy is yet to be formulated by the commission. Reports on consumer expenditure show 58% rise in the EU’s GDP.

Many considerations have in the past been made by the commission but at the moment, all units represented can be able to enjoy the advantage of the retail market with vulnerable groups especially the elderly risking being penalized.

The Green Paper Review on consumer acquisition stipulates that the operational consumer protection laws are based on little harmonization and permit member states to adopt a better formulated legislation. The Green Paper unveiled a public consultation forum which was later terminated in 2007.The forum focused on reviewing the consumer acquisition policy.

The forum proposed three options for the purpose of harmonization. The first option involved full harmonization of the policies on consumer protection. The second option incorporated little harmonization supported by a symbiotic recognition clause.

The third option integrated harmonization which involved the establishment of firms in the various member states; all complying with the rules and regulations applied in their states. The Green Paper proposes the reviewing of the main directives on consumer protection and the establishment of new consumer credit directives. The paper also adopted the drafts of two evaluation reports.

One was a directive on financial services and the other was about general product safety. The Commission for Health and Consumer Safety operates under the docket of the European Commission. The present commissioner’s post is occupied by Toni Brag. This docket is responsible for issues of public and animal health, food safety and the consumers’ welfare functions.

The policy by the commission on the promotion of warnings on smoking of tobacco has been an effective market approach towards public health stimulation. Progress has been realized and the commission has been able to address the issue of pictorial warnings. This fact has enabled a majority of the European nations to impose bans on public smoking.

This legislation was proposed by Marcos Kyprianon, head of Barossa Commission on the subject of health and consumer protection. In 2007, Commissioner Marcos unveiled a project that handled the short supply of “organs’ donation” within the EU. This plan involved promotion, donor cells and specially informed medical staff.

The various commissioners with remarkable adjustments include Richard Barco from Ireland (Jenkins Commission), Stanley Clinton from the UK (Delver Commission i), Grigoris Wafts from Greece (Deloris Commission ii), Christian Scrivener from France (Deloris Commission ii), Emma Boning from Italy (Santer Commission), David Bryne from Ireland (Pride Commission and John Dali from Malta (Barossa Commission).

The present portfolio of clauses and acts involves the president, vice president , director general of the agencies and legislative personnel.

The assembly portfolio involves agriculture and rural development, climate actions, competition panels, development schemes, digital agendas, economic affairs, monetary affairs, education and cultural networks, environment, financial programs and budgetary scheme, health and consumer policy, industry and entrepreneurship, international cooperation, humanitarian aid and crisis response and justice, citizenship and fundamental rights.

These entire parameters make the European Consumer Protection Unit what it is today.

UK’s policy and regulation on consumer protection The UK being a part of the EU is legally bound by the policies of the EU. The intervention of the EU law, the UK policy and regulations are emerging to be independent entities with different procedures and regulations to safeguard the consumers.

The UK tends to recognize the different areas that the EU has attempted to enforce the policy but failed and the UK has in the past made attempts to resuscitate it. In the different circumstances, especially where domestic laws are crucial, matters concerning consumer protection are usually evaluated and involve contract restitution tools or criminal laws.

The issues pertaining to consumers are configured and evaluated as complaints are forwarded to the general director in charge of air trade. Direct complaints from the consumer to the OFT are not allowed. An intermediary has to relay the complaint to the OFT. The intermediary provides legal information and advice to the respective complainant.

He can also decide to take the complaints to the trading standard for further evaluation. Following the restriction placed on the Enterprise Act 2012, uncollected complainants face the challenge of not knowing whether their complaints will be considered or not. This aspect becomes difficult for the individual consumers who are unable to access the outcome of their complaints.

The consumer can in certain circumstances forward large volumes of complaints to be evaluated systemically. The OFT is reported to be lenient and rarely takes companies to court but prefers “slim” touch regulation policies. The consumers’ complaints raised against the organization or company do not go through publication but pass through investigative work.

Certain consumer protection laws like the unfair stipulation of the Consumer Contract Regulation of 1999 or Distance Selling Regulation of 2000 were directives derived from the UK implementation. The OFT becomes responsible for enforcing this regulation.

However, these policies can lead to a problem considering that the legalization tackles individual’s complaints and ignores systemic complaints from them. The OFT plays the role of the UK’s official “watchdog” in respect to competition and consumer insights. It oversees the operations of the market at the local and international level through trading standards offices.

General advice on consumer operation can be drawn from the consumer docket or through the Citizens’ Advice Bureau Brand. The UK Policy and Regulation integrates several acts and clauses.

They include Sales of Good Act 1979, Unfair Contract Terms Act of1977, Consumer Protection Act of1987, Electronic Consumer Regulation of 2005, Consumer Protection Regulation of 2000, The Enterprise Act of 2002, Consumer Protection from Unfair Trading Regulation of 2008 and General Product Safety Regulation of 2005.

These acts have existed for a long time and have maintained the UK’s dominance within the European community. These policies on consumer protection have affected many acts of parliament, government departments, statutory instruments’ lobby groups and citizens with the goal of facilitating a market economy that is fair. The policies ensure that consumers enjoy quality and safe goods and services.

The primary zones of regulating consumer matters include the product safety evaluation that protects people from buying potentially harmful goods. It ensures favorable terms for goods and services by elimination of unfair terms. It also includes financial regulation to facilitate credit access by ensuring that it is affordable.

The zone also requires that consumers fully understand the terms and obligations attached to loans and credit facilities. The other zone deals with strong competition especially from the private sector by elimination of cartels, destroying monopolies and dissolution of mergers.

Even though the UK is a part of the EU’s internal market, it works alongside other countries from Europe and EU institutions by outlining and enforcing transitional policies. A lot of parties play different roles in the maintenance of the policies with respect to the established laws. Examples of them include the Bank of England, OFT, Financial Services Authority, Competition Commission and the European Commission.

The Consumer Advocacy Group is a crucial organization that maintains justice and transparency with respect to the consumers’ protection policies. The supposed super-complainant aims at empowering the consumer’s concerns. The consumers in this case become vulnerable by not having individual access to vital information. The information can form a basis of evaluating the market.

Eight types of advocacy groups have been structured since the year 2007 and they include CAMRA which is a lobbying cluster that deals with quality and nature of beer and the Citizens Advice Bureau which provides free legal advice and specific help on consumers’ rights in the UK.

Others include Water Voice, Consumer Direct, Post Watch and General Consumer Council of Northern Ireland, Good Garage Scheme and the National Consumer Council. The Consumer Association has tangible authority of taking action as envisaged by the Completion Act of1988. The association is a lobby assembly and is sponsored by subscription of regular consumers.

The street fundraising initiative that originates from charity mergers is usually an offensive and aggressive move that violates legislation and policies outlined by regulating agencies. Different acts facilitate different clauses and fields. For product safety, the Consumer Protection Act facilitates safety of both goods and services.

For finance and credit, the Consumer Credit Act of 1974, Financial Services Act of 2010, Financial Services and Market Act of 2010 and financial ombudsmen services facilitate monitoring policies. The Competition Act of 1998 and Enterprise Act of 2002 generate healthy and fair competition and practices.

UK’s assistance to the vulnerable consumers The UK’s regulatory policy makes her a stronghold when it comes to consumer protection. The clause on fair trade allows individuals from England, Wales and other parts of UK to enjoy fair trade. Fair trade refers to a good pricing system, fair competition and market procedure. This act tends to empower the weak and depressed consumers as it gives them hope of justice and fairness.

The policies are able to outline what is unfair and inform the consumers on the current market structures. The product safety regulation clause protects consumers, general public and various stakeholders from using harmful products and services. For example the Tobacco Awareness Scheme is aimed at informing individuals with little or no information on tobacco and narcotics about the dangers of using drugs.

Customers or consumers benefit directly or indirectly from this clause. They benefit directly through information availability and indirectly through third parties. The financial regulation clause helps the less informed consumers and general public on financial services. The policy helps individuals to recognize the need for accessing realistic loans and credit facilities.

It is the mandate of the Consumer Protection Commission and Agency to facilitate fair monetary organizations and authentic signatories. Two types of consumers are found in the UK.They include those consumers who seek financial advice from established individuals and successive personalities and those who play the ‘try and error’ technique. They latter operate by chance.

To them, financial gain is based on luck and previous experience. The consumer policy and regulation tends to address the needs of these consumers by creating educational programs in media and social communication networks like Face book7 and Tweeter8.The clause on competition policy and regulation within the private quarters helps in controlling cartels and fighting monopoly.

Monopoly has been a menace to the common consumers who have been subdued by the cartels in favor of certain individuals. They help in abolishing mergers that appear unfair and improperly constituted. The consumers are able to enjoy commodities The Consumer Policy and Regulation protects consumers from the freedom from monopoly and egocentric individuals.

The role played by the OFT has been a crucial one in solving consumers’ complaints through legal means. The OFT is able to speak for the weak, irresponsible and vulnerable consumers. The movement of the complaints from the OFT to the trading standards helps the organization to conduct comprehensive investigations.

The proximity focus by the OFT is to maintain links with its consumers through formation of small groups that act as a representatives of the consumer cycle. The groups are able to convey the complaints to the OFT. The OFT’s nature of not prosecuting companies has been able to encourage different companies to solve their issues and consumer complaints amicably and responsibly.

Consumers are safeguarded from fear of facing prosecution; especially if it is a scheme that undermines the Consumer Regulation and Policy. The OFT “watchdog’s” role has helped the UK community to understand the importance of a better consumers’ regulation and policy.

The freedom that the Enterprise Act of 2002 offers consumer bodies to be structured as super complainants allows the consumer to maintain the proximity of contact between the consumers and the OFT. The Citizen Advice Bureau provides free information and advice to vulnerable consumers who encounter problems in accessing important policy information especially when assessing costs.

Certain consumers find it difficult to file their complaints because they cannot afford advocacy fees. The Water Voice or Consumer Water Council helps the consumer in accessing safe, pathogen free and clean water. Safe water benefits vulnerable consumers in sewage polluted areas, poor drained areas and areas experiencing underground leakages.

The good garage and auto mobile repair schemes have helped consumers in accessing better automobile services. People who do not have enough information on car servicing and maintenance, cost of purchase and repair can depend on the scheme for direction.

Recent invention in automobiles has been re-coded and appreciated as the consumers are availed with important information to earn their desired vehicles based on their willingness to buy and access the services. The policy assures the consumer of an efficient delivery system, resource policy and legislative measure. The Sale of Goods Act of 1979 facilitates efficiency of sales to the targeted consumer.

The act assures vulnerable consumers of the right sales. The act connects the consumer with producers thus enabling an effective network of business. Consumers who are usually exposed to diverse challenges on the kind of products or services to go for are offered a variety of options by the policy. The Unfair Contract Act of 1977 is a practical clause for the vulnerable and less experienced consumers.

The act teaches them about the importance of fair trade and competition. The principle of regulation engages the act in working to motivate rational regulation and industrial evaluation while maintaining safety of the consumers. The UK’s policy generates economic momentum by prioritizing the consumer.

The consumer becomes the subject matter and point of interest of the market. The merger inscription ensures that consumers’ issues are incorporated in competition and merger enquiries. Alongside the super complaints docket, the merger works to check on market failure and opportunity cost.

EU’s assistance to the vulnerable consumers The European Policy and Regulation integrates a number of clauses and acts that are expected to be implemented and applied by all stakeholders. It is however noted that despite the acts and clauses, the EU has managed to produce little, or at a given point, no assistance to the vulnerable consumers. The commission’s council has also done little to observe consumers’ protection regulations.

The Green Paper has been termed as ‘just any other publication’. Not many producers, manufacturers or suppliers are ready to comply with the clause. Certain manufacturers view the publication as a framework for developing top level consumer protection. The EU which is comprised of many member states experiences difficulty in running the policies because of the big number of its members.

Based on the members, the fair monitoring of markets and national consumer policies becomes a challenge, with unfair representation of commissioners and representatives. Many issues emerge and the consumers’ interests tend to diverge from the original intentions.

The provision of better education to consumers is one of the many policies that the EU tends to maintain but due to ignorance and little information; consumers become vulnerable due to lack of enough information. Health is important for all consumers and especially among the weak and malnourished ones. The European policy and regulation on consumer protection is mandated to maintain health and safety standards.

When it comes to work policies, construction workers tend to fear the medical cover because the policy and regulation does not include compensation especially if the accident is beyond the job scope. This fact delays the response awaited by the consumer.

The profiles of climatic action, energy and environment are sometimes a challenge and unfair to vulnerable consumers who may include the normal citizens, government members and non-governmental agents.

The provision on age and medical background of consumers in respect to drug and substance abuse has always been promoted in Europe with the set standards and regulations protecting consumers from exploitation and abuse. The commission in charge of safety creates awareness in social and public settings for individuals who are ready to be informed.

The youths are the most affected when it comes to drug and substance abuse with rising cases of addiction and crime. Suicide has also being linked to drug abuse or overdose.

Conclusion The policies of e-commerce9 have not been favorably exploited. The vulnerable consumers involving individuals and groups are yet to experience the full force of E-commerce. Better and immediate regulations are needed to avail electronic exchange of both goods and services. Most consumers are ill informed when it comes to monetary and budgetary matters.

This kind of ignorance can bring about vulnerability to the consumers. The economic, monetary and budgetary clauses suggest the acquisition of economic power by the consumers in the future. The long procedures and formalities on monetary and budgetary policies may distract the consumers and consequently expose them to exploitation.

Countries from Africa, Asia and America prefer to buy things especially electronics and automobiles in Europe. In this regard, the policies employed by the UK and the entire world should protect the international consumer. The formulation of better and convenient policies can ensure that consumers are assured of a better, healthier, convenient and economically powerful market and trade.

Research should be conducted to find better policy frameworks within the EU and in the UK which can enhance consumer protection. Consumers have in the past been exploited by various states within the European region and this fact has led to the deterioration of economic standards in the region.

Various governments under the EU should allocate more funds towards creation of mechanisms that would eliminate cartels which have exploited innocent consumers for decades.

The initiative cannot however be realized if the EU member states do not demonstrate the will to safeguard the consumers in the European region. Whether the countries enforce the legislation or not is not an issue. The right legislation for consumer protection must first be established.

Footnotes 1 OFT refers to Office of Fair Trade. It is a legal entity that safeguards consumers from being exploited through economic policies

2 Consumer refers to an individual who buys goods and services for his own consumption

3 EU refers to the European Union

4 Vulnerable consumer refers to a consumer who is susceptible to exploitation

5 UK refers to the United Kingdom

6 The European consumer policy and regulation refers to a legislation that is used by states within the EU. The legislation outlines measures for the protection of consumers.

7 Face book is a type of an on-line social site that individuals subscribe to and become members. Once a member, an individual can meet other members on-line and access their personal information

8Twitter is a type of an on-line social site that individuals use in making comments about various issues happening in the local and international levels.

9 E-Commerce refers to on-line trade activities


Social Entrepreneurship and Successful Entrepreneur Report (Assessment) college admissions essay help

For a business to succeed in the society, there are certain qualities that a businessperson should display. An entrepreneur is a person who starts and manages a business and posses unique features. When the entrepreneur meets the customers, he/she should be fair in judgement, intelligent in analysing their problems, honest and having a positive attitude towards them.

An entrepreneur’s main objective is to excel. In order to achieve this he/she engages in a healthy competition with set standards to reach the best performance. This strengthens him/her in repairing misfortunes that may hinder success thereby becoming a winner. Secondly, an entrepreneur works hard to build new businesses. He extends his working hours with fewer hours of sleep in order to complete his work.

In the process of work, he solves problems that arise in order to achieving the set goals (Roger


Shinto Religion and Japanese Nationalism Proposal essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Thesis Statement

Background Information

Literature Review



Introduction Shinto refers to the indigenous Japanese religion, which has always influenced the lives of many people politically, socially, and even economically in the country. The Shinto religion has a set of practices that were created in the prehistoric periods, but are still valued. The practices are conducted meticulously in order to ascertain the connection between current events and the precedent.

However, studies show that these historical records do not give the clear picture as to how Shinto, as a religion, established itself in the Japanese society. The writings give disorganized folklores, narratives, and myths. In modern Japan, Shinto is a term commonly utilized to refer to communal shrines, which are used for various reasons including war cenotaphs, crop celebrations, marriage, historical tributes, and sectarian groups1.

A number of historians and analysts give a unified definition of the role of Shinto in the modern society, by using a standardized language and practice, which entails adopting an analogous style in dressing and ritual.

Shinto was derived from the phrase ‘the way of the Gods’. It was a Chinese name that combined the words kanji (shi), implying the spirit and kami (to), meaning a theoretical path or a study. The spirits were usually understood from various perspectives with some believers suggesting that they were human-like while others holding the view that they were animistic.

A majority of believers were of the view that they were abstract objects meaning that they represented nonfigurative forces such as mountains and rivers. Spirits and people are inseparable meaning that they are closely interrelated. In fact, the relationship between human beings and spirits is complex to an extent that the presence of spirits will always determine the behaviour of an individual.

The national statistics of Japan show that over 80 percent of all Japanese practice Shinto as a cultural aspect, but not necessarily as a religious feature2. Studies show further that even though some individuals believe in Buddhism, they also engage in Shinto rituals meaning that it is a cultural practice among the people of Japan.

In this regard, Shinto is considered a cultural belief that influences the lives of many people, both believers and other non-believers of Shinto religion. Studies shows that Shinto is treated as a way of doing things in society, but not as a religious practice, given the diversity of the Japanese society.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, a number of individuals, both taking Shinto as religion and those believing in Buddhism, tend to celebrate the birth of their loved ones in Shinto shrines.

Thesis Statement It is true that Shinto culture influences the lives of many Japanese in a number of ways, which means that it cannot be separated from Japan, as well as the Japanese. In some point in history, Shinto was declared a state religion, which had a tremendous effect on national values. In other words, it can be noted that Japanese nationalism is attributed to Shinto culture.

As per the writings of various scholars specializing on Japanese culture, such as John Nelson and Scott Littleton, Shinto religion is closely related to the Japanese nationalism. My research would therefore focus on establishing the relationship between Shinto religious practices and Japanese nationalism.

Nationalism is a political concept suggesting that policies made ought to be based on exclusivity whereby the interests of the nation-state should always be given a priority when making decisions at the global level. Whenever the Japanese people make their decisions, they always consider the teachings of Shinto religion, which implies that Shinto religion has always influenced the decisions of policy makers.

Background Information Shinto prodigies suggest that Japanese emperors were always related to each other in blood meaning that they belonged to the same clan. This relationship was in an unbroken line, with Jimmu Tenno being the first emperor who was Amaterasu-Omikami grandson. The kami was the first leader of the Japanese people who contributed to the creation of Japan as a state. Japan is an old country whose leader was known as kami3.

All Japanese are descendants of kami, with Amaterasu being the first leader. The imperial family was the valued family unit in the entire clan, yet it originated from the kami. This shows that Japan is the way it is because the gods liked it.

Moreover, the leadership of the country was selected by god hence the people of Japan had a religious responsibility to support the leadership. Before any state function, all emperors had to worship the kami and offer some sacrifices in order to protect the Japanese populace from any form of tribulation.

We will write a custom Proposal on Shinto Religion and Japanese Nationalism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In fact, a court liturgical was developed to ensure that god was worshiped before any state function could be performed. In the subsequent centuries, Buddhist traditions seemed to take over, but they contained several Shinto elements meaning that Shinto was more of a cultural aspect than a religious belief4.

Towards the end of the 17th century, Shinto took over the affairs of the government, which resulted to the Meiji Restoration. Consequently, Shinto was made a state religion in 1868. The first leader of Japan, Amaterasu, who was also a staunch supporter of Shinto religion, was promoted to be one of the gods. Shinto religion taught that the Japanese leader was not only a political leader, but also a religious leader.

In other words, the country’s leader was made a high priest. The emperor would therefore rule not only Japan, but other parts of the world as well. Since Japanese were related to god, they had a moral responsibility of ensuring that they offer their skills to other people. Since the emperor was associated with god, her position changed in society meaning that he was also a religious leader5.

Some analysts observe that the Japanese emperor was the powerful figure in the land to an extent that he would not respect the law. In the 20th century, the emperor had inadequate powers mainly because she was both a temporal and a political leader. No one would question her leadership given the fact that she would release the military at will.

Article 28 of the Meiji constitution gave people an opportunity to worship a god of their choice, but the emperor made it illegal for an individual to believe in any other faith, apart from Shinto. Every aspect of life, including political, social, and economic, centred on the Shinto religion.

In the education sector, Shinto religion was made a national core subject, both in primary and higher education. It is factual to conclude that Shinto religion controlled the lives of many in Japan until 1946, just after the Second World War.

Literature Review Littleton, Scott. Shinto: Origins, Rituals, Festivals, Spirits, Sacred Places. Oxford, NY: Oxford University Press, 2002.

The source is very important in explaining the relationship between Shinto practices and the development of Japanese nationalism. The author stated that Buddhism and Shinto religions had coexisted for several years, yet Shinto was treated as a cultural practice. Kami was still respected as the Japanese most important god. The historian traced the origin of Shinto whereby he first noted that it was the way of the Gods6.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Shinto Religion and Japanese Nationalism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Some of the events and festivals in the Japanese culture were worshiped within Buddhism, yet they awere the elements of Shinto culture. He also concurred with the fact that Shinto practices gained momentum during the Meiji Restoration. Through this resource, the rituals and festivals of Shinto religion would be understood better.

Nelson, John A Year in the Life of a Shinto Shrine. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1996.

The third chapter of the book on the Kami and the fourth on rituals and customs are critical to the understanding of the Shinto religion as regards to nationalism. The author underscored the fact that the people of Japan valued kami so much since she contributed in the making of the nation7. Many people were of the view that Japan could not be in existence without the kami. Therefore, kami was the national unifying factor.

Even non-Shinto believers conducted the Shinto rituals and practices as a sign of patriotism meaning that people respected the culture of Japan. In the third chapter, the author observed that many visitors were comfortable following the Shinto culture because it was not regarded as religion. The book will therefore serve an important role as far as establishing the relationship between Shinto practices and nationalism is concerned.

Littleton, Scott. Littleton. Understanding Shinto: Origins, Beliefs, Practices, Festivals, Spirits, and Sacred Places. London: Watkins Pub, 2011.

The book is critical as far as the understanding of Japan is concerned. In fact, the author cautioned that an individual could not understand the socio-political and economic aspects of Japan without conceptualizing the cultural practices of Shinto. In this regard, it is evident that a strong relationship between Shinto practices and Japanese patriotism exists.

In the view of the author, understanding Shinto culture entails the study of rituals, ceremonies and sacred architecture8. Once an individual comprehends the Shinto culture, he or she would be in a position to determine its effects on the life of ordinary Japanese.

Since the source claims that Japan cannot be separated from the Shinto religion, it will serve a special purpose of explaining the interconnectedness of Shinto and major Japanese cultural practices, which would further confirm that Shinto has an effect on the country’s nationalistic ideals.

Averbuch, Irit. The Gods Come Dancing A Study of the Japanese Ritual Dance of Yamabushi Kagura, Ithaca: East Asia Program, Cornell University, 1995.

The above resource suggests that the Shinto culture has retained its rituals over several years to an extent of making these rituals national symbols. Kagura is one of the oldest rituals, which is related to dance. It has been retained for years in Japan9.

In particular, the above source insists on Izumo kagura, which is indeed the most popular type of the traditional Japanese dance. In many public functions, the dance is usually played as one of the ways of showing patriotism to the ideals of the country. This also confirms that Shinto is closely related the country’s nationalism.

Inoue Nobutaka, Shinto, a Short History. Washington: University of Washington Press 2003.

The source suggests that Shinto is no longer viewed as a modern religion, but instead a traditional religion of Japan that is related to culture. This means that people worship other forms of religions as their second option, but the first option is Shinto.

Moreover, the author is of the view that modern scholars relate the Shinot religion to kami, meaning a traditional god10. Since it is treated as a traditional religion, it influences the behaviour of many Japanese, which confirms the notion that it shapes nationalist ideals.

Sugimoto, Yoshio. An Introduction to Japanese Society. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997.

The source introduces a number of cultural practices in Japan. Through analysis, the author observed that a number of these cultural practices, which are valued as national ideals even in modern Japan, have their roots in the Shinto religion. This implies that Shinto is no longer a normal religious belief that an individual may choose to neglect.

In particular, the author discussed the issue of impurity whereby the Shinto religion teaches that certain types of deeds generate ritual impurity, which demands personal cleansing for an individual to have the peace of mind. The wrong actions are referred to as kegare while purity is referred to as kiyome11.

The author was of the view that a normal schedule in an individual’s life is referred to as ke while a season full of festivities is referred to as hare, meaning good. Many Japanese worldwide celebrate whenever they feel that they have achieved their objectives. They celebrate following the teachings of Shinto meaning that cultural practices in the country rely on the Shinto teachings.

Pilgrim, Richard, and Ellwood, Robert. Japanese Religion. New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1985.

The two historians note that since the time of Nara and Heian, practitioners have been adopting a diversified set of beliefs through language and practice12. They note that the style of dressing and the performance of rituals show that Shinto religion contributed a lot in the development of Japanese culture.

Bowker, John. The Cambridge Illustrated History of Religions. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2002.

The author supports the writings of other historians by observing that religion contributes enormously to the development of any culture in the world13. In Japan, the development of culture is attributed to Shinto.

Yamakage, Motohisa. The Essence of Shinto, Japan’s Spiritual Heart. New York: Kodansha International, 2007.

The view of the author is that Shinto religion forms the backbone of the Japanese culture meaning that it influences the life of each individual14. Without Shinto culture, the author observes that there would be no religion in Japan.

Averbuch, Irit. “Shamanic Dance in Japan: The Choreography of Possession in Kagura Performance”. Asian Folklore Studies 57.2 (1998), 293–329.

The resource supports the previous works, which suggested that aspects of culture, such as dance, play a role in extending the influence of any culture15. In Japan, kagura dance has contributed a lot in developing and maintaining culture.

Shimazono Susumu, and Murphy, Reagan. “State Shinto in the Lives of the People: The Establishment of Emperor Worship, Modern Nationalism, and Shrine Shinto in Late Meiji.” Japanese Journal of Religious Studies, 36.1 (2009), 93-124.

The article talks about the Japanese society after the abolishment of Shinto as a state religion. The authors discuss the way in which Shinto managed to penetrate society to an extent that it was considered a national ritual.

In particular, the authors focus on period ranging from 1890 to 1910 whereby the emperor was the most powerful figure in the country due to her position as a religious leader16. The source reviews three major features including the ritual system, educational structure, and the training system for the priests.

Susumu, Shimazono. “State Shinto and the Religious Structure of Modern Japan.” Journal of the American Academy of Religion 73.4 (2005), 1077-1098.

The author gives some of the reservations that many people of Japan have towards Shinto as a religion. The author is of the view that people are comfortable associating themselves with Shinto as a cultural belief, but not as a religion meaning it plays a critical part in determining the country’s nationalism17.

The western values on religion affected the views of many Japanese regarding Shinto, but many individuals are unwilling to abandon it since it is part of their culture.

Fukase-Indergaard, Fumiko, and Indergaard, Michael. “Religious Nationalism and the Making of the Modern Japanese State Religious Nationalism and the Making of the Modern Japanese State.” Theory and Society, 37.4, (2008), 343-374.

The source talks about the role that religion played in developing the Japanese nationalistic ideals. In the source, the author is observes that the Japanese were determined to strengthen their culture through implementation of the Shinto rituals and practices. Some scholars had earlier advised that western societies achieved their objectives mainly because of the strong religious ideals.

State Shinto was instituted as one way of ensuring compliance from the locals. The author concludes by noting that, even though Shinto was aimed at realizing modernity in Japan, its path was different from those of the west18.

In Japan, the state was never separated from religion since political leaders doubled up as religious leaders. In this regard, the country was able to achieve nationalistic objectives, as opposed to a number of countries in Europe and the United States.

Suga, Kōji. “A Concept of “Overseas Shinto Shrines”: A Pantheistic Attempt by Ogasawara Shōzō and Its Limitations.” Japanese Journal of Religious Studies 37.1 (2010), 47-74.

The source notes that Shinto shrines (kaigai jinji) refer to the national heritage of Japan since they are not only present in the country, but also in other countries with Japanese emigrants.

Before Japan was defeated in the Second World War, many individuals believed that the Japanese race was the most powerful in the world. The shrines were constructed in various countries to show the presence of Japanese19. This meant that the Shinto shrines were symbols of national unity.

Teeuwen, Mark. “Comparative Perspectives on the Emergence of Jindō and Shinto.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 70.2 (2007), 373-402.

In Japan, the author is of the view that an individual may not actually differentiate between Buddhist believers and Shinto believers because they tend to have similar set of beliefs20. The article claims that Shinto originated from Buddhism, with believe of the kami.

Bibliography Averbuch, Irit. “Shamanic Dance in Japan: The Choreography of Possession in Kagura Performance.” Asian Folklore Studies 57.2 (1998), 293–329.

Averbuch, Irit. The Gods Come Dancing A Study of the Japanese Ritual Dance of Yamabushi Kagura, Ithaca: Cornell University, 1995.

Bowker, John. The Cambridge Illustrated History of Religions. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2002.

Inoue, Nobutaka, Shinto, a Short History. Washington: University of Washington Press, 2003.

Littleton, Scott. Littleton. Understanding Shinto: Origins, Beliefs, Practices, Festivals, Spirits, and Sacred Places. London: Watkins Pub, 2011.

Littleton, Scott. Shinto: Origins, Rituals, Festivals, Spirits, Sacred Places. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2002.

Nelson, John. A Year in the Life of a Shinto Shrine. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1996.

Pilgrim, Richard, and Ellwood, Robert. Japanese Religion. New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1985.

Shimazono, Susumu, and Murphy, Reagan. “State Shinto in the Lives of the People: The Establishment of Emperor Worship, Modern Nationalism, and Shrine Shinto in Late Meiji.” Japanese Journal of Religious Studies, 36.1 (2009), 93-124.

Suga, Kōji. “A Concept of “Overseas Shinto Shrines”: A Pantheistic Attempt by Ogasawara Shōzō and Its Limitations.”Japanese Journal of Religious Studies 37.1 (2010), 47-74.

Sugimoto, Yoshio. An Introduction to Japanese Society. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997.

Susumu, Shimazono. “State Shinto and the Religious Structure of Modern Japan.” Journal of the American Academy of Religion 73.4 (2005), 1077-1098.

Susumu, Shimazono. “State Shinto and the Religious Structure of Modern Japan.” Journal of the American Academy of Religion 73.4 (2005), 1077-1098.

Teeuwen, Mark. “Comparative Perspectives on the Emergence of Jindō and Shinto.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 70.2 (2007), 373-402.

Yamakage, Motohisa. The Essence of Shinto, Japan’s Spiritual Heart. New York: Kodansha International, 2007.

Footnotes 1Irit Averbuch,The Gods Come Dancing A Study of the Japanese Ritual Dance of Yamabushi Kagura, (Ithaca: East Asia Program, Cornell University, 1995), 45.

2Irit Averbuch, “Shamanic Dance in Japan: The Choreography of Possession in Kagura Performance”, Asian Folklore Studies 57.2 (1998), 296.

3John Bowker, The Cambridge Illustrated History of Religions (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2002), 90.

4Nobutaka Inoue, Shinto, a Short History (Washington: University of Washington Press 2003), 13.

5Motohisa Yamakage, The Essence of Shinto, Japan’s Spiritual Heart (New York: Kodansha International, 2007), 45.

6Scott Littleton, Shinto: Origins, Rituals, Festivals, Spirits, Sacred Places (Oxford, NY: Oxford University Press, 2002) 65.

7John Nelson, A Year in the Life of a Shinto Shrine (Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1996), 115.

8Scott Littleton, Understanding Shinto: Origins, Beliefs, Practices, Festivals, Spirits, and Sacred Places (London: Watkins Publishers, 2011), 112.

9Irit Averbuch, The Gods Come Dancing A Study of the Japanese Ritual Dance of Yamabushi Kagura, (Ithaca: East Asia Program, Cornell University, 1995), 18.

10Nobutaka Inoue,Shinto, a Short History (Washington: University of Washington Press 2003), 118.

11Yoshio Sugimoto, An Introduction to Japanese Society (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997), 37.

12Richard Pilgrim and Robert Ellwood, Japanese Religion (New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1985), 94.

13John Bowker, The Cambridge Illustrated History of Religions (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2002), 59.

14Motohisa Yamakage, The Essence of Shinto, Japan’s Spiritual Heart (New York: Kodansha International, 2007), 75.

15Irit Averbuch, “Shamanic Dance in Japan: The Choreography of Possession in Kagura Performance,” Asian Folklore Studies 57.2 (1998), 325.

16 Susumu Shimazono and Reagan Murphy, “State Shinto in the Lives of the People: The Establishment of Emperor Worship, Modern Nationalism, and Shrine Shinto in Late Meiji,” Japanese Journal of Religious Studies, 36.1 (2009), 114.

17Shimazono, Susumu, “State Shinto and the Religious Structure of Modern Japan,” Journal of the American Academy of Religion 73.4 (2005), 1087.

18 Shimazono Susumu, “State Shinto and the Religious Structure of Modern Japan,” Journal of the American Academy of Religion 73.4 (2005), 1077-1098.

19Kōji Suga, “A Concept of “Overseas Shinto Shrines: A Pantheistic Attempt by Ogasawara Shōzō and Its Limitations,” Japanese Journal of Religious Studies 37.1 (2010), 70.

20Mark Teeuwen, “Comparative Perspectives on the Emergence of Jindō and Shinto,” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 70.2 (2007), 392.


Accountability in Public Administration Report college application essay help: college application essay help

Introduction Public accountability is one of the noble concepts immensely supported by scholars in the discipline of public administration. In the political discourses coupled with policy documents, the term finds an imperative usage since it portrays an image of trustworthiness and transparency (Forrer, et al., 2010).

These two aspects are crucial since citizens who are also the clients of a state become satisfied that a system of administration is able to meet their anticipations in the public sector without exposing their resources to risks of fraud. In this extent, accountability emerges as one of the key values in the public administration. The aim of this study is to discuss the issues involved in making public organizations accountable.

A consideration is also given to discuss the people whom public officials are accountable to, and the most effective means of ensuring a balance between the demands for accountability and the need to have high-performing organizations.

Issues involved in making Public Organizations Accountable

Accountability involves making organizations transparent and responsible in their dealing in the effort to enhance their trustworthiness. For them to realize the goal, they need to address a number of issues concerning accountability. One of such issue is the development of the capacity to deal with emerging matters that may impede their efforts to attain their dream of being accountable.

For instance, the advent of globalization presents many challenges to corporations and institutions of public administration, seeking that to be accountable in many nations. Kearns (2003) supports the argument by further adding, “Globalization plays the role of shaping the current trends in the global economic markets and the increasing interactions among nations and people from different parts of the world” (p.76).

Emergence of new interactions driven by the dawn of globalization introduces challenges to institutions of public administration in that they handle emerging new roles and expand their functionality sphere. The more expansive an institution or any system requiring checks is, the harder it becomes to handle all the individual facets of an organization, which may provide loopholes for acts of fraud.

Emerging new issues such as those prompted by globalization also present challenges to accountability efforts of an organization due to “the need to understand the dynamics of global value chains, creating trade facilitation structures, developing partnerships, and the establishment of value chains and networks” (Kearns, 2003, p.81).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Existence of such new challenges means that public administration officials have to constantly change their tactics for enhancing accountability since traditional approaches or styles for public administration cease to be effective in handling all the contemporary situations that may prove to be a challenge to the efforts of becoming accountable.

From the above discussion, it is essential that an organization that seeks to be accountable in a globalized market to consider looking for new approaches of enhancing transparency as opposed to the traditional approaches for enhancing intelligibility in the public administration. In fact, this factor is yet another crucial issue involved in making public organizations accountable.

The history of public administration reveals that the main approach for enhancing accountability is through exercising of control and close monitoring of persons who are mandated to execute certain affairs that are of public interest. This task entails “bureaucratic discretion through compliance with some tightly drawn rules and regulations” (Forrer et al., 2010, p.477).

Alteration of such an approach is critical in the modern world that is driven by hefty interactions so that, rather than using a direct-control paradigm, an organization has to consider implementation of strategies for enhancing accountability. The strategy must be driven by the concerns of delegations as a methodology for breaking down the bureaucratic approaches to public accountability.

The relevance of this issue for an organization that wants to be accountable rests on the platform that, although delegation is an effective way for enhancing accountability, it has its limitations. A challenge facing an organization that is determined to be accountable is the establishing of balance and determination of the extents and permissible thresholds of accountability in the organization.

Thirdly, an organization needs to deal proactively with the issue of balancing levels of accountability anticipated from various stakeholders. In support of this argument, Forrer et al. (2010) reckon, “public managers report not only to a multitude of elected officials, but also to a plethora of interest groups, clientele, media, and other actors” (p.478).

This argument means that public administrators serve many conflicting interests of different stakeholders, both formal and informal, through the deployment of appropriate mechanisms for enhancing accountability.

We will write a custom Report on Accountability in Public Administration specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The balancing mechanism that an organization that seeks to become accountable must deploy includes hierarchical accountability, public accountability, while not negating deploying of mechanisms for enhancing accountability to impersonal standards.

Organizations that embrace the relevance of accountability as a way of development of trust among various stakeholders must appreciate that one of the important issues they must put into perspective is that they must conform precisely to a myriad of legitimized but also competing anticipations for accountability.

To whom are Public Officials Accountable?

Public officials have to be accountable to various people. Essentially, accountability is a “means through which public agencies and their workers answer to the citizens directly and indirectly for the use of their power, authority, and resources” (Kearns, 2003, p.9).

From this definition, it is paramount to note that, in the first degree, public officials are accountable to the citizens who are also served by other persons and interest groups to whom public officials must also be accountable. Such other persons include city councils, administrators such as presidents, states’ legislatures, media, and professional associations, among others.

With the rise of and advocating for governance approaches that portray the exercise of democracy as the chief mechanism of ensuring equal presentations of all citizens’ concerns and interests in the tools of administration, concerns have been alarming on the mechanisms that can ensure that governments are held accountable effectively.

Consequently, with regard to Kearns (2003), internal means of enhancing accountability, including “official rules, codes of conduct, administrative hierarchy, performance evaluation, organizational culture, and professional ethics” (p.65) have dominated the discussions of public accountability. Some of these mechanisms of enhancing accountability have been pinned in the constitutions of many democratic nations.

All systems of power comprise executives, judicial, and legislative divisions of government. These divisions have the responsibility to keep public administrators on the check to limit their discretion to ensure they are achieving their noble mandates placed on them by citizens.

For instance, in the US the progressive era marked the establishments of “independent government regulatory agencies, public commissions, and corporation to oversee government bodies through the executive branch” (Forrer et al., 2010, p.478).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Accountability in Public Administration by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More From the context of the roles of congress, public officials have a duty to ensure that they meet the requirements placed on them in terms of meeting the demands for accountability as stipulated by organizations for agency oversight and committees for budget appropriations, among others.

Since citizens cannot directly regulate the operations of public officials, such organs exercise control and monitoring of the activities of public officials on behalf of the citizens to ensure that they are accountable to any repercussions of the policies formulated and implemented by the public officials.

Public officials are accountable to legislatures. Legislatures have roles to play to investigate the operations of various public officials and demand to provisions of information on certain aspects that they may believe have comprised the national ethics and codes of practice in public offices, including accountability. Organizations such as GAO can also be employed by legislatures and congress to scrutinize public agency programs.

Consequently, public officials must be accountable to them. Since the goal of accountability is to ensure transparency to all interest groups and stakeholders in the operations of public administrators as argued before, public officials are also accountable to media, professional communities, and client groups.

Client groups are interested in the implications of public policies. Such groups have specific anticipated outcomes from public officials. Should the public officials fail to meet these anticipations effectively or do things at exorbitant and inflated costs, the officials have to be held accountable for the failure or embezzlements of funds.

Conclusion: Balancing the Demands for Accountability and the Need to have High-performing Organizations

Accountability implies that public officials have to evaluate every policy or decision they take to ensure that it does not expose the interest of various stakeholders and interest groups at risk upon its implementation. This argument means that decisions and policies that have high potentials of yielding optimal results but possessing high-risk vulnerabilities may not be implemented.

Measuring performance from the paradigm of the magnitude of returns, for instance, in terms of social benefit, failure to implement projects having high risks of failure, but having high levels of returns means that the performance of a public institution is impaired.

Public officials must balance demand for accountability and the need to have high-performing organizations.

For instance, considering the experience of hurricane Katrina, it is arguable that the government ought to have invested heftily on strategies and equipment for dealing with aftermaths and or for detection of both the likelihoods and the magnitudes of natural catastrophes in the bid to enhance effective disaster awareness through its established institutions for disaster management.

Such a measure would make disaster management institutions highly performing if the investments turn out commensurate to the anticipated levels of response to human and logistical challenges posed by hurricane Katrina.

However, in the effort to ensure that such organizations become highly performing, the question that emerges is whether indeed public officials charged with running such institutions would be willing to venture into risky decisions that would compromise their levels of accountability in the public domain.

Koliba, Zia, and Mills (2011) support this line of thought by noting that it is important to develop both theoretical and empirical constructs “to identify and assess how and whether failures of accountability lead to failures in performance” (p.210).

Directly congruent with this proposal, it is of paramount importance that public officials be made to account for success rather than just failures. Such a strategy can help to balance demands for accountability and the need for high performing organizations.

Obtaining a balance between accountability and the need for high-performing organizations is a challenge that public officials need to proactively address, especially bearing in mind that the citizens whom they owe the ultimate responsibility while making their decisions do not directly elect them.

Consequently, public officials may consider complying with political accountability roles since, according to Bovens (1998), “public officials are not rigidly constrained in their performance by narrow legal or procedural settings” (p.31).

This case means that the capacity to form and operate public institutions driven by the motive for high performance may be compromised by the need to meet programmed guidelines issued by the appointing authority in hierarchical systems of administration.

This argument is more imperative upon considering Bovens’ (1998) assertion that political accountability “tends to use outcomes as the main parameter for evaluation of performance rather than compliance with administrative rules and procedures” (p.31).

As a repercussion, it is probable that public officials may fail to balance accountability with the need to create highly performing public institutions due to the need to satisfy the anticipations of the elected authority as opposed to direct anticipations of the electorate.

Although in democratic and corruption-free nations, the elected persons may present the interest of the electorate. Hence, the anticipations of the elected and the appointing authority from the public officials have to measure up to the anticipation of the electorate. In the corruption-prone nations, the electorate interests are not presented by the elected persons.

If public administrators appointed by the corrupt-elected persons have to be politically accountable, it means that a balance between accountability and the need to put in place a highly performing organization cannot be established.

Reference List Bovens, M. (1998). The Quest for Responsibility: Accountability and Citizenship in Complex Organizations. Public Administration, 77(3), 455-474.

Forrer, J., Kee, J., Newcomer, K.,


Ethics In American Hospitality Industry Dissertation essay help

Introduction Ethics is important for the wellbeing of an organization. It determines the effectiveness of an organization and its operations. in the hospitality industry, ethical practices help to avoid issues such as racial conflicts, cultural differences, gender troubles and dishonesty among others.

Ethics in the hospitality industries is evolving. Changing values and cultural diversity indicates that perception will likely to occur where things does not argue well. It’s the role of the organization and employees to live and communicate organizational ethics and lead by providing leadership in their management.

One of the rationale of this study was to determine the link between common work ethics. Hospitality industry has a wide permissible beliefs and behavior, hence, Hall (1992) points out that the management and the employees should strive to have a global understanding of what is right and wrong.

Literature Review Stacy (2001) defines ethics in business as a guide in the way a business conduct itself. Acting in a moral way entails distinguishing between “wrong” and “wrong” and coming up with the “right” choice. Though Donaldson (2000) explains it is not easy to fix a good definition of a good ethical practice, an organization should aim at being competitive and treat its employees justly.

Besides, it should minimize harn to the eco-system and devise ways of co-existing with the communities in which it works. Ethics and morals are intertwined. They supplement one another in the workplace. Moral and ethical standards guides the organization as well as improves employees interaction among themselves and with the customers. Several researches have been conducted on the aspect of ethics in the hospitality industry.

The human resource direction has actually recorded several ethical issues in the hospitality industry. They have mentioned a range of problems which include employees being disrespectful to each other, racial conflicts, cultural differences, gender troubles, dishonesty and issues that majorly deal with the differences emanating from the different sexual orientations of the different players in the industry, among others.

This research majorly looked into the common organizational work ethics in relation to employee job satisfaction and performance.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This research therefore aims at looking into the issue of ethics in American hospitality industry.

The research therefore aims to:

Demonstrate if there is a link between common work ethics and employee satisfaction

Prove if common work ethics have got a bearing on employee performance.

Common Work Ethics Collins (2001) points out that the managerial theorists affirm that an organization’s most revered component is its employees. Therefore, organizations have aimed at devising several ways in an attempt to care for them.

For instance, organizations have strived to understand how employees feel, think in relation to the organization’s culture. Striving to understand employees has made some organizations understand the behaviors of employees to determine the ethical implication of the same (Collins, 2001)

Ostroff’s (1993) explains that at the center of the organization is ethics. Ethics has been an important factor in most organizations because it help to establish the degree to which the organization relates with its employees and vice versa. Ostroff’s (1993) point out that an organization management must lead by example in encouraging ethical behaviors in the organization.

According to Ostroff’s (1993), organizations top management are the role models of the organization, thus, they should be at the forefront in setting an ethical tone in the organization.

Ostroff’s (1993) illustrates that ethical leadership encompasses personal competencies and these competencies help to promote ethics among employees; thereby fixing a connection between employee performance and the organization according to Wimmer and Dominick (2006).

We will write a custom Dissertation on Ethics In American Hospitality Industry specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, the limitation of literature has been an impediment in understanding the relationship linking the organization behavior and managers leading by example in terms of ethics (Barsch and Lisewski, 2008, p. 44). Whitney (1990) pointed out that employees in the hotel industry require a higher level of ethical awareness compared to other organizations.

Besides, they need to have a stronger conscience to evaluate ethical problems in relation to the organization’s principles. Hotel industry consists of many employees diversities compared to other industries. It is made up of diverse employees with from different backgrounds,race, religion and educational background Kelley and Dorsch (1991).

Hall (1992) points out that the hospitality industry embraces a wide range of ethically permitted behavior and beliefs which makes it maintain its image an integrity. Therefore, he suggested that employees in the hospitality industry need to have a worldly understanding of what is right and wrong (Hall, 1992).

Kelley and Dorsch (1991) explain that though little research has been conducted to show the link between the organization’s ethical environment and organizational commitment, other studies have shown that indeed the connection exists.

Kelley and Dorsch (1991) argued that a positive relationship exists between the organization’s ethical climate and employees’ commitment to the specific rules tied to that organization. Similarly, Ostroff’s (1993) showed that an active relationship between climate facet and the organization’s commitment. Additionally, Hunt et al (1989) affirmed that organization’s ethical tenets are important forecasters of organizational commitment.

Further, Hunt et al (1989) in their study involving 1,246 marketing professionals discovered that ethical conduct was compensated and unethical conduct was castigated in the organization they were working for.

Also, gender plays an important role in hospitality industry (Kelley and Dorsch, 1991). It helps determine how an organization related to employees. Gender has occupied a leading role in many studies centered on business ethics yielding differed results (Barsch and Lisewski, 2008). Some research has indicated that there is a big difference in ethical viewpoints between sexes.

For instance, Alabaum and Peterson (2006) pointed out that men were less favorable than females. Other research conducted demonstrated that females are more ethically sensitive than male this was according to Arlow (1991).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Ethics In American Hospitality Industry by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Similarly, in a study carried out by Chonko (1995) on marketing management staff, they noted that female marketers alleged ethical problems in their duties than male marketers. Moreover, they also observed that female employees are more dedicated to an organization than male when their favored ethical environment and their definite ethical work climate equal (Luthar et al., 1997).

In another study carried out by Kelley and Dorsch (1991), it was noted that women and men divergent views of how ethical behavior contributed to a positive business result. In addition, their study revealed that an employee being visible to integrative ethical education projected an optimistic approach on how the present ethical climate is and how it ought to be (Luthar et al., 1997).

D’Aquila et al (2004) discovered that female employees had a strong believe than male that ethical benchmark leverages an organization’s competitive position.

On the other hand, men alluded that ethical standards fades an organization’s competitive position. In his study among Turkish students, Akatan et al. (2008) found out that female students had a higher mean score that male in terms acting legally and ethically than exclusively economically.

But it is crucial to note that the organization’s moral standing is usually determined to a major extent by individuals. These could include the top management or the actual owners of the business.

Due to their position, they do come up with certain policies that trickle down to the whole organization, thereby, creating the picture of how that organization runs, thereby, creating the picture of how that organization stands out morally. This brings to the fore the importance of the influential individual in the organization.

If the individual in the organization has a high moral standing, this can impact the organization positively and, if the reverse is true, then the organization tends to have low moral standing. This means that the influential individual should not be one who tells the employees to everything they can as long as profit, work and customer satisfaction are achieved. This is quite a dangerous path to go.

Job satisfaction in the hotel industry Job satisfaction is a term used to assess an employee’s attitude and emotions towards his/her job and the how steadfast he/she is toward an assigned duty.

According to Wolf (1970), the job satisfaction definition has been stressed based on three major perspectives, that is, generality, the extent to which satisfaction and variance between an individual and returns and the required returns are realized and lastly, job satisfaction is defined based on criterion framework.

By embracing generality, Agho et al (1992) point out that job satisfaction labels the emotional reactions to one’s job as the most, that is, a job that guarantees one’s happiness, productivity and success.

The definition based on criterion framework alludes that job satisfaction is where an individual’s independent elucidation and perceptionis based on neutral qualities of the organizationsthat would be subjective by a person’s criterion framework. In some cases, Smith et al (1975) point out that job satisfaction can emanate after an individual interprets the job qualities based on the criterion framework.

Therefore, the influence that an employee receive from a given task can be mirrored to several other aspects such as making a comparison between a good and a bad job, personal competency and past experiences among others (Smith et al., 1975).

In the hotel industry, Cranny et al. (1992, p. 1) allude that literature has pointed out job satisfaction in several ways over the years. Wolf (1970) shares his views by illustrating that the amalgamation of environmental and psychological situations that make an individual to be satisfied with his/her work as one process in which job satisfaction has been determined.

On the same point, other research has pointed out that job satisfaction is a way of pursuing fulfillment through questioning whether the job meets their employee’s psychological and physical needs or not, as pointed out by Cranny et al (1992, p. 1).

Barsch and Lisewski (2008, p. 84) point out that job satisfaction may also be internally derived from mediated rewards such as opportunities enhancing growth, the job itself or success. Also, it can be derived externally by means of intrinsic rewards such as customers or organization policies, promotion opportunities, pay increase and support among others as stated by Walker et al. (1977).

Though these aspects have been vital in assessing job satisfaction; Walker et al (1977) point out that they have proved a challenge to researchers in determining the extent of measuring and calculating job satisfaction. Furthermore, these aspects have contributed to misinterpretation of results or coming formulating wrong judgment according to Walker et al (1977).

Barsky and Nash (2004) cite that many authors have strived to determine the elements that contribute to job satisfaction in the hotel industry. According to Aksu and Aktas (2005), in their study,employee satisfaction on the job was influenced by a strong confidence in their organizations and their emotions.

Similarly, a study carried out by on Turkish managers in first class hotels by Aksu and Aktas (2005) revealed that despite low salaries and long working hours, they were satisfied with their jobs. This was because they liked the job itself and had authority tied to their positions and to them, managing a first class facility in itself was a prestige as indicated Aksu and Aktas (2005).

Scott and Taylor’s (1985) point out that in the hotel industry, job satisfaction is closelylinked to the organization’s success. This is manifested in aspects such as higher innovation,reduced turnover and employee productivity. Scott and Taylor’s (1985) point out that the amalgamation of these components also relates to the organization’s improved general performance.

More specifically, Savery and Luks (2001) show that job satisfaction is tied to augmented organization’s performance as evaluated by improved employee productivity. Moreover, motivation also contributes to job satisfaction. However, as Sledge et al (2008) indicate, there has been little study carried out to establish the relationship between job satisfaction and motivation and the effect of culture in the workplace.

Barsky and Nash (2004) in their study, found out that job satisfaction has a positive impact on the employee’s intention to stick with the organization. Moreover, Sledge et al (2008) suggested that employees with high levels of job satisfaction are more productive and tend to stick with the same organization for longer time.

However, Choi (2006) explains that there is a strong negative link that prevails on the level of employee turnover and job satisfaction when individual optimism is in play. In his study focusing on Korean hotel employees, Chiang et al (2005) noted that there was a strong negative link between the intention of a turnover and job satisfaction.

On the same note, Chiang et al (2005) study confirmed that high rate of absenteeism emanated from low job satisfaction which in turn correlated with higher levels of deliberate employee turnover. Furthermore, in their study, Scott and Taylor’s (1985) showed that a negative link between absenteeism and job satisfaction especially the rate of absence exists.

They underlined that satisfied employees demonstrated lower levels of absenteeism than less satisfied employees. In another study carried out to determine job satisfaction on Taiwanese hotel employees, Hwang and Chi (2005) discovered that handling employees as customers of the organization was positively connected to organizational performance.

Similarly, in Florida’s four star hotels, Sizoo et al (2005) learnt that employees with higher rate of intercultural feeling showed higher rates of social satisfaction and jobsatisfaction. These studies showthat culture plays a key role in influencing employee’s perception on job satisfaction.

Yang (2008) cites that culture may play a role in promoting positive commitment, reducing employee’s intention to leave, influences the outcome of the organization and leads to low rates of turnovers.

Lynn (2010) has greatly looked at ethics in the hospitality industry. In this report, which involved a survey on 26 establishments, reflected that there was a relationship between leadership of the managers and the job satisfaction by the employees such that if managers were ethical, there was a marked satisfaction by the employees; hence, a decrease in the turnover.

In another study conducted on, about 788 Korean food service staff in hospitality establishments run and managed through contract to determine whether worker -organization fit would reduce subsequent turnover, it was found that the most reliable fit emerged when the values of the employees did match the company values (Lee and Way, 2010).

It was finally found that the turnover greatly reduced when the values of the employees were in line with those of the organization. When employees are inducted with ethics, they tend to advance the establishment’s image and even reduce the frequency to switch job.

In yet another survey by the same study in which about fifty employees in a casino were surveyed, it was established that distributive justice (that is a case where equal pay, workload, incentives etc.) leads directly to a marked rise in ethical behavior of the employee reduced turnover (Jung et a., 2010).

Further, it was found that frontline employees, who projected ethical behavior to their customers, ended up having a high level of job satisfaction. This means that the employees were able to explain to the customers why certain rules were applied and generally.In such cases, perceptions of unfairness were clearly minimized and this made the employees greatly satisfied.

However, in some related research the study above, one sees that satisfaction of employees has some relation with the nationality. This finding thus serves to be crucial in that this information will help this paper to probably consider the nationality mix of those to be interviewed in relation to the effect on the responses to the questionnaire.

The link between morale and the attendant ethical strategy of the establishment does come to the fore here. Again, this has got much to do with how productive the employees’ job satisfaction and the attendant commitment to the organization. If the employee is not committed to the organization, it loses in both productivity and image.

Ethical issues are varied and come with different expectations. For instance, employee satisfaction differs, some employees are motivated by intrinsic rewards whereas others by external rewards. Hence, a wide range of organizations have implemented far reaching measures to do with empowering their employees to promote job satisfaction among their employees.

This has entailed harnessing and nurturing the best there is in the market and urging the workers to try and implement. Empowering workers have required that they are able to make informed decisions. Marriot has been the champion of implementing this program of empowering its employees. But many players have not been able to implement this program.

The employees are well trained, mentored and authorized to make decisions and these impacts greatly on job satisfaction. With this program, barriers that do hinder employee satisfaction are minimized, hence the employees go out of their way to meet and even exceed customers’ expectations.

In a scholarly erudition entitled Job Satisfaction Among Information Technology Professionals, Ghazzawi (2008), it was found that professionals in the information technology found their jobs more satisfying if the organizations exhibited practical commitment to social responsibility and well-structured ethical standards.

It can thus be concluded that organizations that are ethical stood a higher chance of retaining their staff and hence more profitable in contrast to the organizations which do not consider social responsibility (Holjevac, 2008).

The above study is useful to this research in that on the top of adding to the body of knowledge to this research, it shows the relationship of employee satisfaction and ethics in relation to the American hospitality industry. The researcher is going to find out ethical foundations in relation general success as of the hotels (McGehee, 2009).

Common Organizational Ethics and Employee performance There exists a link between common work ethics and employee performance in the hotel industry. Most organizations take ethics as just any set of regulation. Incorporating common work ethics is in an organization is fundamental in sustaining projected growth and eventual optimal performance of that organization. This may apply to both to private and even public organizations.

Though a lot of literature linking ethics and performance in the hospitality industry is scarce, it is possible to note that there are obvious inter-linkages that show that with proper ethical climate implemented in the hospitality industry, the number of guests will be definitely on the rise.

Of great concern is the fact that absence of work ethics in any organization eats away into its core profitability as most clients will end up shunning the services that are offered by such an establishment.

Whenever there is a strongshared work ethic in anorganization, this is actually projecting a strong message that the establishment holds onto strong values andpride. This therefore shows that the organization deeply believes in the activities it carries out in the market place.

Work ethics, it is acknowledged, does place a responsibility and commitment on whatever any organization sets out to do.

The essence of ethical behavior is shared across cultures of the world. Whenever there are set ethos, it is expected that the employers and the customers will tend to be more receptive to the ideals of that particular organization (Lee


Brand personality on International scale Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Introduction Over the recent past, marketing has grown to become a critical part of any organization. This is because of the numerous changes that the business environment is forced to undergo in the quest to survive and/ or thrive in market as it seeks to attain its goals and objectives (Klaus, 2002).

One of the ways that marketing has helped organizations promote their products is by embracing the latest models developed by the marketing gurus in order to ensure that their products remain favorites among the consumers. This paper discusses whether a brand can have more than one personality in multiple international markets.

According to Aaker, a professor and a marketing scholar at the university of California, in order for a brand to undergo successful management, a brand identity for that particular product must be developed. His model incorporates four different attributes that a product identity ought to be built along that ensures the success of that particular product. One of the four attributes is the brand personality.

This seeks to present a brand that is stronger than the product attribute. It also seeks to present a brand as a product that connects to the consumers at a deeper level than the mere satisfying of the needs of the consumers (Knapp, 2000).

A common way that companies achieve this is through the use of personalities and public figures such as celebrities to identify with the brand. In the wake of globalization and the emergence of cross border trade, the question at hand is whether a brand can have the same ‘personality’ in multiple countries.

Globalization has brought both benefits and challenges in equal measure. Multiple international markets have emerged as a result of technology and globalization. Many products enjoy a worldwide consumption and this has been attributed to marketing.

However, an important aspect of promoting a brand the personality attribute of that particular brand. It has been found that the culture attributes of different countries provides a barrier to a brand having one personality across different countries (Upshaw, 1995). This is because of the fact that different cultures have different values.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is therefore, impossible for a brand to have one personality in multiple international markets. People have different laws, customs, beliefs, and ways of life that are significantly different from other cultures and as such, even with the world becoming a global village thanks to information technology, the different people will want to relate to a product in a different way.

The need for specialization in personality branding in the world still remains high due to the different cultural beliefs that govern the people’s ways of life (Park


Just-in-time learning approach Exploratory Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Just-in-time learning is learning that occurs when it is needed by the learner. JIT learning is an important conception in the field of business and it is used mainly by students in honing individual expertise that they require so as to be competitive in the digital age (Harun, 2002). With the superfluity in technology E-learning is an important tool in advancing just-in-time learning.

People can now get information from the internet whenever they need it so long as they have a computer and internet connection. With the penetration of internet into homes and offices most people can now learn when and whenever they want. For instance in Canada most people are now E-learning from their offices and homes when they want to.

E-learning is adaptable hence people can improve their personal skills that they need. Learners don’t have to do full courses but only consume what they need. With E-learning employers can integrate learning with the systems at work for their workers. This is being adopted as the most efficient mode of JIT learning (Brown, 2009).

Just-in-Time learning is a modern approach to learning whereby learning is done only on a need basis unlike in the conventional ways of training. Just-in-time learning is mostly via the internet, E-learning and use of consultants when needed. This is an imperative breakthrough in learning as it has solved many training problems. JIT makes learners seek training when it is necessary unlike when they spontaneously seek learning.

The expenses that would be incurred in transportation are gotten rid of. Time that would be spent being absent from the work place is saved because learning can take place anywhere and at anytime so long as there is internet connectivity.

JIT learning also allows for customized content that will suit the needs of the user of the information. With JIT content is always updated hence one cannot depend on an outdated piece of information. In the long-term JIT is a relatively cheaper form of learning hence should be embraced in every organization (Murray, 2001).

E-learning has been lauded by many as a very effective form of learning; however it also has its own downsides. To start an E-learning program needs a huge start-up cost. There is also the concern of what can be presented using this form of learning. For instance some technical content may need practical learning hence may be unsuitable for E-learning.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More E-learning involves use of ICT hence some places that may not have access to these facilities will be at a disadvantage because they do not have access to E-learning facilities. Another drawback with E-learning is that there is non-existent or limited human interaction because the end-user most of the time interacts with the computer and not the teacher or instructor.

Thus it is not easy for the teacher to determine whether the student got the concept or not. It has been noted that some people in organizations are defiant to change thus may not be willing to appreciate E-learning.

Culture is also an impediment in this aspect as it can play a role in resistance to new ways of doing things including E-learning. Finally it needs personal initiative thus this poses a challenge as there is no one to push people to learn (Clark,


Social Exchange and Expectancy Theory Effects in Human Resource Development Research Paper college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Effects of social exchange theory on human resource development

How Expectancy Theory Affects Human Resource Development


References List

Introduction Before looking at the effects of both social exchange theory and expectancy theory on human resource development, it will be paramount to, first, describe what the theories are all about.

Social exchange theory is actually both a social psychology and a perspective of sociology that debunks the social changes and also the stability as a progression in relation to bargained social exchanges between two or more groups of individuals or parties (Rosenberg 1990).

Social exchange theory argues that all relationships between human beings are informed by what is referred to as subjective analysis of cost and benefits; this also involves the comparison of the best available alternatives. Social exchange theory is rooted in the ideologies of economics, sociology and psychology (Schellenberg 1996).

Social exchange theory utilizes some of the assumptions made in both structural and rational choice theories (Turner 2006). Social exchange theorists posit that human behavior is informed by the kind of reward associated with a given behavioral style. This implies that rewards play a significant role in determining a particular manner in which an individual should behave given a specific situation or condition (Rew 2005).

Meanwhile, expectancy theory is major associated with mental or cognitive processes that relates to making of choices or just choosing. It gives an explanation of the process an individual goes through in order to make a choice or choose from available alternatives. Both social exchange and expectancy theories are greatly related to each other. This paper examines the effects the theories have on human resource development (DuBrin 2008).

Effects of social exchange theory on human resource development It is important to note that the personnel of every organization have some minimum expectations to achieve; in case they fail to get these minimum expectations, they are likely to be de-motivated or under-perform in their organizational duties. In the process of human resource development, it is important to realize that the fact the human resource must be assured of their own benefits as they continue to be part of the organization.

The reality is that the more the employees are sure of getting out of their relationship with organization the more their productivity and the more the effort they put into their work (Dalkir 2005).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The performance of individuals within an organization is very much dependent on favors they get from participation towards achieving the goals of an organization. For instance, for every achievement, every employee expects some favors that are comparable to the input they put in order to make the achievements successful (Marcic


The Incorporation of Venezuela into Mercosur Thesis college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Introduction Mercosur (Southern Common Market) initially started with the Asuncion Treaty which was inked by Brazil, Argentina, Paraguay and Uruguay in 1991 to establish a free trade province and finally to establish a common market. In 2007, Venezuela joined the forum. (Tondi 353).

The main aim of Mercosur is to offer the probabilities to expand exports, to augment investment and to create a greater economic development among member nations. (Dominguez


Budgets Management Reference to the Budget of Aardvark Company Report a level english language essay help

Introduction The management of any organization is charged with the responsibilities of steering the company or organization for continuing growth prospects. Most of the management activities involve the functions of planning, organizing, controlling, staffing and directing among others. Budgeting forms a way of controlling the organization’s operational activities as well as the resource allocation through forecasting.

Ideally, the environment conditions determine the budgeting process. Although budgeting is considered a very key function of management for effective control of performance, some opinions are also raised that budgeting focuses more on the past performance basing budgets on comparisons between the actual and budgeted amounts, which does not conclusively consider the dynamism of the business environment.

It is worth appreciating the changes that are diverse in the environment today due to factors of globalization, changes in consumer behaviour and technology among others. Budgeting is worth evaluating in the concept of a changing environment and forms the core part of the organization driving performance and controlling of resources through strategies and the setting of targets.

This report presents an analysis of the budget of Aardvark Company. It presents the standards used, ways in which it can be used for staff motivation for the improvement of performance, its strengths as well as the techniques for producing such forecasting. It also considers the behavioural issues of the budget and offers suggestions on how the negative effects can be averted.

The Role of Management in Budgeting Management determines largely the performance and growth of an organization. The role of management in budgeting is very crucial due to their disposition in making decisions for the organization. Decision making thus influences the growth of their organization.

Managers as leaders have to forge the budgeting process to enable them make crucial decisions that affect the entire organization and would affect the areas of planning, staffing, motivation of staff, performance measurement, and their role of leading and directing (Juchau et al., 2004).

Budgeting is an expensive process that involves the various stakeholders for it to be objective and informed. Management thus has the responsibility of financing the budgeting process.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Drucker (2001) asserts of the changing environment of the business and as such suggests that managers have the role of considering the changes in the environment such as the technology, consumer behaviours and globalization. He suggests that managers thus have the role of ensuring the budget is flexible enough to deal with such changes and that more emphasis is given to competitiveness.

The other roles of management in the budgeting process include creating a performance climate, devolving performance responsibility for decision making to operational management, motivation of staff, customers and other stakeholders, supporting transparency in the organization, empowering operation managers, organizing for customer orientation, setting goals through benchmarking, forging for streamlining of the coordination of resource allocation and encouraging the need for innovation (Drucker, 2001).

Analysis of Aardvark Company Budget This report analysis covers the format used, standards used, desirable characteristics or strengths of the budget and the behavioural issues addressed. It also offers recommendations of suggestions of how the standards of budgeting can be used in staff motivation for improvements in performance as well as the techniques for the production of forecast estimates and how they can used as standards in budgeting.

In addition, the report considers the behavioural issues that arise from the budgeting process and the ways of averting the negative ones.

Analysis of Budget Format The budget for the company is a cash budget with monthly actual and budgeted amounts of a cash flow format. The purpose of this cash flow format is to enable the company maintain the cash level requirements.

This format takes into consideration the cash changes in the actual sales in cash, accounts receivable, bank income, other incomes, sale of capital investment, payments of income taxes, accounts payable, purchase of merchandise, dividends payable, and other capital expenditure (Cunningham, Nikolai